ayy te 70 ' 7 Sy +A. % abit) n aytene AA NAN we ‘ eh tk Haak inch ns A i Vey 12a v SOSROR RN i ( Oe i aac tere 7 a. See Te i) a ak * \ ny y yeoman vt cae \* | ‘ SOM Gael , : 4 * CWT Yada he i ‘y " Ki . ‘ f a Ane A SOURS) ’ DRCOG Viana as AG BL PAE ES | AND Tat PSF on a i » NA it ee ; ‘ ath yan Pe i eu hae a iY i x hve) Aalabta stent ‘ ita UGG Tk a he ware ate} vee 33) v9 2 Wieahwaeee SETA MENT , eae Tas) ra 3 Res eve aa bas hoe a , a taal’ tebe? teh vader y Lee RLY , vue) 3 6 MS alae Ae say the, #0 eh) Ay oe eat, SO ON ANRC bey Mote 1 aaa aeea Na ats? Cs? : ‘ hee CTU AlN Wt a Re ee ee Ea Ad vas eae a ly ’ N CRORE atte Fp aT een VE kea yay Te HG AT ROR RT aga Ath Varia ae f AY SER vate Oa: ; * rf ney) ay Vey Wace Lake ol Mia Sed S$ cThs Fa 4 vate bark eda ae8 409 SU f8 ta Con maa CI : Cth RS “ Pei erent Cee et ) Neat ALA hay ia Weta wh , \ Hi 4 Ad aD at Nera he yee bir be b 9 et yd A PY WP RLM Mee RB \s NEMS a Oe AERA a aleieg POR OK) 4 sain tf ites ane wht ny ! ‘a 8 eho cer arte wee Riera te ee Ec is ae N the xt) cada ais Wile | 34 ‘it Dae ORR ‘ WG oe Wout Pa Gt = ¥ on 5) i ‘ / te yee Bo: enw : F he 4 ele iy 1 y : 4 i : = eh nA JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOLUME 45, 1955 BOARD OF EDITORS R. K. Coox FENNER A. CHACE, JR. NATIONAL BUREAU OF STANDARDS U.S. NATIONAL MUSEUM ASSOCIATE EDITORS J. I. HorrmMan BERNICE SCHUBERT CHEMISTRY BOTANY Dean B. Cowles PuHitiep DRUCKER PHYSICS ANTHROPOLOGY ALAN STONE Davin H. DuNKLE ENTOMOLOGY GEOLOGY SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION WASHINGTON 25. D.C- PUBLISHED MONTHLY BY THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Mount Royaut & GUILFORD AVEs. BALTIMORE, MARYLAND ACTUAL DATES OF PUBLICATION, VOLUME 45 No. 1, pp. 1-32, January 28, 1955. No. 2, pp. 33-64, March 14, 1955. No. 3, pp. 65-100, March 30, 1955. No. 4, pp. 101-132, April 25, 1955. No. 5, pp. 1383-164, May 23, 1955. No. 6, pp. 165-200, July 7, 1955. No. 7, pp. 201-232, August 5, 1955. No. 8, pp. 233-268, August 23, 1955. No. 9, pp. 269-300, October 4, 1955. No. 10, pp. 301-332, October 31, 1955. No. 11, pp. 333-860, December 9, 1955. No. 12, pp. 361-388, December 29, 1955. Vot. 45 JANUARY 1955 No. 1 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES BOARD OF EDITORS Joun C. Ewnrrs R. K. Coox FrENNER A, CHACE U.S. NATIONAL MUSEUM NATIONAL BUREAU U.S. NATIONAL MUSEUM OF STANDARDS ASSOCIATE EDITORS J. I. HorrMan BERNICE SCHUBERT CHEMISTRY BOTANY Dean B. CowirE PuHitip DRUCKER PHYSICS ANTHROPOLOGY ALAN STONE Davin H. DUNKLE ENTOMOLOGY GEOLOGY PUBLISHED MONTHLY BY THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Mount Royat & GuILFoRD AVEs. Battimorr, MARYLAND Entered as second class matter under the Act of August 24, 1912, at Baltimore, Md. Acceptance for mailing at a special rate of postage provided for in the Act of February 28, 1925. Authorized February 17, 1949 Journal of the Washington Academy of Sciences This JouRNAL, the official organ of the Washington Academy of Sciences, publishes: (1) Short original papers, written or communicated by members of the Academy; (2) proceedings and programs of meetings of the Academy and affiliated societies; (3) notes of events connected with the scientific life of Washington. The JouRNAL is issued monthly. Volumes correspond to calendar years. Manuscripts may be sent to any member of the Board of Editors. It is urgently re- quested that contributors consult the latest numbers of the JoURNAL and conform their manuscripts to the usage found there as regards arrangement of title, subheads, syn- onymies, footnotes, tables, bibliography, legends for illustrations, and other matter. Manuscripts should be typewritten, double- spaced, on good paper. Footnotes should be numbered serially in pencil and submitted on a separate sheet. The editors do not assume responsibility for the ideas expressed by the author, nor can they undertake to correct other than obvious minor errors. Illustrations in excess of the equivalent (in cost) of one full-page halftone are to be paid for by the author Proof.—In order to facilitate prompt publication one proof will generally be sent to authors in or near Washington. It is urged that manuscript be submitted in final form; the editors will exercise due care in seeing that copy is followed. Unusual cost of foreign, mathematical, and tabular material, as well as 2INGENDIOUE) made in the proof by the author, may be charged to the author. Author’s Reprints—Reprints will be furnished in accordance with the following schedule of prices (approximate) : Copies 4 pp. 8 pp. 12 pp. 16 pp. 20 pp. Covers 100 $ 3.25 $ 6.50 $ 9.75 $13.00 $16.25 $ 3.50 200 6.50 13.00 19.50 26.00 32.50 7.00 300 9.75 19.50 29.25 39.00 48.75 10.50 400 13.00 ~ 26.00 39.00 52.00 65.00 14.00 Subscriptions or requests for the purchase of back numbers or volumes of the Jour- NAL or the ProceEpINGs should be sent to Harayp A. Reaper, Custodian and Sub- scription Manager of Publications, U. 8. National Museum, Washington 25, D. C. Subscription Rates for the JoURNAL.—Per year............-----++-+eeeeeeees $7.50 Price of back numbers and volumes: Per Vol. Per Number Vol. 1 to vol. 10, incl—not available*.....:............ — Vol. 11 to vol. 15, incl. (21 numbers per vol.)........... $10. 00 $0.70 Vol. 16 to vol. 22, incl, (21enumbers) periviols)eaeeeee ser 8.00 0.60 Vol. 23 to current vol. (12 numbers per vol.)........... 7.50 0.90 * Limited number of complete sets of the JouRNAL (vol. 1 to vol. 44, incl.) available for sale to libraries at $371.00. Monoarapu No. 1, ‘The Parasitic Cuckoos of Africa,’”’ by Herbert Friedmann $4.50 InpDEx to JoURNAL (vols. 1-40) and PRocEEDINGS.........................-. $7.50 PROCEEDINGS, vols. 1-13 (1899-1911) complete.............................. $25.00 Single volumes, unbound ac 94-2 sre ce le rs tee eee etn eee 2.00 Singleimumbers)sec4 5) ome sek hen tetany c tee sc suseeee acy So eget chee teat eae Prices on request Missing Numbers will be replaced without charge provided that claim is made to the Treasurer within 30 days after date of following issue. Remittances should be made payable to ‘‘Washington Academy of Sciences’ and addressed to the Treasurer, H. S. Rappinyn, 6712 Fourth Street, NW., Washington 12, D.C. Exchanges.—The Academy does not exchange its publications for those of other societies. Changes of Address—Members are requested to report changes of address promptly to the Secretary. JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vou. 45 January 1955 No. 1 PALEONTOLOGY .—NVew genera of Foraminifera from the British Lower Car- boniferous. RopeRt H. Cummines, University of Glasgow, Scotland. (Com- municated by Alfred R. Loeblich, Jr.) As part of a study of the British Carbonif- erous Foraminifera a revision of the Brady collection of Carboniferous and Permian Foraminifera in the British Museum (Natural History) has been completed. One of the most important results has been the recognition of new genera and species that not only are of stratigraphical value but also assist in the interpretation of the mor- phogeny and phylogeny of the Upper Paleo- zoic Foraminifera. Since some aspects of the major study are incomplete as yet and in order that the information on the new genera may be made available to other workers, a detailed description of three new genera and their type species are given here. It is interesting to note that no closely similar forms have been recorded from the American Mississippian, and it is hoped that this publication will lead others to confirm their presence or absence in extra-British areas. The writer would like to acknowledge the continued support of Prof. Neville George in this research and the valued co- operation and assistance from Dr. Alfred R. Loeblich, Jr., Dr. Helen Tappan, and other American experts and friends. Family ENDOTHYRIDAE Subfamily BrRaDYININAE ENDOTHYRANOPSIS, n. gen. Involutina (pars) Brady, 1869 (non Terquem, 1862). Endothyra (pars) Brady, 1873, 1876, et auctores. Type species (here designated): Involutina crassa Brady, 1869. Description.—Test free, relatively large, sub- globular to nautiloid; coiled with a slight degree of axial rotation and hence somewhat asym- metrical; relatively few whorls and moderate number of crescentiform chambers; almost or entirely involute with simple, slight sutures and rounded peripheral margin; granular surface; wall of granules of calcite bound by calcareous cement with small but varying proportion of adventitious material; apertural face inflated with low, lunate opening at base. Comparison and affinities—The genus Endo- thyranopsis differs from members of the Endo- thyrinae in several features. In the latter the wall is composed solely of granules of calcite bound by calcareous cement and is imperforate whilst, in the case of the new genus, the wall is not only relatively thicker and typically perforate but has a varying subordinate quantity of ad- ventitious material, usually in the form of quartz- grains and iron oxides. Other and more minor differences are to be found in the mode of coiling, number and form of chambers, and possibly in septal construction. The inclusion of Hndothyranopsis within the Bradyininae is based on obvious similarities of wall-structure and form to other members of the subfamily. Morphologically the simplest and stratigraphically the oldest, Hndothyranopsis appears to occupy a near ancestral position within the group and may represent an early develop- ment toward Bradyina Moller and Cribrospira Moller from the agglutinate ancestral stock. In the thin-sections of sagittal type, Endo- thyranopsis may be recognized by the relatively thick wall of characteristic composition, the few whorls and moderate number of chambers, the ploughsharelike or ax-shaped septal outlines, and the slight irregularity of coiling (Fig. 1, A). In transverse section it is often difficult to dis- tinguish from other members of the Bradyininae, for the strong obliquity of septal curvature in y, JOURNAL OF THE B C Fig. 1.—Endothyranopsis sp. Diagrams based on actual specimens showing typical appearance in thin-section: A, sagittal section; B, transverse section showing apparent lateral chamberlets due to septal curvature and axial rotation; C, oblique excentric tangential section. All x 35. Endothyranopsis may produce apparent lateral chamberlets in the umbilical region (Fig. 1, B) that appear identical to the sutural chamberlets of Bradyina when seen in the same section. How- ever, other morphological differences, such as the presence of axial rotation of coiling in Endo- thyranopsis in contrast to the planispiral coiling of Bradyina, allow a distinction to be made in most cases. Preservation matrix.—While the true nature of the wall structure is clearly demonstra- ble in well-preserved material, the large number of specimens that have undergone secondary alteration during the diagenesis of the host sedi- ment have led to confusion in the past. The perforate nature of the wall was noted by Méller (1878, p. 94), and though examples have been found in British material these are few in number. It would appear that one of the first stages in the alteration of the wall leads to the recrystallization of the caleareous matrix within the perforations and the production of granular calcite of similar texture of that of the primary wall. Hence an and WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 45, No. 1 apparently uniform development of calcite results that is superficially identical to that of the primary wall structure of the Endothyrinae. Quartz grains and fragments of several oxides of iron are the dominant types of adventitious material, and it may be that the nature of the environment determines the choice. Thus iron oxides are rather common in specimens from a host rock with a high iron content. Such evidence is by no means conclusive, however, for the factor of secondary iron enrichment in both sediment and specimen must not be overlooked. The distinction between quartz-grains of the primary wall-structure and crystalline quartz | introduced by partial silicifieation during di- | agenesis is difficult and is possible only after study of both specimen and host sediment. Rarely perfect steinkerns of silica are produced (Fig. 5, C) which are valuable in the analysis of internal morphology. Horizon and facies —Endothyranopsis is a com- mon and characteristic genus occurring in a wide variety of limestone and calcareous shale en- | vironments in the upper part of the British Lower | Carboniferous. It has been recorded, as Endo- | thyra crassa Brady, at similar horizons in Belgium, central Europe, and the U.S.S.R. In addition to the type species the following may be referred to Endothyranopsis: Endothyra conspicua Howchin, 1888; Hndothyra crassa var. compressa Rauser-Chernoussova and Reitlinger, | sphaerica | 1936; and Endothyra crassa var. Rauser-Chernoussova and Reitlinger, 1936. A B Fie. 2.—Loeblichia sp. Diagrams based on actual specimens showing typical appearance in thin-section: A, sagittal section slightly excentric with variation in wall thickness due to distortion of specimen; B, axial section showing position of septa in some whorls. Both X 75. | JANUARY 1955 CUMMINGS: Endothyranopsis crassus (Brady) Fig. 5, A-C Involutina crassa (pars) Brady, 1869. Endothyra crassa (pars) Brady, 1876, et auctores. Description—Test free, relatively large, nautiloid, subglobular, slightly asymmetrical; some degree of axial rotation of coiling resulting in rather small, shallow umbilical depression on one side and involute condition on other; usually three whorls present, increasing moderately in height as added and almost complete embrace- ment throughout; proloculum varies from 0.02 to 0.05 mm in diameter; 28 to 35 chambers in com- plete test and 10 in final whorl; chambers erescentiform with maximum width on median plane and tapering toward umbilical regions, having squarish outline in median section and with no marked inflation; somewhat incon- spicuous slightly depressed sutures, crenulated in parts and losing identity toward umbilici; radially aligned septa varying in shape from periphery to umbilici having a maximum thick- ness about one-third that of adjacent chambers; septal tunnel some one-third height of adjacent chambers; peripheral margin broadly and smoothly rounded with faint lobulation; surface rugose or granular; wall of granules of calcite bound by calcareous cement with a varying amount of adventitious material, usually quartz grains and more rarely oxides of iron, perforate in an irregular manner; apertural face broad, convex, slightly inflated shield with low, lunate opening at base on periphery. Depository, etc—Lectotype (slide P. 41651) and paratypes (slide P. 35439) in the Brady collection of Carboniferous and Permian Foraminifera, British Museum (Natural His- tory), from the upper part of the Lower Carbon- iferous, Great Orme’s Head, Caernarvonshire, North Wales (ex Dr. Holl’s collection) (Brady locality no. 36). Dimensions.—Lectotype: maximum diameter 1.41 mm; minimum diameter 1.29 mm; maximum width 0.91 mm; width of apertural face 1.1 mm; height of apertural face 0.5 mm. Comparison and affinities—The species, as redefined here on the basis of the type material, differs markedly from other forms in the British ‘Lower Carboniferous as yet undescribed and hitherto included by previous authors in . Endothyra crassa Brady. It differs from Endo- _thyranopsis conspicuus (Howchin) in having a NEW GENERA OF FORAMINIFERA 3 lower degree of axial rotation of coiling, a broader cross section and more tapering chambers. Preservation and matrix.—Brady (1876, p. 97) notes the presence of small tubercles in the umbilical regions of Hndothyranopsis crassus but these appear to be remnants of the original matrix in the type material (Fig. 5, A) and products of secondary alteration in other in- stances. Probably owing to a thinner wall the last chamber of the species 1s most commonly broken away. This is so in the case of the figured lectotype (Fig. 5, B), also figured by Brady (1876, pl. 5, fig. 16). Horizon and facies —Endothyranopsis crassus (Brady) is confined to the lower part of the Lower Limestone group in the Scottish Lower Carboniferous, being very common in the Dockra limestone and other contemporaneous limestones in the west of the Midland Valley and in the No. 2 limestone in the east. It occurs in the lower part of the Upper Dibunophyllum zone in the English Avonian. Earlier records of Endothyra crassa Brady occurring outside this stratigraphical range are based on specimens referable to the genus Endothyranopsis but not to the type species, Endothyranopsis crassus (Brady). LOEBLICHINAE, n. subfam. Tests characterized by small size, planispiral or subplanispiral mode of coiling and evolute condition, short axis of rotation, numerous whorls and chambers, wall of unknown primary composi- tion and structure, aperture of indistinct nature and usually terminal. This subfamily includes the new genus Loeblichia and is probably related to the Ozawainellinae. Reasons for the recognition of this new taxonomic unit are outlined below. LOEBLICHIA, n. gen. Endothyra (pars) Brady, 1873, 1876, et auctores. Type species (here designated): Hndothyra ammonoides Brady, 1873. Description—Test free, relatively small, discoidal or complanate; numerous whorls coiled in a planispiral manner though axial rotation may occur in early or late stages of growth; chambers numerous, crescentiform, regularly arranged, square to rectangular in sagittal section; sutures distinct and depressed in later portion only and internal septa normal to peripheral margin in sagittal section; periphery usually — slightly lobulate; primary structure of wall unknown— 4 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON usually preserved in recrystallized calcite, amorphous or crystalline silica; no chomata or secondary deposits present; aperture terminal, lunate opening at base of apertural face. Comparison and affinities—The genus Loeblichia does not appear to be related to any of the contemporary Endothyrinae of the Lower Carboniferous. It differs from Endothyra Brown, 1843, Endothyra Phillips, 1846, Plectogyra Zeller, 1950, and Mullerella Thompson, 1942, in the structure of the wall, the manner of coiling, and the chamberal arrangement. Certain morphological similarities exist be- tween Loeblichia and Nanicella Henbest, 1935, originally described from the Devonian of Iowa by Thomas (1931). It is doubtful, however, whether the degree of isomorphism is sufficient to indicate a common ancestry. Indeed the con- trasting dissimilarities in number of chambers, number of whorls, rate of chamberal growth, septal form and alignment suggest an analogous rather than homologous relationship between the two genera. The same conclusions can be made in a comparison of Loeblichia and Rhenothyra Beckmann, 1950, from the Rhenish Devonian where the morphological differences are even greater. Though Loeblichia might be considered an aberrant specialization of the Endothyrinae, as is the case of Paraendothyra Tchernysheva, 1940, both the stratigraphical and morphological evidence tells against its inclusion, and hence it is classified separately within the Loeblichinae. This may prove to be the ancestral stock from which such problematical fusulinids as Ozawa- inella Thompson, 1935, Nankinella Lee, 1933, and Nummulostegina Schubert, 907, arose. In sagittal section Loeblichia is distinguished by the characteristically altered wall structure, the numerous whorls and chambers, the nor- mality of septal alignment to the peripheral margin, and septal form (Fig. 2, A). In transverse section the planispiral coiling, wall-structure, septal intersections, mode of chamberal growth, and absence of chomata are criteria for its distinction from both representatives of the Endothyrinae and the Ammodiscidae. Preservation and matrix—Brady (1876, p. 95) notes that the test-wall of the type material of Endothyra ammonoides has a “compact arenace- ous texture” in thin-section, and Wood (1949, p. 239), describing the same material, writes: “When the tests are certainly recrystallized (as ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 45, NO. 1 for instance in the specimens of H. ammonoides figured by Brady 1876, pl. V, fig. 6) the grain size is much greater, and the specimen is less dark in transmitted light than the infilling.”’ These descriptions are inadequate, for they fail to reveal that all specimens from the type locality are secondarily silicified and that the test-wall is composed of either amorphous or crystalline silica. Examples of the latter show ‘‘a compact arenaceous texture,’ and, should this be associ- ated with an internal matrix of recrystallized calcite, as is often the case, the optical properties noted by Wood would be illustrated. Numerous specimens of Loeblichia have been examined from both English and Scottish areas, and in every case the microstructure of the wall has been altered from its primary condition. Often silicification of the host sediment has led—as in the case of the type material—to the production of crystalline quartz of irregular and comparatively large grain size which might be misinterpreted as a primary arenaceous ag- glutinate structure. The production of amorphous silica could be mistakenly identified as an original siliceous structure if no reference was made to the diagenesis of the host sediment. In certain Ayrshire localities replacement of the test-wall by cryptoerystalline silica of the chalcedonic variety has produced, by its fibrous structure, a superficial similarity to the hyalime perforate condition. ; The usual mode of preservation is in second- arily recrystallized calcite though examples are known where the wall is formed by an irregular dolomitic growth. Alteration of the calcareous structure is illustrated by the absence of cement, the irregularity and relatively large size of the constituent particles and the arrangement of the particles in relation to septal form (Fig. 3). Except in a few cases the products of altera- tion differ in the test-wall and the matrix, indi- cating a difference in original composition or physical structure or both between the test and | the host sediment. This proneness to alteration in Loeblichia, seen in numerous specimens from a variety of limestone and calcareous shale environments, is in direct contrast to the resistance to alteration shown by the Lower Carboniferous Endothyrinae, e.g., in EHndothyra, Plectogyra, or Mullerella. While examples of alteration are not unknown and are not uncommon in some areas, owing to local diagenetic phenomena, the permanence of JANUARY 1955 CUMMINGS: microstructure in the Endothyrinae is demon- strable in several ways; by the regularity of fine grain size in wall texture over wide areas and in a variety of facies, or again, by the maintenance of layering within the wall to the same propor- tions in each particular group. Many examples have been noted where altered specimens of Loeblichia occur, in the same sample, alongside unaltered members of the Endothyrinae. Hence the wall-structure of Loeblichia, in its original condition, must differ fundamentally from that of the Endothyrinae. It is for this reason that the new genus is included in the Loeblichinae. Horizon and facies —Loeblichia is comparatively tare in the British Lower Carboniferous and is eonfined to the upper horizons. It has been re- corded from the upper part of the Yoredale series in Northumberland, the Upper Dibuno- phyllum Zone of Northwest England, and both the Lower Limestone group and the Upper Limestone group of Scotland. Loeblichia ammonoides (Brady) Fig. 5, D, E Endothyra ammonoides Brady, 1873, 1876, et auc- tores. Description —Test free, relatively small, laterally compressed, of a complanate or bicon- eave form; coiling planispiral throughout the greater part though some indication of axial rotation in the first half whorl after the pro- Fic. 3.—Diagrams of texture of wall structure illustrating the effect of alteration, based on actual specimens. A, In Loeblichia (recrystallized) showing the irregularity of grain size and pattern. B, In Endothyra (unaltered) showing regularity of grain size and pattern which leads to retention of original septal margin. Both xX 400. NEW GENERA OF FORAMINIFERA Sr Fic. 4.—Fourstonella sp. Diagram based on actual specimen showing typical appearance in thin-section; longitudinal section of specimen at- tached to ecrinoid ossicles (black) showing in- equality of septal and layer wall and differing size of chamberlets on either side of foreign body—latter feature due to obliquity of section on right side. < 60. loculum and again toward the apertural region, where it leads to a slightly asymmetrical ar- rangement of the last four or five chambers; broad, shallow umbilici; whorls increase very slowly in height and embracement of one-quarter at any point; 10 whorls with numerous, small, slightly inflated, subcuboidal chambers in each, 23 in final whorl; in early part sutures thin, depressed lines, but in later portion depressed broad, possibly limbate, and with a sutural curvature away from the apertural region; septa about three-quarters height of whorl in length and one-quarter width of adjacent chambers in thickness; peripheral margin smoothly rounded and faintly lobulate outline; smooth or finely granular surface; wall of unknown primary composition—type material preserved in amorphous or crystalline silica; slightly inflated, terminal, shieldlike apertural face with low, lunate opening at base on median line with some indications of an original vestibular structure. Depository, etc.—Lectotype (slide P. 41650) and paratypes (slide P. 35438 and section P. 35500) in the Brady collection of Carboniferous and Permian Foraminifera, British Museum (Natural History), from the upper part of the Lower Carboniferous, Keld Head Mines, Wensleydale, Yorkshire, England (Brady _lo- eality no. 29). Dimensions.—Lectotype: maximum diameter 0.57 mm; minimum diameter 0.54 mm; maximum thickness 0.11 mm. Comparison and affinities—The species, as re- defined here on the basis of the type material, differs from other and as yet undescribed forms of 6 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Loeblichia, from the upper part of the British Lower Carboniferous, that hitherto have been grouped under Hndothyra ammonoides Brady. Preservation and matrix.— Vide supra. Horizon and facies —Loeblichia ammonoides (Brady) appears to be confined to the Lower Limestone group in the Scottish Lower Carbo- niferous and to equivalent horizons in England. Limited to a calcareous shale facies it has a spasmodic mode of occurrence and is never abundant or widespread. Family TROCHAMMINIDAE Subfamily TETRATAXINAE FOURSTONELLA, n. gen. Stacheia (pars) Brady, 1876, et auctores. Type species (here designated): Stacheia fusiformis Brady, 1876. Description.—Test attached, rarely free, small, fusiform, or globular; composed of series of layered chamberlets or subdivided segments arranged regularly around a foreign body such as VOL. 45, No. I crinoid ossicle, brachiopod spine, plant, etc.; layers subconical in form and concentric in ar- rangement, overlapping at margins, thin and numerous; chamberlets separated within layers. by secondary septa which are thinner than walls of layers; often faint sutures concentrically ar- ranged on exterior surface marking termination of laminae, otherwise smooth surface and peripheral outline; wall of calcareous granules bound by calcareous cement; aperture indistinct, terminal, basal, at margin of test and foreign body. Comparison and affinities: Fourstonella and Stacheia, as typified by Stacheia marginulinoides Brady, 1876, are distinguished by the fusiform shape, regularity and pattern of layer arrange- ment, and unequal thickness of septal and layer wall of the former to the irregular or acervuline mode of growth and equality of septal and layer wall thickness of the latter. Both Fourstonella and Stacheia appear to be independent derivatives of Valvulinella Schubert, 1907, which is undoubtedly developed from Fie. 5.—A, B (both X 35), Endothyranopsis crassus (Brady): A, Lateral view of lectotype (Brit. Mus. Nat. Hist. P. 41651) showing original matrix in umbilicus; B, ‘Apertural view of lectotype showing broken final chamber. Coll. P: 1000) showing internal morphology. C (X 35), Endothyranopsis sp.: Steinkern in silica (Glas. Univ. Geol. Dept. D, E (X 75), Loeblichia ammonoides (Brady): D, Lat- eral view of paratype (Glas. Univ. Geol. Dept. Coll. P. 1002) showing side of specimen and adhesion of matrix in parts; E, Apertural view of paratype. F, G (X 65), Fourstonella fusiformis (Brady): F, Dorsal view of paratype (Glas. Univ. Geol. Dept. Coll. P. 1001); G, Ventral view of same specimen with position of original foreign body shown in form of test. JANUARY 1955 CUMMINGS: NEW Tetrataxis Ehrenberg, 1843. This phylogenetic sequence from Tetrataxis is expressed morpho- genetically by an increasing subdivision of chambers and irregularity of form and accom- panies a transition to a fixed mode of life. Stacheia represents the culmination of this trend whilst Fourstonella expresses and represents an inde- pendent, partial fulfilment. In thin-section Fourstonella is characterized by its fusiform or circular outline, sessile habit, granular calcareous wall-structure, and in- equality of septal and layer wall thickness (Fig. 4). Preservation and matrix—With a few excep- tions all specimens of Fourstonella appear to have undergone little or no alteration and the primary structure of the wall is retained. Where silicifica- tion by chaleedonic varieties has taken place in both Fourstonella and Stachia concentric rings may develop on the exterior surface which are similar to, but independent of, the sutural pattern of Fourstonella. Horizon and facies.—A\though confined to the upper part of the British Avonian—the upper part of the Dibunophyllum zone and its equiva- lents—Fourstonella is a common and character- istic form of shelly limestone and calcareous shale facies. Fourstonella fusiformis (Brady) Fig. 5, F, G Stacheia fusiformis Brady, 1876, et auctores. Description —Test attached, short, stout, symmetrical, fusiform, round in cross-section, taperig at both ends, composed of layers of chamberlets—or subdivided segments—sym- metrically arranged around thin, columnar, foreign body; each layer embracing previous one at peripheral margin; chambers thin, numerous, subdivided by secondary septa into minute chamberlets; external suture lines thin, concen- tric, depressed; transverse secondary septa thin- ner than chamber or layer wall; periphery smoothly rounded and smooth or faintly granular surface; wall homogeneous, of calcareous granules bound by calcareous cement; aperture indistinct, terminal, basal. Depository, etc—Lectotype (slide P.41654) _ and paratypes (slide P.35458 and section P.35509) in the Brady collection of Carboniferous and Permian Foraminifera, British Museum (Natural History), from the upper part of the Lower Carboniferous, Fourstones, Northumberland, GENERA OF FORAMINIFERA a England (ex Rev. W. Howchin’s collection) (Brady locality no 16). Dimensions.—Lectotype: maximum 0.67 mm; maximum breadth 0.51 mm. Comparison and affinities—Brady (1876, p. 114) suggests that this form is closely allied to Stacheia marginulinoides Brady. However, when all morphological features are considered such a relationship is more apparent than real. Preservation and matrix.—Vide supra. Horizon and facies.—Fourstonella fusiformis (Brady) is present in the upper part of the British Lower Carboniferous in all areas and is particularly common in the shelly limestone facies. length REFERENCES BrecKMANN, H. Rhenothyra, eine neue Foramini- ferengattung aus dem rheinishen Mitteldevon. Neues Jahrb. Geol. Pal. Monatshefte 6: 183-187. 1950. Bravy, H. B. Notes on the Foraminifera of Min- eral Veins and adjacent strata. 39th Meeting (Exeter) Brit. Assoc. Adv. Sci.: 379-381 1869. Explanation of Sheet 23. Mem. Geol. Surv. Scotland: 63, 95, ete. 1873. Monograph of Carboniferous and Permian Foraminifera (the genus Fusulina excepted): 1-166, Palaeontographical Soc. London, 1876. Brown, T. The elements of fossil conchology. London, 1843. EHRENBERG, C. G. Meloniae of the Oolitic lime- stones of Germany and England. Ber. Preuss. Akad. Wiss. Berlin 1843: 106. Hensest, L.G. Nanicella, a new genus of Devo- nian Foraminifera. Journ. Washington Acad. Sci. 25: 34-35. 1935. Howcuin, W. Additions to the knowledge of the Carboniferous Foraminifera. Journ. Roy. Mier. Soc. 1888: 533-545. Ler, J. 8S. Vaxonomic criteria of Fusulinidae with notes on seven new Permian genera. Nat. Res. Inst. China Geol. Mem. 14: 1-32. 1933. Mo.uter, V. von. Die spiral-gewundenen Fora- miniferen des russischen Kohlenkalkes. Mem. Acad. Imp. Sci. St. Petersburg, ser. 7, 9: 1-147. 1878. Puruurps, J. On the remains of microscopic ani- mals in the rocks of Yorkshire. Proc. Geol. and Poly. Soc. W. Riding Yorks. 2: 274. 1849. RAvusER-CHERNOUSSOVA, D. M., Bewsary, G., AND ReErTLincer, R. The Upper Palaeozoic Foraminifera of Petschoraland (western margin of the northern Urals). Trans. Polar Comm. Acad. Sci. U.S.S.R. 28: 159-232. 1936. Scuusert, H. J. Vérlaufige Mitteilung vwiber Foraminiferen und Kalkalgen aus dem dal- matinischen Karbon. Verh. Geol. Reichs. Wien, Jahrg 1907: 211-214. 1907. TcHERNYSHEVA, N. I. “On the stratigraphy of the Lower Carboniferous Foraminifera in the 8 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Makarovski District of the southern Urals.’ Bull. Soc. Nat. Moscou 49: sec. geol. 18: 113-135. 1940. TrerQuEM, O. Recherches sur les foraminiferes du Lias. Mém. Acad. Imp. Metz 1862. Tuomas, A. O. Late Devonian Foraminifera from Iowa. Journ. Pal. 3: 40-41, 1931. Tuompson, M. L. The fusulinid genus Staffella in America. Journ. Pal. 9: 111-120. 1935. VOL. 45, No. | ——. New genera of Pennsylvanian fusulinids. Amer. Journ. Sci. 240: 403-420. 1942. Woop, A. The structure of the wall of the test in the Foraminifera; its value in classification. Quart. Journ. Geol. Soc. London 104: 229- 255. 1948. ZELLER, EX. Stratigraphic significance of Missis- sippian endothyranoid Foraminifera. Univ. Kansas Pal. Publ. art. 4, Protozoa, 1950. PALEONTOLOGY .—Foraminifera from some ‘Pliocene’ rocks of Egypt. Rusup1 Samp, Cairo University, Egypt. (Communicated by Alfred R. Loeblich, Jr.) This paper lists some 40 species of Foram- inifera separated from marly limestones of a supposedly “Phocene” outcrop in Helwan, Egypt. The ‘‘Phocene” deposits in Egypt have been the subject of many discussions and the basis of an enormous amount of litera- ture. The best description of them is found in Blanckenhorn (1903 and 1921) and in Picard (1943). The most authentic and complete résumé on the Pliocene of the Nile Valley, with which this paper is con- cerned, is found in Sandford and Arkell (1939). The ‘‘Phocene” deposits of the Nile Valley occur in the form of isolated out- crops that extend along the sides of the valley in a thin strip stretching from Cairo to the vicinity of Aswan. The outcrops occupy a more or less uniform height above sea level—indicating that a narrow arm of the Mediterranean Sea occupied the Nile Valley, and on the basis of stratigraphic relations and marine macrofossils during Astian time. There are two main facies, a marine facies of limestones and marly lime- stones along the immediate sides of the valley in the north and a conglomeritic sandy facies in the south and in the outer fringes of this ancient ‘Pliocene’ gulf. The outcrop from which the following species of Foraminifera come les some 10 km south of Helwan, a village to the south of Cairo. Macrofossils found in the outcrop include some considered to be the most typ- ical guide fossils for the Egyptian Pliocene, such as Ostrea cucullata, Pecten benedictus, and Chlamys scabrellus. The section consists of beds of marly limestones and limestones some 25 meters thick unconformably over- lying Eocene rocks and overlain by a grav- elly terrace ascribed by Sandford and Arkell to the Plio-Pleistocene. This study shows many interesting con- clusions with regard to the age of this forma- tion and the origin of its fauna. Age.—The Foraminifera recorded in the area are decidedly Mediterranean in aspect. They compare well with the Plhocene and Pleistocene faunas of the Mediterranean region and many species are still living today in the Mediterranean. Four species Cibicides gibbosa, C. rhodiensis, Asterigerina rhodiensis, and Quinqueloculina foliacea are known from the lower Pleistocene de- posits of the Isle of Rhodes. Practically all other species are known and are typical of other such classical late Cenozoic localities of Italy and Spain. Unicosiphonia cf. U crenulata is a characteristic fossil of the Pleistocene which is here recorded for the first time in the Mediterranean region. There are some interesting points about the assemblage. The majority of the species are cold-water forms. In fact this as- semblage, mainly composed of representa- tives of the families Textulariidae and Buli- minidae, can well be compared with that. living today in the deeper waters of the Recent Mediterranean (see for example the ecological studies of Colom (1942) and Said and Kamel (in press) on the Recent Medi- terranean fauna). The presence of this deep-water fauna in the ancient shallow Nile Valley gulf can be interpreted only as indicating a cold climate in Egypt at the time of the deposition of this formation. The distribution of the detrital sandy facies in the gulf shows that the climate was also wet. | This type of cool wet climate compares | well with the climate of the Calabrian | | JANUARY 1955 stage, now regarded on the basis of this kind of climate as belonging to the lower Pleistocene (Migliorini, 1948, and Movius, 1949). This assemblage from Helwan includes many species that do not appear in the Pho- cene-Pleistocene succession of the Rovigo boring, Italy (di Napoli-Alliata, 1946), except in the Calabrian. These species that seem to indicate the onset of the Calabrian stage are: Textularia abbreviata, T. acicu- lata, T. sagittula, and Discorbis orbicularia. From these two interesting observations it would seem that the ‘‘Pliocene”’ outcrop of Helwan should be assigned to the Cala- brian stage that opens the Pleistocene period. Such an assignment would have far reaching implications inasmuch as it would put the entire evolutionary history of the River Nile m the post lower Pleistocene time. A reevaluation and re-dating of the terraces left behind the Nile in pre-human times should therefore be investigated in the light of this new evidence. Although this study has been restricted to the Helwan area, it is possible that all other outcrops of the Nile Valley described as Pliocene may also belong to the Calabrian stage since all can well be correlated on the basis of their fossil content and stratigraph- ical relations with those of Helwan. If such is the case the very presence of Plio- -cene marine deposits in Egypt is question- able. Work on the revision of the macro- fauna of the so-called Pliocene of Egypt is now in progress. Origin of the fawna—There can be no doubt that the foraminiferal fauna de- scribed here is Mediterranean in aspect. However two facts remain to be noted. The complete absence of Indo-Pacific species in the assemblage is interesting inasmuch as it confirms the conclusions reached by Cox (1929), Picard (1943) and Sandford and Arkell (1939) as to the absence of any con- nection between the Mediterranean and the Red Sea since Miocene times. On the other hand, Said and Yallouze (in press) have shown recently from an analysis of the ‘Miocene faunas of Gebel Oweibid, Egypt, that even though the fauna is overwhelm- ingly Mediterranean in aspect it also in- ‘cludes some elements of the Indo-Pacific SAID: FORAMINIFERA FROM EGYPT 9 region—a fact which points to a temporary ingression of the Indo-Pacific. The com- position of the Helwan Calabrian foraminif- eral fauna seems to show that this con- nection ceased entirely during the Pliocene and lower Pleistocene time—contrary to Ball’s paleogeographic map (1939), which shows a connection between the Mediter- ranean and the Red Sea during the Pliocene. The second fact to be noted is the pres- ence of Cibicides gibbosa and C. rhodiensis, typical lower Pleistocene Mediterranean species in the Recent waters of the Red Sea. This can be explained only by assum- ing a temporary connection between the Mediterranean and the Red Sea in post lower Pleistocene time to allow for the mi- gration of these species. Such a connection must have been very temporary, since it did not substantially affect the aspect of the faunas of both seas which remain distinct. This assumed connection is confirmed by the presence of a marine level in the clysmic area common to both the Mediterranean and the Red Sea (as described by Hume and Little, 1928) and dated as Midde Paleolithic. Family TEXTULARIIDAE Genus Textularia Defrance, 1824 Textularia abbreviata d’Orbigny Textularia abbreviata d’Orbigny, Foram. Foss. Vienne: 249, pl. 15, figs. 9-12. 1849. This distinct species occurs in small numbers in the samples from Helwan. This species has been noted from the Miocene of central Europe, but does not seem to appear in the Mediterranean until the Calabrian. It is also recorded from the Recent seas. Textularia cf. T. aciculata d’Orbigny Textularia aciculata d’Orbigny, Ann. Sci. Nat. 7: pl. 11, figs. 1-4. 1826. A few specimens that seem to belong to this species occur in the Helwan material. Specimens are slightly longer and thinner particularly at their initial end than in the typical form. This species appears in the Mediterranean deposits only since the Calabrian. Textularia candeiana d’Orbigny Textularia candeiana d’Orbigny, in de la Sagra, Hist. Phys. Pol. Nat. Cuba, “Foraminiféres’’: 143, p. 1, figs. 25-27. 1839. 10 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES The distribution of this species in the Recent waters is cosmopolitan. In the modern Mediter- ranean it lives in the deeper waters, together with other representatives of the family Textulariidae. Textularia neorugosa Thalmann Textularia neorugosa Thalmann, Contr. Cushman Found. Foram. Res. 1: 45. 950. This cosmopolitan species occurs abundantly in the Helwan material. Test large, robust; chambers numerous with their lower margins excavated and with overhanging lateral lobula- tions; sutures irregularly rugose; peripheral mar- gin of the test subacute. Specimens resemble those recorded from the Red Sea (Said, Contr. Cush- man Found. Foram. Res., 1: 5, pl. 1, fig. 5, 1929.). Textularia pseudorugosa Lacroix Textularia pseudorugosa Lacroix, Bull. Oceanogr. 582: 11, fig. 3 (in text). 1931. Inst. This is a Mediterranean species known from the deeper Recent waters of this Sea. It is a well- defined species with a rapidly expanding keeled test, distinct sutures, and numerous chambers three times as wide as high. Textularia sagittula Defrance Textularia sagittula Defrance, Dict. Sci. Nat. 32: 177. 1824; 53: 344. 1828; Atlas Conch.; pl. 18, fig. 5. 1824. This is a deep-water Mediterranean species that is recorded in small numbers in the outcrop studied. Family MInioLipar Genus Quinqueloculina d’Orbigny, 1826 Quinqueloculina foliacea (Terquem) Triloculina foliacea Terquem, Mém. Soc. Géol. France, ser. 3, 1, pt. 3: 60, pl. 6, figs. la-e. 1878. Specimens of this Lower Pleistocene species of the Mediterranean region are found in small numbers in the Helwan material. The test is somewhat foliated with the foliae extending in keel-like projections at the edge of the chambers. This is a distinct and well-defined species. Family Lacenrpan Genus Robulus Montfort, 1808 Robulus cultratus (Montfort) Robulina cultrata d’Orbigny, Ann. Sci. Nat. 7: 287, no. 1. 1826; Modéles no. 82. 1826. vou. 45, No. 1 This cosmopolitan species is found in small numbers in the Egyptian material. According to Cushman and McCulloch (Allan Hancock Pacific Exped. 6 (6): 296, 1950) this species is re- corded from deep waters at an average depth of 65 to 90 fathoms. Our specimens lack the keeled periphery of specimens of many authors although they resemble the forms recorded from the late Tertiary deposits of the Mediterranean region by the earlier workers. Genus Nodosaria Lamarck, 1812 Nodosaria sulcata d’Orbigny Nodosaria sulcata d’Orbigny, Ann. Sci. Nat. 7: 253, no. 21. 1826. Cushman, Cushman Lab. Foram. Res. Special Publ. 13: 12, pl. 2, fig. 2; pl. 3, fig. 2. 1945. A few specimens of this species, which is known from the Italian Pliocene and Recent Mediter- ranean, are recorded in Helwan. They are always 2-chambered and costate. Family NONIONIDAE Genus Nonion Montfort, 1808 Nonion ibericum Cushman Nonion ibericum Cushman, U. 8S. Geol. Surv. Prof. Paper 191: 17, pl. 4, figs. 17, 18. 1939. A few typical specimens of this species are found in Helwan. The small test, the rounded periphery, the umbilical plug, and the sigmoidal sutures characterize this species. This is a Pleistocene species recorded previously from Malaga, Spain. Nonion pompiloides (Fichtel and Moll) Nonion umbilicatula d’Orbigny, Ann. Sei. Nat. 7: 293, pl. 15, figs. 10-12. 1826. Nonion pompiloides Cushman, U. 8. Geol. Surv. Prof. Paper 191: 19, pl. 5, figs. 9-12. 1939. A few specimens of this species are recorded from Helwan. Specimens are smaller than is usual and are thinner. This is mainly a Mediterranean species known from the late Cenozoic and Recent waters of this region as well as from many other localities. Genus Elphidium Montfort, 1808 Elphidium crispum Linné Elphidium crispum Cushman, Contr. Cushman Lab. Foram. Res. 5: 20, pl. 4, figs. 3, 4. 1929. Several typical specimens of this Mediter- ranean species are recorded from the Helwan material. | | JANUARY 1955 Family PoLyMORPHINIDAE Genus Pyrulina d’Orbigny, 1830 Pyrulina fusiformis (Roemer) Polymorphina fusiformis Roemer, Neues Jahrb. fur Min., ete., 1838: 386, pl. 3, fig. 37. Pyrulina fusiformis Cushman and Ozawa, Proc. U. S: Nat. Mus. 77 (art. 6): 54, pl. 13) figs. 3-8. 1930. This deep-water species, recorded from modern seas and late Tertiary deposits of the Mediterranean region, is noted in small numbers in the Helwan material. Specimens differ slightly from those of the deep Atlantic by having more depressed sutures. Family BULIMINIDAE Genus Bulimina d’Orbigny, 1826 Bulimina acanthia Costa Bulimina acanthia Costa, Atti. Accad. Pont. 8, pt. 2: 335, pl. 13, figs. 35, 36. 1856. A few specimens of this species occur in our material. The chambers are inflated particularly in the latter part of the test with sight overhang- ing but are not ornamented with any spines. This species Is common in the Italian Pliocene. Bulimina buchiana d’Orbigny Bulimina buchiana d’Orbigny, Foram. Fossiles Bassin Vienne: 186, pl. 11, figs. 15-18. 1846. This Miocene Mediterranean species is found in the Helwan material in abundance. Specimens are smaller than usual and the test is ornamented with extremely fine longitudinal costae. The chambers are inflated and there is no overhanging. Bulimina costata d’Orbigny Bulimina costata d’Orbigny, Ann. Sci. Nat. 7: 269, no. 1, 1826. This species occurs in abundance in the Egyptian material. Specimens are typical. This species seems to be one of the autochthonous forms of the Mediterranean region that has been re- corded from since the Miocene to the Recent. It is also recorded off the coast of Ireland. Bulimina elongata d’Orbigny Bulimina elongata d’Orbigny, Ann. Sci. Nat. 7: 269, no. 9. 1826. This species is found in abundance in the Egyptian material. Specimens have an elongate slender test, inflated and angled chambers, and smooth polished wall. Our specimens resemble those recorded from the Mediterranean area. SAID: FORAMINIFERA FROM EGYPT 11 This species ranges from the Eocene to the Re- cent and seems to have its origin in the Mediter- ranean region. Bulimina gibba Fornasini Bulimina gibba Fornasini, Mem. Accad. Sci. Ist. Bologna, ser. 5, 9: 378, pl. O, figs. 32-34. 1901. This species was recorded in the top part of the section. Specimens are typical except that very faint costae appear on the otherwise smooth and polished test. The terminal basal spine is lacking, but there are short spines that ornament the base. The chambers are distinct, regularly triserial, slightly inflated and offset so as to give a slight twist to the test. Bulimina inflata Seguenza Bulimina inflata Seguenza, Atti Accad. Gioenia Sci. Nat., ser. 2, 18: 25, pl. 1, fig. 10. 1862. This Mediterranean and east Atlantic species occurs in the Egyptian material in small numbers. Test widest near top with the last whorl forming about one-third of the entire length. This species is characterized by having broad costae, a rapidly tapermg test and chambers that do not overhang. This is one of the species that has probably invaded the Mediterranean in a cold period. It is common in the Pleistocene of Italy. Records of this species in older sediments need revision. Bulimina pupoides d’Orbigny Bulimina pupoides d’Orbigny, Foram. Fossiles Bassin Vienne: 185, pl. 11, figs. 11, 12. 1846. A few specimens of this species are found in the top beds of the Helwan section. They ap- proach in their structural detail those recorded from the Mediterranean region. Specimens lack, however, the lip and the tooth in the aperture. This species has a long record but is common in the late Cenozoic of the Mediterranean region. Genus Bolivina d’Orbigny Bolivina aenariensis (Costa) Brizalina aenariensis Costa, Atti Accad. Pont. 8, pt. 2: 297, pl. 15, figs. 1A, B. 1856. This is a late Tertiary Mediterranean species that has been much confused. Specimens look very much similar to those recorded from the Pliocene of Coroncina, Italy, in having an elon- gate test without a spine at the base, sutures slightly limbate and strongly curved, and the characteristic costae on the surface extending from the base to the middle of the test. 12 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Bolivina catanensis Seguenza Bolivina catanensis Seguenza, Atti Accad. Gioenia Sci. Nat., ser. 2, 18: 29, pl. 2, figs. 3, 3a, 3b. 1862. This is a typical Mediterranean species that is recorded from the Pleistocene of Italy. Speci- mens are compressed and have an elongate test which is occasionally twisted in its initial end. Bolivina cf. B. compacta Sidebottom Boliwina robusta var. compacta Sidebottom, Mem. Proc. Manchester Lit. Phil. Soc. 49 (5): 15, pl. 3, fig. 7. 1905. A few specimens that seem to belong to this species are found in Helwan. Specimens differ from typical in having a more roughened ex- terior, a rounded initial end, and a more elongate test. This is a Mediterranean species that has been recorded from many Recent seas at different depths. Genus Reussella Galloway, 1933 Reussella spinulosa (Reuss) Verneuilina spinulosa Reuss, Denkschr. Akad. Wiss. Wien. 1: 374, pl. 47, fig. 12. 1850. Verneuilina spinulosa Reuss, Denkschr. Akad. Wiss. Wien 1: 374, pl. 47, fig. 12. 1850. A few typical specimens of this cosmopolitan species are found in the Helwan material. Genus Uvigerina d’Orbigny, 1826 Uvigerina costai Said, new name Uvigerina striata Costa (non d’Orbigny), Atti Accad. Pont. 7 (fase. 2): p. 266, pl. 15, fig. 3. 1856—Cushman and Todd, Contr. Cushman Lab. Foram. Res. 17: 71, pl. 17, fig. 4. 1941. Specimens resembling Costa’s figures for this species have been found in the Helwan material. Test moderate in size for the genus, elongate, circular in transverse section, base tapering; chambers equal, rather large, slightly inflated; sutures distinct; wall with fine longitudinal striae interrupted at the sutures, extending through the length of the test equally; aperture at the end of a short neck, very slightly lipped. This species deserves a new name as U. striata has been used by d’Orbigny in 1826 for a Recent species. Genus Unicosiphonia Cushman, 1935 Unicosiphonia cf. U. crenulata Cushman Unicosiphonia crenulata Cushman, Contr. Cush- man Lab. Foram. Res. 11: 81, pl. 12, figs. 9, 10. 1935. vou. 45, No. 1 A few specimens of this species are found in Helwan section. Specimens are slightly different in having a more rounded initial end that does not show any traces of biseriality and in having more poorly developed crenulations. This is the first record of this species in the Mediterranean region. Family RoraiipAE Genus Discorbis Lamarck, 1804 Discorbis orbicularis (Terquem) Discorbina orbicularis H. B. Brady, Rep. Voy. Challenger, Zoology, 9: 647, pl. 88, figs. 4-8. 1884. This is mainly a Mediterranean east Atlantic species of wide geographical distribution in Recent waters. It is also recorded from the late Tertiary deposits of the Mediterranean region, although it seems not to have invaded the Recent Mediterranean except in the Calabrian time. Family AMPHISTEGINIDAE Genus Asterigerina d’Orbigny, 1839 Asterigerina rhodiensis Terquem Asterigerina rhodiensis Terquem, Mém. Soc. Géol. France, ser. 3, 1, pt. 3:31, pl. 3, figs. 1-4. 1878. © Typical specimens of this species recorded from the lower Pleistocene of the Isle of Rhodes are recorded in abundance in the Helwan material. Family GLOBIGERINIDAE Genus Globigerina d’Orbigny, 1826 Globigerina bulloides d’Orbigny Globigerina bulloides d’Orbigny, Ann. Sci. Nat. 7: 277, no. 1. 1826; Modeles nos. 17, 76. 1826.— Cushman, Contr. Cushman Lab. Foram. Res. 17: p. 38, pl. 10, figs. 1-13. 1941. Typical and well-preserved specimens of this species are recorded in large numbers at the top beds of the Helwan section. They agree in detail with d’Orbigny’s original descriptions and mod- els. The occurrence of this species in abundance indicates conditions where the effect of freshening of water was not felt. Family ANOMALINIDAE Genus Planulina d’Orbigny, 1826 Planulina sp. Test much compressed, partly evolute, earlier chambers visible from both sides; chambers JANUARY 1955 numerous; sutures distinct, flush with the surface, eurved slightly toward the periphery; ventral side umbilicate; wall perforate, smooth; aperture at the base of the last chamber at the median line. The compressed large test and the wide circular umbilicus of the ventral side distinguish this species found in very small numbers in the top bed of the Helwan section. Genus Cibicides Montfort, 1808 Cibicides gibbosa (Terquem) Anomalina gibbosa Terquem, Mém. Soc. Géol. France, ser. 3,1, pt. 3: 24, pl. 2, fig. 7. 1878. Cibicides gibbosa Said, Cushman Lab. Foram. Res. Special Publ. 26: 48, pl. 4, fig. 19. 1949. Typical specimens of this species hitherto re- corded from the Lower Pleistocene of the Isle of Rhodes and the Recent Red Sea are found in large numbers in the Helwan material. This species is biconvex and is coarsely perforate. It possesses the apertural characteristics of the genus Cibicidoides Brotzen, 1936. The author prefers to place this species in the genus Cibicides until the validity of the genus Cibicidoides is cleared (see Hofker, 1951, Siboga Exped. m1). Cibicides lobatulus (Walker and Jacob) Truncatulina lobatula H. B. Brady, Rep. Voy. Challenger, Zoology, 9: 660, pl. 92, fig. 10; pl. 93, figs. 1, 4, 5; pl. 95, figs. 4, 5. 1884. Typical specimens of this cosmopolitan species are found in the Helwan material. According to Cushman this is a ‘‘very common species in cool waters.” There are records, however, of this species in deeper tropical waters and in tropical shallow seas, but such records probably need revision. Cibicides refulgens Montfort Cibicides refulgens Cushman, U. 8. Nat. Mus., Bull. 104, pt. 8: 116 pl. 21, figs. 2a-c. 1931. This is a cosmopolitan species that is par- ticularly abundant in cool waters of the modern seas, according to H. B. Brady. SAID: FORAMINIFERA FROM EGYPT 13 Cibicides rhodiensis (Terquem) Truncatulina rhodiensis Terquem, Mém. Soc. Géol. France, ser. 3, 1, pt. 3: 21, pl. 1, fig. 26. 1878. Cibicides rhodiensis Said, Cushman Lab. Foram. Res. Special Publ. 26: p. 42, pl. 4, fig. 16. 1949. This species recorded from the Lower Pleisto- cene of the Isle of Rhodes and the Recent Red Sea is found in abundance in Helwan. The dis- tribution of this species can be explained only if we assume a temporary connection to have existed between the Mediterranean and the Red Sea sometime in the Pleistocene. Specimens are typical and abundant. REFERENCES Batu, J. Contributions to the geography of Egypt: Survey of Egypt. 1939. BLANCKENHORN, M. Neues zur Geologie und Paleon- tologie Aegyptens: IV. Das Pliozan. Zeitschr. deutschen geol. Ges. 53: 307-502. 1903. . Handbuch der regionalen Geologie, Aegypten. Heidelberg, 1921. Cotom, G. Una contribucién al conocimiento de los foraminiferos de la Bahia de Palma de Mallorca. Notas y Res. Inst. Espaftiol Oceanografia, ser. 2, no. 108. 1942. Cox, L. R. Notes on the post-Miocene Ostereidae etc. Proc. Malac. Soc. London 48, pts. 4 and 5: 165-209. 1929. Hume, W. F., and Lirrin, O. H. Raised beaches and terraces of Egypt. C. R. Union Geogr. Intern., Paris (session 14, 1926) : 9-15. 1928. Movius, H. M. Villafranchian stratigraphy in southern and southwestern Europe. Journ. Geol. 57: 380-412. 1949. Napour-Auuiata, EK. Dr. Contributo all conoscenza della stratigrafia del Pliocene e del Calabriano nella regione di Rovigo. Riv. Ital. Paleontologia 52: 19-36. 1946. Picarp, L. The structure and evolution of Palestine. Bull. Geol. Dept. Hebrew University 4, Nos. 2-4. 1943. Sai, R., and Kame, T. Recent littoral Foraminif- era from the Egyptian Mediterranean coast between Saloum and Bardia. (In press.) Sarip, R., and YaunouzE. Miocene fauna from Gebel Oweibid, Egypt. Bull. Inst. Egypte. (In press.) Sanprorp, K.S., and ArkeL., W. J. Paleolithic man and the Nile Valley in Lower Egypt. Oriental Inst. Publ. 46. 1939. 14 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES vou. 45, No. 1 PALEONTOLOGY .—A new species of Cymbiocrinus from the Pitkin. HARRELL L. Srrimeie, Bartlesville, Okla. (Communicated by Alfred R. Loeblich, Jr.) The form described below as Cymbio- crinus pitkini, n. sp., is from the Pitkin formation, Chester, of the Cookson Hills southeast of Fort Gibson, Okla. Strong affinity with Pennsylvanian representatives of the Ampelocrinidae is indicated. DENDROCRINOIDEA Bather AMPELOCRINIDAE Kirk Cymbiocrinus Kirk, 1944 Cymbiocrinus pitkini, n. sp. Fig. 1 Description.—The crown of the holotype is 43 mm high; the dorsal cup is about 2.5 mm high by 9.6 mm wide. Dorsal cup is shallowly bowl-shaped, with shallow basal concavity. IBB small, confined to the basal concavity and entirely covered by the pentagonal shaped proximal columnals. BB are five, small, and form sides of the basal concavity but curve upward to participate slightly in the lateral walls of the cup. RR are five large elements with width slightly greater than length. The single anal plate is quadrangular, resting evenly on the truncated upper edge of post. B, and does not extend above the cup height. There are 10 long, slow-tapering, uniserial arms. PBr is low, wide, with lateral sides taper- ing slightly. Axillary PBre is large, lateral sides expanding for a short distance thence sloping rapidly to the apex of the plate. SBrBr are remarkably regular segments. Each SBr appears to have two well-developed though thin pinnules of moderate length, one on each lateral side. There is no demonstrated tendency toward fusion, or syzygy, other than between PBr; and PBro. The tegmen, or anal sac, has not been ob- served. Remarks.—The arms of C. pitkini serve most readily to distinguish it from other described species. The regularity of the relatively thick SBrBr, with no tendency toward cuneiformity or syzygial pairs, in unique for known species referred to this genus. C. gravis Strimple (1951), from the slightly older Fayetteville formation, has cuneiform arms, and the axillary PBrs has no lateral sides, so that the first SBr is in contact with PBr;. The basal plates of C. gravis are more pronounced and bulbous than those of C. pitkini. Both species have pentagonal stems and in that respect are distinct from all other known species of Cymbiocrinus. Occurrence.-—Approximately 4 miles southeast of Greenleaf Lake in bluff overlooking the Arkansas River, Cookson Hills, Okla.; upper Pitkin limestone formation, Chester, Mississip- pian. Types.—Holotype and paratype collected by the author. To be deposited in the U. 8. National Museum. REFERENCES Kirk, Epwin. Amer. Journ. Sci. 242: 233-245. 1944. Srrimpie, Harretrt L. Bull. Amer. Pal. Soc. 33(137): 18, 19, pl. 4, figs. 4-6. 1951. ae Fie. 1.—Cymbiocrinus pitkini, n. sp. View of holotype from the posterior, X 1.7 JANUARY 1955 NEWHOUSE ET AL.: IMMATURE SARCOPHAGIDAE 15 ENTOMOLOGY —The immature stages of Sarcophaga cooleyi, 8. bullata, and S. shermani (Diptera: Sarcophagidae). VERNE F. Newnouse, Davin W. WaLker, and Mavricr T. JamrEs, State College of Washington. This paper describes the immature stages of three species of saprophagous flies, Sarcophaga cooleyi Parker, S. bullata Parker, and S. shermani Parker. These flies show an extremely close relationship to one another as adults, and this affinity is even more completely borne out by comparative study of their larval stages. Greene (1925) described briefly and illus- trated the puparia of Sarcophaga cooleyz and S. bullata. The larva of S. bullata, un- doubtedly third stage though not expressly so stated, is also briefly discussed and figured. Knipling (1936) described more fully the first instar of S. bullata, in com- parison with some other species of the same genus, and illustrated the cephalopharyngeal apparatus, the entire larva, and the pattern and morphology of the setulae. Root (1923) discussed the morphology and _ specific characters of sarcophagid larvae including bullata, with special emphasis on spiracular characters. As far as we can ascertain there has been no published study of the larval forms of S. shermani. This present study was initiated with the hope of distinguishing more clearly these important, closely related species and of facilitating their identification in the future. A great amount of the preliminary work on this study was done during the summer of 1951 by David W. Walker and presented in a thesis submitted as partial fulfillment of requirements for a M.S. degree in ento- mology at the State College of Washington. Material for Mr. Walker’s study, as well as for this one, was obtained through studies supported in part by funds provided for biological and medical research by the State of Washington, Initiative Measure no. 171. MATERIALS AND METHODS Material for study was taken from labora- tory colonies, reared at the State College of Washington, from stocks originally collected in various areas of the State. Samples were taken from well established colonies which had been carried through as many as 27 generations. Although larvae of all ages were examined, the most fully developed of each instar were selected wherever possible as it was felt that this would show most typically the anatomical characters of that instar. In all stages of all species except one (Sarcophaga bullata) second instar, of which 18 specimens were studied), at least 50 and as many as 300 specimens were ex- amined. For fixation, eggs and larvae were placed in water and heated to the boiling point for 30 seconds. The water was then decanted and the specimens were carried through 70 per cent alcohol for 24 hours, into abso- lute alcohol for a similar time period, drained, placed in xylene for 24 hours, and finally stored in clove oil. Those for gross examina- tion were retained in 70 per cent alcohol. Larvae for the purpose of illustration were removed from alcohol, cut in half, and boiled in concentrated potassium hydroxide until the integument was clear and the body contents removed. The cephalopharyngeal apparatus was examined under clove oil at magnification of 45 diameters, and all draw- ings were made with the aid of a micrometer grid. As sarcophagid flies are normally larviparous, eggs were obtained by dissec- tion or by forcing them from the abdomen of gravid flies before the development of the larvae. Sarcophaga cooleyi Parker Sarcophaga cooley: Parker, Can. Ent. 46: 417-423. 1914. Egg.—White; smooth; slightly curved, tapered moderately toward one end. Length 1.10 mm, diameter 0.333 mm. First stage larva.—White; muscidiform; length 1.50 to 4.75 mm, diameter 0.75 mm; cuticle nearly smooth. Anterior and/or posterior margin of each segment possessing many hooklike setulae arranged around the segmental circum- ference in the form of a band. Spinous bands very prominent; setulae dark brown in color; bands complete on segments 2 through 12. Band on segment 2 (first thoracic) very broad, especially ventrally just posterior to mouth hooks. Bands 16 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCEINCES on anterior margins usually complete on seg- ments 2 through 9; incomplete on segments 10 through 12. Bands on posterior margins usually absent on segments 2 through 4; com- plete on segments 9 through 11; and incomplete on segments 5 through 8. Dorsal and lateral portions of bands on segments 5 through 12 not as heavy or dark as on the more anterior seg- ments. Larvae metapneustic; prothoracic spiracles non-functional but may be visible beneath integument, especially just before the molt. Caudal pair of spiracles situated in a shallow cavity, each unit consisting of two elongated spiracular openings lying side by side, their inner sides confluent and their axis dorsoventral. Distance between each spiracle approximately equal to the width of one spiracle. Peritreme absent. Posterior tubercles weakly developed; may appear to be absent. Opening of spiracular cavity bordered with nearly complete ring of setulae or darkened cuticular papillae. Anal tubercles small but prominent. Anal opening surrounded by patch of black setulae. Cephalopharyngeal skeleton (Fig. 1).—Labial sclerite well formed, heavily pigmented. Mouth hooks fused, or in process of fusing postero- ventrally. Hooks arising from anterodorsal corner of sclerite, extending forward in a smooth even curve, terminating in a sharp point above the median longitudinal axis of the sclerite.1 An- terior lower edge of sclerite more or less sharp and truncate. Hypostomal] sclerite small; from a lateral aspect wedge-shaped, broadened pos- teriorly, narrowed anteriorly; from a ventral aspect much less pigmented, broad and _ thick posteriorly, extending anteriorly as two thin lateral processes. Small accessory sclerite be- tween mouth hooks not visible. Dental sclerite apparently absent. Pharyngeal sclerite well de- veloped; well pigmented. Anterior process of ventral portion possessing a small sclerotized extension which protrudes posteriorly. Upper posterior end of ventral cornu heavily pigmented, protruding upward and outward beyond lower edge. Over-all length of skeleton 0.455 to 0.546 mm. Second stage larva——White; muscidiform; length 5.0 to 9.0 mm, diameter 0.75 to 1.75 mm. Entire cuticle covered with minute papillae 1 The median longitudinal axis is here defined as a line drawn through the body of the sclerite from back to front midway between the posterior corners and roughly parallel to the lower edge. vou. 45, No. 1 except the anterior margin of each segment which possesses many hookline setulae; anterior spinous bands prominent, setulae dark brown in color. Lateral margins of oral opening possessing minute ridges which radiate from the opening. Band on segment 2 sometimes divided, either with a heavy patch of setulae dorsally and ventrally, or with the band complete but with its lateral portions weakly developed; band some- times obscured as a result of retraction of the cephalic segment. Bands on anterior margins usually complete on segments 2 through 9 or 10; incomplete on segments 10 or 11 through 12. Bands on posterior margins usually absent on segments 2 through 4; incomplete on segments 5 through 7; complete on segments 8 through 11. Larvae amphipneustic; prothoracic spiracle near posterior margin of segment 2 (first thoracic), prominently divided into 12 to 15 digits, each terminating in an oval spiracular opening. Caudal spiracles, each composed of two slit-like openings, situated in a deep cavity; peritreme present but weakly developed. Spiracles almost contiguous at upper inner border. Posterior tubercles humplike; posterior cavity bordered with complete ring of setulae or darkened integumental papillae. Anal tubercles prominent and fingerlike. Anal opening surrounded by small patch of black setulae. Cephalopharyngeal skeleton (Fig. 2).—Labial sclerite heavy, deeply pigmented; hook extending from upper anterior corner of sclerite outward and downward in a smooth curve, but terminating above the median longitudinal axis of the sclerite. Lower anterior corner of sclerite possessing a rounded toothlike protuberance; the sliverlike dental sclerite clearly visible just posterior to this protuberance. Accessory sclerite slender, lying between posterior ends of labial sclerites, extend- ing downwards below the edge of the labial sclerite so as to give the impression of a small ventral process on the sclerite when viewed from a lateral aspect. Hypostomal sclerite narrowed anteriorly, fused basely to the pharyngeal sclerite. Paired infrahypostomal sclerites weakly developed, lightly pigmented; visible from dorsal aspect between anterior arms of hypostomal sclerite. Pharyngeal sclerite lightly pigmented; parastomal sclerite rather thick, blunt; dorso- pharyngeal sclerite lightly pigmented, flattened anteriorly. Ventral cornu thickened posteriorly; the upper edge bending dorsally and possessing a small, weakly developed fenestra, the lower edge JANUARY 1955 NEWHOUSE ET AL.: IMMATURE SARCOPHAGIDAE 17 Fias. 1-9.—Cephalopharyngeal skeletons of Sarcophaga, lateral (upper figure) and ventral (lower figure) views: 1, S. cooleyi, first instar; 2, same, second instar; 3, same, third instar. 4, S. bullata, first instar; 5, same, second instar; 6, same, third instar. 7, S. shermani, first instar; 8, same, second instar; ), same, third instar. Drawn by Verne F. Newhouse. Drawings in each case based on representative specimens of the series studied. 18 extending posteriorly. Over-all length of skeleton usually about 0.966 mm. Third stage larva.—White, muscidiform; length 8.75 to 20.25 mm; at maturity (average of 10) 19.17 mm. Diameter 1.5 to 4.5 mm. Entire cuticle covered with minute papillae except the anterior margin of each segment which possesses many hooklike setulae. Spinous band on segment 2 (first thoracic) incomplete; large patch of setulae posterior to mouth hooks, similar patch dorsally but lateral extensions of band incomplete. Oral margin posessing small ridges which radiate from the oral cavity, extending well laterally on the cephalic segment. Spious bands complete on segments 2 through 12. Bands on anterior margins usually complete on segments 2 through 10; incomplete on segments 11 and 12. Bands on posterior margins usually absent on segments 2 through 4; incomplete on segments 5 through 8; and complete on segments 9 through 11. Pro- thoracic spiracles prominent, divided into 9 to 17 digits, but more commonly into 14 to 16. Caudal spiracles, each divided into three slit- like openings, situated in a deep cavity. Peritreme prominent, strongly developed; extending dorsally and medially to form a rather sharp upper inside angle, then laterally and ventrally in a rather regular curve to terminate directly beneath the innermost slit. Ratio of width of one spiracle to distance between spiracles 5.77 to 3.75 (average of 10). Posterior tubercles slender and fingerlike. Spiracular cavity bordered by ring of microscopic setulae or dark papillae. Anal tubercles large and fingerlike, depending from a prominent anal process. Anal opening surrounded by small patch of black setulae in contrast to colorless setulae of body in general. Cephalopharyngeal skeleton (Fig. 3).—Labial sclerite strongly developed, heavily pigmented; hook arising from upper anterior angle of sclerite, extending straight outward, then bending down- ward in a rather sharp curve. Front angle below tooth sharp, truncate. Dental sclerite strongly developed. Accessory sclerite protrudes below lower edge of labia] sclerite, appearing from lateral aspect as a process of that sclerite. Hypostomal sclerite roughly rectangular, more narrowed anteriorly than posteriorly. Paired infrahy- postomal sclerites visible between and below arms of hypostomal sclerite. Pharyngeal sclerite heavily pigmented medially, but lightly pig- mented distally. Dorsopharyngeal sclerite lightly pigmented except for extreme upper anterior JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 45, No. 1 flattened area. Parastomal sclerite rather heavy, blunt. Dorsal cornu possessing an elongated, narrow fenestra; ventral cornu thickened pos- teriorly, possessing a small, weakly developed fenestra in upper posterior corner. Lower edge of ventral cornu (sometimes almost indiscernible) convex. Lines of axis of dorsal and ventral cornu divergent posteriorly. Overall length of skeleton usually about 1.70 mm. Pupa.—Elliptical, dull dark red; 8.5 to 11 mm in length, 3 to 5 mm in diameter. Opening of spiracular cavity oval to elliptical. Spira- cular plate on roof of posterior cavity shining deep red-brown; slits almost white in contrast. Tubercles surrounding posterior cavity flat- tened, distorted. Ana] tubercles prominent. Posterior tubercles connected to anal tubercles by a broad, rounded ridge. Spinous bands complete on segments 3 through 12. Pro- throacic spiracles evident, but number of digits usually not discernible. Sarcophaga bullata Parker Sarcophaga bullata Parker, Can. Ent. 48: 359-364. 1916. Egg.—Unfertilized egg at time of copulation white, translucent; 0.49 mm in length, 0.30 mm in diameter. Shape almost as hen’s egg. Entire surface covered with minute depressions or pits.” Mature egg as in cooleyi; length 1.25 mm. Distinctly tapered anteriorly. Developing larva distinctly visible within. First stage larva—White, muscidiform, as in cooleyt. Newly hatched larva 2 to 2.5 mm in length; 0.5 mm in diameter. Spinous bands con- siderably more prominent than in cooleyi, almost black im color; not divided to as great an extent by plicae except ventrally. Bands on anterior margins usually complete on segments 2 through 7; incomplete on segments 8 through 10; and absent on segments 11 and 12. Bands on pos- terior margins usually absent on segments 1 through 6; incomplete on segments 5 through 8; and complete on segments 9 through 11. Anal tubercles more fingerlike than in cooley. Cephalopharyngeal skeleton (Fig. 4).—Labial sclerite well developed. Mouth hook arising as in cooleyi, but more slender and raised higher from median longitudinal axis of sclerite. Posterior 2 This degree in development unfortunately © could not be accurately matched in the other species, therefore cannot be compared. JANUARY 1955 articulation process extending laterally, very slender. Accessory sclerite visible between labial sclerites. Hypostomal sclerite thickened pos- teriorly. Anterior extensions of ventral cornu not possessing a dorsal process. Pharyngeal sclerite smaller and lighter in pigment than in cooleyi. Ventral cornu not extending dorsally, but ap- pearing bifurcated apically as a result of in- complete sclerotization. Over-all length of skeleton 0.483 mm. Second stage larva—Much as in cooley?. Larva apparently slightly larger. Length 5.25 to 9.25 mm, diameter 0.75 to 2.25 mm. Setulae of cuticle black; bands on segments 2 through 12 complete. Band on segment 2 very broad, especially ventrally. Bands on anterior margins usually complete on segments 2 through 7; incomplete on segments 10 through 12. Bands on posterior margins usually absent on segments 2 through 4; incomplete on segments 5 through 8, complete on segments 9 through 11. Narrow band of setulae partially surrounding base of anal prominence. Cephalopharyngeal skeleton (Fig. 5).—Labial sclerite more slender than in cooleyi. Hook ex- tending below the median logitudinal] axis of the sclerite. Small tooth on lower anterior edge of sclerite more prominent, sharper than in cooley7. Dental sclerite obvious. Slender accessory sclerite larger, extending more ventrad and caudad, appearing from lateral aspect as a long pro- tuberance on labial sclerite. Hypostomal and infrahypostomal sclerites as in cooleyi. Pharyngeal sclerite lightly pigmented. Parastomal sclerite slender, usually bent up at the tip. Dorsopharyn- geal sclerite more heavily pigmented, anterior flattening more pronounced. Dorsal and ventral cornua fenestrate; ventral cornu more slender, lower edge more straight than convex. Overall length of skeleton about 0.866 mm. Third stage larva——White, muscidiform, much as in cooleyi. Larva slightly larger; length 9.50 to 21.00 mm; at maturity (average of 10) 20.17 mm. Setulae of cuticle may show blackening of tips. Bands on anterior margins usually complete on segments 2 through 8; incomplete on segments 9 through 12. Bands on posterior margins usually absent on segments 2 through 4; incomplete on segments 5 through 7; complete on segments 8 through 11. Posterior tubercles fingerlike; anal tubercles long and prominent. Ratio of width of one spiracle to distance between spiracles 5.80 to 3.95 (average of 10). Cephalopharyngeal skeleton (Fig. 6).—Labial NEWHOUSE ET AL.: IMMATURE SARCOPHAGIDAE 19 sclerites strongly developed. Hook arising from upper anterior angle, extending straight outward, then downward in a slightly more regular curve than in cooley?. Dental sclerite slightly less de- veloped. Accessory, hypostomal, and _ infra- hypostomal sclerites as in cooleyi. Pharyngeal sclerite much more compressed. Parastomal sclerite more slender, usually tilted upward anteriorly. Dorsal and ventral cornua fenestrate. Lines of axis of dorsal and ventral cornu not divergent posteriorly, but roughly parallel. Over- all length of skeleton 1.56 mm. Pupa.—As in cooleyi; perhaps slightly larger. Length 9.5 to 11.5 mm. Sarcophaga shermani Parker Sarcophaga exuberans Authors (not Pandellé, Rev. Ent. 15: 186. 1896). Sarcophaga shermani Parker, Bull. Brooklyn Ent. Soc. 14: 41-46. 1919; Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist. 9(11): 124. 1923. Egg.—Indistinguishable from cooleyi; length about 1.50 mm. First stage larva——As in cooleyi. Length of mature larva 5.50 mm, diameter 1.0 mm. Anal tubercles usually not as prominent as in cooleyi. Setulae of spinous bands black in color. Bands on anterior margins usually complete on seg- ments 2 through 11; absent on segment 12. Bands on posterior margins absent on segments 2 through 4; incomplete on segment 5; complete on segments 6 through 11. Cephalopharyngeal skeleton (Fig. 7).—Labial sclerite more slender than in either cooleyi or bullata; tooth arising at higher angle in relation to axis of sclerite. Dorsal cornu of pharyngeal sclerite relatively longer and more slender. Overall length of skeleton 0.533 mm. Second stage larva-—As in cooleyi. Length 5.50 to 8.25 mm, diameter 1.0 to 1.75 mm. Spmous bands on anterior margins usually complete on segments 2 through 9 or 10; in- complete on segments 10 or 11 through 12. Bands on posterior margins absent on segments 2 through 4; incomplete on segments 5 through 7; complete on segments 8 through 11. Bands on second and third segments sometimes incomplete and indistinct. Posterior tubercles humplike but prominent; anal tubercles more _fingerlike. Darkened band surrounding spiracular cavity not as prominent as in cooleyi. Narrow band of setulae at ventral base of anal tubercles. Cephalopharyngeal skeleton (Fig. 8).—Labial 20 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES sclerite with hook arising at high angle. Dental, accessory, hypostomal and _ infrahypostomal sclerites prominent. Pharyngeal sclerite well formed and quite heavily pigmented. Dorsal and ventral cornua fenestrate. Cornua sometimes divergent posteriorly. Lower surface of ventral cornu almost concave in outline. Over-all length of skeleton 1.05 mm. Third stage larva——As in cooleyt. Length 8.00 to 18.00 mm, diameter 1.5 to 4.0 mm; at maturity (average of 10) 16.79 mm. Setulae of cuticle may be black at tip or colorless. Bands on anterior margins usually complete on segments 2 through 10; incomplete on segments 11 and 12. Bands on posterior margins usually absent on segments 2 through 4; incomplete on segments 5 through 7; complete on 8 through 11. Ratio of width of one spiracle to distance between spiracles 5.4 to 2.5. (Average of 10) One specimen, obviously atypical, was observed with three slits in the left spiracle and two in the right. Cephalopharyngeal skeleton (Fig. 9).—Similar vou. 45, No. I to cooleyt. Mouth hook with small tooth on the underside at base. Dental sclerite robust. Parastomal sclerite slender and usually bent up at the tip. Pharyngeal sclerite quite heavily pigmented. Dorsal and ventral cornua fenestrate. Dorsal cornu comparatively more _ slender. Cornua divergent posteriorly. Lower edge of ventral cornu flattened or concave in profile. Over-all length of skeleton 1.43 mm. Pupa—As in cooleyi. Ridge connecting anal tubercles and posterior tubercles usually weakly developed or absent. LITERATURE CITED GREENE, CuHarutes T. The puparia and larvae of sarcophagid flies. Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus. 66 (29) : 1-26. 1925. Kntpuinc, Epwarp F. A comparative study of the first-instar larvae of the genus Sarcophaga (Calliphoridae: Diptera), with notes on the biology. Journ. Parasit. 22(5): 417-454. 1936. Root, Francts M. Notes on larval characters in the genus Sarcophaga. Journ. Parasit. 9(4): 227-229. 1923. ENTOMOLOGY Some work of the periodical cicada. E. A. ANDREWS, Johns Hopkins University. (Communicated by Paul H. Oehser.) The periodical or seventeen-year cicada, found only in North America, has a sub- terranean life years longer than that of numerous other cicadas and an aerial life of a few months. Joining these two major parts of its life history are two briefer links: a few weeks late in summer when the eggs left by females inside the wood of twigs develop into minute young nymphs, which enter the ground; and a few weeks in spring when the subterranean nymphs come near the surface and become ready to emerge and transform into adults or imagoes. Some of the work done by the surface dwellers as observed at Baltimore, Md., is here de- scribed. THE LAST DWELLING During their years under ground the young cicadas shed from time to time, grow rapidly, and make successive mud dwellings attached to roots from which the nymphs suck their nutriment, being parasites upon many trees. In Baltimore Potter (1839) observed the largest of these dwellings some 18 inches below the surface. Each was a rough ball of earth 114 to 2 inches long and three-fourths of an inch wide, lined by smooth mud, and contained one nymph. Emerging from such last feeding chambers the nymphs dig up- ward and construct somewhat different dwellings (Fig. 1). Within the mud tubes they rest some weeks till ready for emergence and transforma- tion. These last dwellings have the advantage of safety some inches below the surface, along with quick access to the surface when the proper time comes. Each dwelling (Fig. 1) has rounded ends above and below as in previous subterranean dwellings, but these are connected by a long shaft and are commonly 150 to 350 mm long, though they may be longer or much shorter. In this shaft the lymph climbs up close to the surface or falls rapidly down to the bottom to escape attacks. In cross section the shaft is circular or sometimes elliptical, being wider than deep, and is about either 10 or 15 mm in diameter. Dwellings of these two sizes occur in the same places, but one or the other predominates, a fact that harmonizes with the occurrence here of a larger and a smaller variety of cicada of which one or the other is more abundant under certain trees. Also the larger bores were found where the larger cicadas emerged; that is, the bores were made to fit the cicadas. | January 1955 ANDREWS: _ The lining of the shaft is smooth mud a few : millimeters thick, sharply defined from the _ lumen, but fading off gradually into the surround- - ing earth. Shafts are by no means always straight, or of uniform diameter, but may be sinuous and present swollen regions 20 mm wide. But I have not seen regular swellings near the upper end, as noted in another part of Maryland by Snodgrass (1921). Following his method we filled shafts under a purple beech tree with plaster of Paris and obtained such demonstrations of the abun- dance and character of these dwellings as shown in Fig. 2. The topsoil was such a mass of small stones and roots as to indicate that the nymph must have cut off small roots in order to advance so many inches. Large obstacles were often Fic. 1.—Plaster cast of common or typical dwelling showing bottom chamber, long shaft, and dome above connected to surface by short exit passageway added by escaping larva. One- half natural size. WORK OF PERIODICAL CICADA 21 nine natural association, lengths, widths, and shapes, but with upper ends obscured in excess surface plaster. About half natural size. Photograph by Charles H. Weber. Fre. 2.—Plaster cast of dwellings in avoided by change of direction, but at times small stones or roots projected into the lumen, covered with lining mud, and reduced the cavity from its normal 15 mm to a mere 10 mm in diameter. Staining of the plaster casts by topsoil or by clay showed that the lining material came from that level and was not brought up from below, which is in harmony with descriptions of the way in which cicada dwellings are made, namely, by forcing the earth laterally aside into its walls and not by carrying it away, as is done by many burrowing animals. The chief implements used in making cavities in the earth, according to Marlatt (1907) and Snodgrass (1921), who observed the work in vessels of loose earth, are the big first legs (Fig. 3). Here, as in the other legs, the terminal segment is used chiefly in walking and may be folded down when not needed; the second segment from the tip is used to pick off particles of earth. The third segment is the largest and like a powerful thumb acts with the opposing second as a forceps to pick up pellets of earth and small stones. The minute particles picked loose from the earth are raked together by the tip segment to make a pellet, which the forceps can carry or shove into the walls of the cavity. However, all parts of the 22, JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Fie. 3. Snodgrass’s sketch of inner face of first right leg, or claw, of cicada pupa. The thickest segment is the femur, the next pointed segment the tibia, and the small final segment the tarsus. body may come into use, for the hind legs and the abdomen may help shove earth aside and the head may carry earth plastered upon it. In vertical] tunnels the animal braces its legs against the sides and, if disturbed, relaxes and drops down. Finally completed, the last dwelling (Fig. 1) ends above and below in swellings similar to the ends of the preceding feeding dwellings. The lower cavity may be called the chamber and the upper one the dome. The lower chamber is large enough to allow the nymph to turn about and commonly is flattened below, as if to allow the nymph to rest upon a fiat surface. Often the chamber slants upward to the shaft, as in Fig. 1, but sometimes the chamber is but the enlarged bottom of the vertical shaft and not turned to one side. The inner linings of both chamber and dome are of the same smoothness as in the shaft. Some measurements of these chambers were: Lengths, 24, 30, 60, 70 mm; widths and heights, 15 or 20 mm. The dome or top of such dwellings VOL. 45, No. 1 comes remarkably near the surface of the earth without breaking through, leaving but a few millimeters of earth till the time for transforma- tion, when the nymph digs its way out. The axis of the dome may be vertical, as in Fig. 4, or horizontal, as in Fig. 6. In the larger nymphs the claws may be stretched out 5 or 6 mm ahead of the animal, which so might receive sensory im- pressions of obstacles, or of the near surface, and then stop or turn aside; but when it turns aside horizontally, as in Fig. 6, when still 20 mm beneath the surface, it may be the warmth of the surface earth that influences the animal. Examination of very many tubular dwellings, as well as their plaster casts, shows that, as with many small boring animals, closely neighboring cavities do not interconnect, but each has its own individual upper end and exit and along its course avoids contact with other dwellings though they often run close together. In such shafts as shown in Fig. 5 a common exit might have easily been made. While some unusual dwellings do run horizontally close to the surface, IT saw none with the sharp U turn indicated in the picturesque illustration printed by Lander (1894). Yet there were some noteworthy abnormalities; thus in Fig. 7 the lower end of the dwelling is bifurcated; there is a normal chamber on the right and a supernumerary one on the left, as if two cicadas digging upward made two chambers that chanced to meet and were then continued as a single shaft. A second bifurcation was found in granular red subsoil that had lain some years over topsoil. In this example the more normal chamber was 20 mm long and 15 mm wide and deep and inclined as usual, but the smaller extra chamber was ee mht . A ate Jatt “ie i bar Fic. 4.—Upper end of shaft and dome coming up near to surface of soil. One-half natural size. JaNuARY 1955 Fie. 5—Two shafts ending in domes converg- ing as if to have a common exist at surface. One- half natural size. horizontal, at right angles to the shaft. Both chambers had flat bottoms roughened by par- ticles fallen down the shaft before plaster was poured in. IMPEDIMENTS TO THE MAKING OF DWELLINGS In the red clay subsoil a cicada encountered a large slab of partly decayed wood, 30 mm thick, and continued its shaft through it and on up near to the surface. Also, under a privet hedge cicadas coming up under stiff flat dead leaves lying close on the surface continued their shafts through the leaves. Under a copper beech tree we placed obstacles on the surface of the ground: sheets of writing paper, brown paper, and carton pieces. When these lay long in contact with moist earth the cicadas, concealed below, destroyed their domes and dug round holes through the obstacles, even when many sheets were together, though when the obstacle was thick carton with heavy brown-paper surface and thick corrugated in- terior the cicadas merely bored diagonally in but not through. Having perforated the obstacle, the cicadas deposited pellets and some liquid mud Fic. 6.—A 10-mm shaft turned nearly parallel to surface of earth. One-half natural size. ANDREWS: WORK OF PERIODICAL CICADA 23 above the surface to form a new dome, as in the sectional view (Fig. 13). Stout paraffin paper lying under a pear tree was riddled with many round holes each surmounted with a thim- ble of mud. We observed that under brick walks a few cicadas managed to find a way between bricks to the surface, and under large stones, logs, and Fie. 7.—Plaster cast of abnormal dwelling with two chambers joined to a single shaft. One-half natural size. planks many came up and then turned off horizontally. It may be many inches before they chance to come to an edge of the obstacle, when they then build upward again on the free surface as a new dome, standing forth into the air, but attached to the face of the obstacle. Under a thin sheet of metal covering about 1 square foot we saw many straight and curved shafts running in all directions, intermingled but each independent of others, some coming shortly to a free edge and others wandering far. Here there seemed no indi- 24 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Fia. 8.—Photograph of four aerial structures (upper right of red clay) showing size, surface, form, and closed tops (except lower right, open on other side). One-half natural size. Photograph by Charles H. Weber. cation that the cicadas found escape except by accident. But in some instances it seemed that the cicadas were guided by sunlight. Under a beehive, 40 by 50 cm, cicadas came up in six shafts, 11 to 85 em deep, and, encountering the bottom of the hive built on horizontally exten- sions of the shafts, stuck to and suspended from the hive bottom like the work of termites or certain wasps. Though the hive contacted the earth about most of its edge, the west face was held up by bricks about 25 mm, so that light entered on that side. Three or four of the hori- zontal structures were aimed more to the west, the others had little length and seemed closed; while the longer ones had opened at the west end. The structure of these suspended mud tubes was that of the mud towers to be deserived later, with only a very thin mud lining against the roofing wood and the other walls, the mud being brought there and manipulated. A long row of beehives rested upon two parallel joists, 314 by VOL. 45, NO. I 114 inches and 12 feet long, lying in contact with the earth and 10 inches apart and nearly east and west. When these joists were raised, many shafts were revealed, which turned off horizontally along under the joist. Under the northern joist, which was kept quite in the shade by the hives above it, 22 shafts ran from south to north and 19 from north to south, suggesting no guidance. Under the southerly joist, which early in spring received sunshine before an overhanging apple tree was in leaf, the number going north was 14, south 68—a decided preference for the south direction. As no light entered between joist and earth, we infer the sunlight influenced the cicadas by warming the face of the joist toward which they were thus guided. Temperatures ob- tained on April 14, 1954, when the joist still lay in place were-as follows: At noon along south side of joist in sunshine air read 34°C., along north side, in shade of joist, 28°C. Thermometer bulb under south edge of joist read 29°C. and under north side 28°C. However, late in May, when air was 21° to 24°, the temperature under the joist was 16° to 18°, with no difference between north and south, as leaf shade kept the earth cool. AERIAL DWELLINGS Thus the last dwelling of the subterranean nymph is not necessarily restricted to the earth but may be continued up into the air. In fact, aerial extensions maz be abundant and of great interest and are well known as turrets, towers, cones, chimneys, huts, and adobe houses. Perhaps the term ‘spigot holes” may refer to such aerial structures. If so, it is the earliest reference to ree wae Fic. 9.—Vertical section of an aerial dwelling with shaft ending as a dome arched over with applied earth material. One-half natural size. JANUARY 1955 ANDREWS: WORK OF PERIODICAL CICADA bo or Fic. 10—Photograph of three aerial structures; lower left, with dead leaves in walls and showing where one was pulled off a hole into lumen of shaft. Lower right, a lump as wide as tall closed as yet at top; upper, a sample of thimble called forth by presence of sheets of paper on surface of earth. One-half natural size. them; it was used, as quoted by Marlatt (1907), by Thomas Mathews in 1705, writing of a swarm of cicadas in Virginia about the year 1675. Probably the first illustration of such aerial dwellings was the above mentioned sketch by Lander (1894). Since then good photographs have been published. As shown in Fig. 8, made in Baltimore in 1953, these are large cylinders or cones of mud rough externally as made of pellets stuck together. The material may be topsoil or subsoil or mixtures of both, and some of it seems to have been flowing when applied. Some towers lean over but do not break even when nearly horizontal, which recalls the surmise made by Lander (1894) that the mud material was mingled with some cement supplied by the cicada. Several hundred pellets are seen in one tower, but others are concealed or fused together into larger lumps. These mud houses are durable. Some made late in April 1953 were still recognizable late in January 1954 where protected by dead leaves under privet hedges, despite rain, snow, frost, and thawing. The walls (Fig. 9) are dense mud, not natural soil, externally more or less made of pellets but internally lined with the same smooth layer found in the underground parts of the dwelling. Rarely small sticks or leaves are incorporated in the walls, and stiff vertical dead leaves may form part of the lining, so that when torn away a hole is opened into the lumen, as in lower left of Fig. 10. When a tower was built up under layers of paper they were cut through and the tower com- pleted above them, leaving the dome sticking up above the paper as in Fig. 11. As seen by com- paring Figs. 9, 11, 12, and 13 with 4, the dome of aerial extensions is just like that of subterranean dwellings. In size these aerial dwellings vary much in any locality, and some localities show an average different from that of some other locality. Thus 159 under separated box trees ranged in height from 15 to 90 mm, in width from 15 to 40 mm; with bores from 9 to 15 mm, thickness of roof of dome from 1 to 5mm, exit hole from 6 to 15 mm. While under box trees grown as a hedge, 355 ranged in height from 30 to 100 mm, in width from 25 to 35 mm. Again under apple trees the range in height of 136 was from 15 to 100, in width from 10 to 40, with the bores from 7 by 9 to 15 mm. FUSED AERIAL DWELLINGS Often shafts are so close together that when extended into the air their walls stick together as one mass with from 2 to 10 separate domes. When but two (Fig. 14) they fuse all along one side only, though in exceptions (Figs. 15 and 16) a pair may lean together and fuse only above or may fuse below and diverge widely above. When several fuse a short dome may be overarched by a taller and so, apparently, the inmate cut off from escape except by digging through the taller neighboring dome. In fact, late in summer one such instance suggested that the inmate had died within unable to escape. However, several others 26 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES x Tiss f sf Fic. 11.—Vertical section of an aerial dwelling built up under three layers of paper through which it was continued to end as a dome. One-half natural size. were found closed with no such cause for failure to escape. Very rarely was there evidence that cicada nymphs ever made any use of their neighbors’ work; in one instance three shafts had but two exits since one inmate had opened its shaft into that of a neighbor. Fig. 14 shows a certain economy of building materia] resulting from the crowding of neighbors, there being no room for the usual thick wall, only a thin party wall was built between neighbors. Such economy may lead to the observed fact that in some aggregates the entire weight is less than the combined weights of as many separate structures of similar heights. ESTIMATES OF WORK DONE Cicadas are muscular animals; even the slow nymphs underground move from place to place, build feeding chambers, suck sap and inject liquid to aid in feeding, and finally construct elongated dwellings that may extend up into the Fra. 12.—Five layers of paper over a concealed shaft were cut through to end as a dome, not yet quite finished late in summer. One-half natural size. VOL. 45, No. I air. This enables one, by weighing the earth deposited, to estimate some of the energy ex- pended in carrying earth upward several inches. Some of these deposits under apple, beech, and English box trees were collected and weighed, with ranges from 4 to 274 grams each. In all, 1,116 of these came from under box trees, 149 in number, covering a sum of areas measured as about one-thirteenth of an acre. They weighed 16,578 grams, or about 28 pounds; 1.e., at the rate of 364 pounds per acre. However, a correction is necessary since the dwellings were weighed after air drying all summer, but when originally carried up by the cicadas they were wet. When 20 dry dwellings were dipped in water and drained it was found they had taken up 25 to 35 per cent of their weight. Again 20 were ground to powder and weighed as water was added. When the mass was plastic enough to be made into pellets with the fingers, 39 per cent water had been taken up; with more water the mass lost form and began Fig. 13.—Two layers of paper over a conceaeled dome were cut through to form a dome above those obstacles. One-half natural size. to flow when 48 per cent had been taken up. So we add at least one-third, or considering that some of the cicadas’ material is liquid, as much as 40 per cent to the above dry weights, making thus, roughly, 500 pounds per acre, mined, brought up some inches, and deposited as dwelling walls. AND CONDITIONS IN HOUSES ARE PLACES WHICH AERIAL MADE In this arable soil aerial dwellings appear only in places that were shaded in April, under a building supported on brick pillars; under its eastern eaves shaded by evergreen privet; under the wooden steps of east and west ends of ele- vated wooden porch; but not under the porch itself where abundant in 1936 when adjacent bushes had not been removed; under English ivy covering the ground; under dense growth of dead nettle (Lamiwm purpurem 1.), under north face JANUARY 1955 ANDREWS: of privet hedge, and under its south face where dead leaves had collected; under evergreen cane and bamboo; under apple, beech, and English box trees. Also in the following peculiar con- ditions: under a board 16 inches wide and 19 feet long, supported at the ends 27 inches above the earth, surrounded by apple trees showing no aerial structures at all. In this faint shade, es- pecially near its northerly edge, many fine dwellings were built up. When we moved this board 2 feet to the north, many soft new towers arose in the new shade. The making of aerial dwellings by providing artificial shade was evoked as follows: Early in April a large zine tub was overturned under one of the above apple trees known to have many sub- terranean dwellings under it and at length, April 29, a tower 2 inches in height arose under the Fic. 14.—Cross section of two narrow shafts of aerial dwellings that coalesced with only a thin party-wall between. One-half natural size. tub the night previous. This bent over nearly horizontally, and by May 3 the inmate had re- moved the old dome and added pellets making a new dome.! In a henyard, where there were only concealed dwellings, scraping the surface re- vealed 36 shafts thus opened, May 6; these were covered over with a large zinc tub making a dark space within which the next morning 30 soft dwellings had been built into the air, but outside the tub there were none. In the same region a number of chimneys arose from a square foot of hard earth when covered with a wooden trough. The previously described structures (p. 24), under joists, etc., are essentially aerial towers 1 Whether in light or darkness each aerial dwell- ing is closed above, and if the old dome is removed a new one is made at once. Thus under dense lamium shade removal of domes was followed the next night by the making of new ones in most all the dark cavities formed by placing small tin cans, 4 by 2 inches, over the opened shafts. And under apple trees where the earth was very wet removal of 40 towers to reveal open shafts resulted the next morning, May 3, in the appearance of nearly as many new structures made within such cans and 3-inch flowerpots. WORK OF “lI PERIODICAL CICADA yA, Fic. 15.—Two aerial dwellings leaning to- gether and coalescing above. Both closed above. Lining indicated by broken lines. One-half natural size. built in the dark and forced into horizontal postures. HOW ARE AERIAL DWELLINGS MADE? The aerial dwellings are built up rapidly in the night when no one has observed how, but we assume that they are made much as are the former feeding chambers, for knowledge of which we rely on the above-mentioned observations of Marlatt and Snodgrass. To this we add the fol- lowing: In 1902 we saw cicadas, placed in tubes Fia. 16.—Aerial dwellings of a larger and a smaller variety built close together and then diverging widely. The large on the left is open at top. A small stick was built into both where di- verging. One-half natural size. 28 of loose earth, place mud onto the right and the left sides of the face and so carried it up to make pellets; also some huts found late in summer, 1953, with partly finished still-open domes sug- gest how domes are made in the air. Each (Fig. 12) had across its summit an open slit about 10 by 5 and 6 mm with very thin edges, not more than 0.5 mm. As yet no pellets had been placed over the top of the dome. We imagine the claws would reach out of the slit to apply mud, that the slender tarsus would be used in troweling the mud, and that water was supplied by the cicada nymph. CONCLUSION The last dwellings of seventeen-year cicadas are of interest as showing what insects can do with tools; as examples in the comparative architecture of dwellings of small animals; as a means for estimating some of the energy ex- pended; and as beneficial factors in the life of these plant parasites. Also it is noteworthy that in the roofs of these last subterranean dwellings only a thin layer of earth remains to be per- forated for egress into the air above; and that this advantage is persistently maintained under the diverse conditions we have described and illustrated. When over 60 or more acres of woodland the earth is riddled with borings such as indicated in Fig. 2, the effects must be considerable, for these holes remain open for a year or more admitting air and surplus rain and serving for roots and for many insects, spiders, and other small forest creatures. Again, when towers of mud weighing perhaps 500 pounds per acre are deposited, ulti- mately to be disintegrated on the surface, thus “nlowing” the earth after the manner of earth- worms, there seems compensation for the injury done in sucking root sap and injury to twigs. Why at some times and places the last dwell- ings are extended as aerial structures, huts, or towers is a question needing solution through experimentation. It has been thought that these aerial dwellings were due to water, to peculiar soil, or to tempera- ture. But in Baltimore the earth was no wetter where towers appeared than in nearby regions where subterranean dwellings sufficed—except only one place where surface water under an apple tree made a wet basis for towers, but here there was also shade in April, and this as well as JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 45, No. I wetness may have acted by lowering the earth temperatures below that within the towers up in the warm air. Cicadas are parasites upon plants, drinking sap not only when young nymphs but when adults. That the oldest nymphs near the surface also drink sap is inferred but not demon- strated. That they are not necessarily restricted to sap for needed water is shown by the following experiment: Nymphs dug from their concealed shafts near the surface were kept some days in dry earth, each in a hole simulating a shaft, and then put onto garden earth. They at once thrust their beaks deep into the earth and, as if thirsty, stood long in the drinking attitude assumed by adults sucking sap from trees. Apparently they sucked moisture from the earth. Though they had been kept in darkness they had not erected aerial dwellings, nor had most of them even made domes over the holes they were in, presumably lacking sufficient water for such work. That liquid from the earth may be used by old nymphs for their building needs is implied in their long life near the surface when the earth is moist and there may be no roots to suck, as in the instance described above where they lived in granular red clay subsoil free from roots. It seems probable much of the liquid needed for mud making and even for self maintenance is derived from the earth. With water constituting a third or more of the aerial dwellings, it is evident wet soil is needed for such work. As part of these aerial structures seems to be liquid mud and as we do not know how cicadas can carry liquid mud, we assume that they made the earth liquid when they used it. All through cicada life liquid is freely drunk and freely expelled, since, as described by Myers (1928), the cicada has a remarkable filtering apparatus that lets liquid pass rapidly out. Hence, whenever cicadas have liquid to drink they have it to expel. When the actual process of hut-building is observed we anticipate it will be seen that the cicada uses both ends of its body, somewhat as we observed (1911) certain termites do when building in Jamaica. Temperature has much to do with emergence, as shown when pipes heated the earth and cicadas emerged a year in advance. Hopkins (1898) ob- served in West Virginia that emergence was earlier where warmth was greater, either from lower altitude or from a more southern location. JANUARY 1955 Krumbach (1917) kept detailed records of temperatures in part of a botanical garden in Austria-Hungary, watched 27 cicadas emerge during 27 days, and also noted they emerged later in the shade of a wall. He was of the opinion that temperature was the important factor in bringing them forth. During the period of emergence temperatures were as follows: a meter above ground 11.2° to 19.2° minimum and 31.6° to 35° maximum; at the surface 10.8° to 16.2° minimum; down in the earth 300 mm 25.3° to 26.6°; down 600 mm 21.4° to 26.2°; down 1 meter 19.7° to Bool. Applying the above to our cicadas it may be that they were influenced by temperature gradients in coming up toward the surface and by surface temperature in emergence; also that a cicada in a tower might well be warmer than one beneath the surface. Lander (1894) studied cicadas near Nyack, N. Y., and concluded that the chimneys were built as places to cool off in, for he argued the very warm spring had unduly heated the trap rock, smoothed by glaciers, underlying the thin soil. But as no thermometer readings are given we are free to assume that the thin clay soil would not drain well into the glaciated rock but would hold the melted winter snow and be cold from evaporation, whereas cicadas up in towers would be warmed by the sun- shine of an exceptionally warm spring. That cicadas may get higher temperatures up in towers than down below is indicated by some experiments made in February and March 1954 at one of the spots in which chimneys had arisen in April 1953, which showed that a thermometer placed in a dry chimney over a hole resembling a cicada shaft registered 4° or 5° higher than down 1 to 7 inches in the earth, but only 1° lower than the warmer air. Thus on March 29, 1954, when the surface temperature of the earth was 28° in full sunshine, the temperature of the air was 19°, within the chimney 18°, at the surface 13°, down 12 inches 12°C.: in the shade of the same evergreen privet in which chimneys were made in 1953. This makes credible the view that in 1953 cicadas there found temperatures in their chimneys higher than below ground and com- parable with that of the surface in full sunshine. Moreover, as described above (p. 23), cicadas meeting certain obstacles continued their shafts horizontally as modified chimneys to the limit of the obstacle and then upward again to end with a ANDREWS: WORK OF PERIODICAL CICADA 29 normal dome. Temperature taken there a year later showed that the sunshine warmed one face of the obstacle and that the cicadas, in the dark, ina majority of instances, built toward the higher temperature. We advance the hypothesis that the chief factor in inducing the cicada to extend its last dwelling into the air is temperature; in the shade or under other conditions when the surface earth is not warm enough, a higher temperature is at- tained up in turrets surrounded with warm air. Though most of the cicada’s life with its growth and shedding is spent down in lower temperatures, we assume that higher tempera- tures are attained and probably needed for the final perfection of internal organs not needed in previous subterranean life. To test this hypothe- sis, temperatures might be obtained in air, on the surface, and beneath the ground over an area where cicadas are expected to issue soon. Such data might well indicate where aerial dwellings would arise and where only subterranean dwell- ings would be found. LITERATURE CITED AnpREws, E. A. Observations on Jamaica. Journ. Animal Behavior 1: 228. 1911. Periodical cicadas in Baltimore, Md. Sei. Monthly 12: 310-320. 1921. . The seventeen year cicada, alias locust. Quart. Rev. Biol. 12: 271-293. 1937. Horxins, A. D. The periodical cicada in West Virginia. West Virginia Agr. Exp. Sta. Bull. 50: 46 pp., 23 figs., 1 map, 4 pls. 1898. Krumpacu, T. Zur Naturgeschichte der Sing- cicaden 1m Roten Istrien. Zool. Anz. 48: 241— 250. 1917. Lanper, B. Hut-building seventeen-year cicadas. Sci. American 71: 233-234. 1894. Maruattr, C. L. The periodical cicada. U. S. Dept. Agr., Bur. Entomology, Bull. 71: 181 pp. 1907. Marruews, Tuomas. Swarms of cicadas as one of the three prodigies appearing in Virginia about 1675. (Quoted in ‘‘A Library of Ameri- can Literature,” ed. by E. C. Stedman and E. M. Hutchinson, vol. 1: 462-468. 1887.) Myers, J. G. The morphology of the Cicadidae (Homoptera). Proc. Zool. Soc. London, 1928: 365-472, 75 figs. Porter, N. Notes on the Locusta septentrionalis americanae decem septima: 27 pp., 1 pl. Baltimore, 1839. Snoperass, R. E. The _ seventeen-year locust. Ann. Rep. Smithsonian Institution for 1919: 381-409, illus. 1921. termites in 193- 30 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 45, No. 1 ICHTHYOLOGY —Flatfishes of the genus Symphurus from the U.S.S. Albatross Expedition to the Philippines, 1907-1910. Pau CuapaNnaup. (Translated by Mme. Patricia Isham.) (Communicated by Leonard P. Schultz.) Max Weber and L. F. de Beaufort,! who published the most recent summary of the fish fauna of the Indo-Australian Archi- pelago, mention only three species in the genus Symphurus: S. regant Weber and de Beaufort, S. giles? (Alcock), and S. micro- rhynchus Weber and de Beaufort. An additional species, S. marmoratus Fowler, was described from Jolo Island, Philippines. No less than six species are represented among the 139 Symphurus specimens captured between April 10, 1908, and December 16, 1909, in that archipelago or its immediate environs between lat. 20° 37 N., long. 115° 43” EK, and lat. 5° 24’ S., long. 122° 18’ 15” E., by the U. 5. Bureau of Fisheries steamer Albatross in the course of its successive cruises, which, altogether, constituted the Albatross Expedition to the Philippines (1907-1910). I cannot thank too warmly Dr. Leonard P. Schultz, Curator, Division of Fishes, U. 8. National Museum, for his favor in trusting to me the study of this material of exceptional scientific value and interest. Also I thank Mme. Patricia Isham for translating this paper. Among the three species captured by the Siboga in 1899-1900, and mentioned or described by Weber and de Beaufort, only Symphurus regani was found again by the Albatross. However, the investigations of the latter ship augmented the fauna of the Indo-Australian Archipelago by three species, S. woodmasoni (Alcock), S. sep- temstriatus (Alcock), and S. strictus Gilbert, that are more or less widely scattered in the tropical Indo-Pacific complex, and by two new species, S. schultzi and S. luzonensis, which are described in the lines that follow. In reality, S. woodmasoni was captured by the Szboga in the Banda Sea; but the unique specimen is mentioned by Weber, without determination (Szboga, Fishes, 1913: 445, No. 4). The following abbreviations are used: A, anal fin; C, caudal fin; D, dorsal fin (also the letter D indicates dissection); Mx, Maxillary; R precedes the meristic formula 1The fishes of the Indo-Australian Archipelago 5: 208-211. 1929. determined from radiography; S, number of scales, counted between the vertical of the opercular opening and the base of the caudal fin; V, pelvic fin; n, blind side; z, eyed side. The position of the caudal extremity of the maxillary (Mx) on the eyed side is indicated in the following fashion: I, in front of the vertical of the anterior border of the fixed eye; II, underneath the anterior half of the fixed eye; III, underneath the posterior half of the fixed eye; IV, in back of the fixed eye. The intermediary positions are indicated IVAN UUAQUL, evare) INLAY The same symbols determine the position of the first dorsal ray (D 1), in relation to the movable eye. The formula for number of vertebrae conforms with the example: a 9 [3 + 6] + c44 = t53. The letter a means number of abdominal vertebrae. The letter c means number of caudal vertebrae. The letter ¢ indicates the total of the preceding numbers. The numbers put between brackets [38 + 6] analyze the composition of the abdominal vertebrae. The first number (3) is that of the vertebrae deprived of the hemal arch; the second (6) that of the vertebrae that possess that arch. In all the Symphurus, except individual abnormalities not yet found, all the abdominal hemal arches are closed by distal codssification of the two hemitoxes’. Symphurus woodmasoni (Alcock, 1889) D 91-99. A 78-86. C 14. V 4. 8 80-90 (+2). Mx: II-III (1I/IV*%). D 1: ILIII (IL/IV’®). In hundredths of the standard length: head 20- 25; height 23-26 (27-29). In hundredths of the length of the head: eye 12-14(15); space between the eyes 0; C 52-76 (90-115*). In hundredths of the body height: height of D or of A 36-45. In alcohol the eyed side is of bright reddish 2Cf. Chabanaud, Morphologie comparée des arcs hémaux abdominaux des téléostéens symétriques et dyssymétriques. C. R. Acad. Sci. 233: 1393, eff. 5. 1951. 3 Only one case. 4 When its length does not attain about 60 percent of that of the head, the caudal fin can be considered deteriorated. JANUARY 1955 brown, generally even, but often enough varied with dark brown marblelike veins. The fins are brown, more or less dark, but becoming lighter from front to back, so the caudal fin is often colorless. The blind side is colorless and the reddish tint of the musculature is readily visible. The peritoneum is generally black. Number of specimens studied: 85. Standard length (largest observed): #103 mm; 9121 mm. Sex ratio (82 observations): 28; 9254. Vertebrae (6 observations): 50-52, 9 of which {3 + 6] abdominal. Record of specimens for Albatross dredging stations®: U.S.N.M. 138049, station 5247, 2 specimens; U.S.N.M. 138058, station 5402, 1 specimen; U.S.N.M. 1388062, station 5403, 7 specimens; U.S.N.M. 138034, station 5404, 1 specimen; U.S.N.M. 138035, station 5405, 2 specimens; U.S.N.M. 138036, station 5409, 1 specimen; U.S.N.M. 138038, station 5412, 1 specimen; U.S.N.M. 138039, station 5418, 1 specimen; U.S.N.M. 138059, station 5501, a specimens; U.S.N.M. 138060, station 5502, specimens; Bee 138061, station 5503, 2 22 specimens; U.S.N.M. 138041, station 5508, 1 specimen; U.S.N ae 138021, station 5516, 1 specimen; U.S.N.M. 138048, station 5537, 1 specimen; U.S.N.M. 138047, station 5538, 1 specimen; U.S.N.M. 188051, station 5623, 1 specimen; U.S.N.M. 188052, station 5626, 1 specimen; U.S.N.M. 1388056, 1 specimen from Philippines without locality. Symphurus schultzi, n. sp. D 85-87: A 72-75. C 14. V 4. 8S + 70-80. Mx IL. D 1: IJ/IIE-III/1IV. In hundredths of the standard length: head 21-25; height 24-30. In hundredths of the head length: eyes 17-19; interorbital space 0; C 50-62. In hundredths of the body height: height of D 42-47. In alcohol: The eyed side is an even reddish brown, now light, now dark; the fins are more or less brown or blackish, progressively lighter from front to back. The blind side is pale or pigmented. The peritoneum is black. On two dissected specimens, US.N.M. 138046 and 138057 the vertebrae number 48 of which a 9 [3 + 6] are abdominal. Named in honor of Dr. Leonard P. Schultz, curator of fishes, United States National Museum, S. schultzi differs from S. woodmasoni in the fewer rays, D (85-87, instead of 91-99); A (72-75 instead of 78-86), and by its eyes that ®> Albatross published in: Rept. 1-97. Nov. 29, 1910. dredging station records were Comm. Fish., 1910 (741): CHABANAUD: FLATFISHES OF GENUS SYMPHURUS 31 appear a little larger (17-19 hundredths of the head length instead of 12-15), also in fewer vertebrae (48 instead of 50-52), the formula of the abdominal vertebrae is the same 9 [3 + 6]. This species is described from 5 specimens, 2 #7 and 3 2°; maximum standard length # 70 mm., @ 64 mm. Record of specimens for Albatross dredging stations: U.S.N.M. 138044, holotype; ¢@, sta- tion 5508. Paratypes: U.S.N.M. 138025, Station 5201; U.S.N.M. 138033, Station 5373; U.S.N.M. 138057, St. 5506; U.S.N.M. 138046, Station 5536. Symphurus septemstriatus (Alcock, 1891) D 93-101. A 81-89. C 12. V 4. S 96-100. Mx, (1/II*) II-III. D 1: IL-II/III (IIs). In hundredths of the standard length: head 18-22; height 21-27. In hundredths of the length of the head: eye (12) 14-18 (19); interorbital space 0; C 60-86. In hundredths of the body height: height of D or of A 36-41. In alcohol, the eyed side is of reddish brown, more or less clear with nebulous dark brown areas, arranged in transverse bands; rarely indistinct, and numbering about 7 to 12, between the operculum and the base of C; fins brownish, pale towards the rear. The blind side is usually reddish brown, lighter than the eyed side, but always of uniform color. Peritoneum is black. Specimens studied numbered 38; maximum standard length # 78 mm. @ 77 mm. Sex ratio for 33 observations: @ 21, 9 12. Vertebrae (4 observations): a 9 [8 + 6] + c 44 = t 53 (3 individuals), a 9 [8 + 6] + c 45 = ¢ 54 (1 individual). Record of specimens for Albatross dredging stations: U.S.N.M. 138026, station 5216, 4 specimens; U.S.N.M. 138023, station 5265, 2 specimens, U.S.N.M. 138043, station 5268, 2 specimens; U.S.N.M. 138028, station 5298, 1 specimen; U.S.N.M. 138029, station 5301, 1 specimen; U.S.N.M. station 138040, station 5326, 2 specimens; U.S.N.M. 138042, station 5387, 16 specimens; U.S.N.M. 138041, station 5388, 1 specimen; U.S.N.M. 138031, station 5391, 1 specimen; U.S.N.M. 138032, station 5392, 2 specimens; U.S.N.M. 138035, station 5405, 1 specimen; U.S.N.M. 1388037, station 5411, 1. specimen; U.S.N.M. 138038, station 5412, 1 specimen; U.S.N.M. 138060, station 5502, 1 specimen; U.S.N.M. 138044, station 5508, 1 specimen. 5 Only one case. 32 Symphurus regani Weber and Beaufort, 1929 D 103-104. A 89-92. C 14. V 4.8 + 100. Mx III. D 1: I-II. In hundredths of the standard length: head 17; height 24-26. In hundredths of the length of the head: eye 15; interorbital space 0; caudal fin + 73. In hundredths of the body height: height of D or of A: + 30. In alcohol, the eyed side is of an even reddish brown, not dark, the fins dark brown. The blind side is colorless or whitish. Record of specimens for Albatross dredging stations: U.S.N.M. 1388045, station 5526, 1 @ specimen, 112 mm _ standard length, R:a 10 [8 + 7] + ¢ 47 = t 57; US.N.M. 188053, station 5646, 1 @ specimen, 122 mm, R:a 10 [8 + 7] + c¢ 47 = € 57; US.N.M. 138054, station 5647, 1 @ specimen, 96 mm. R:a 10 [8 +7] + c47 =t 57. Symphurus luzonensis, n. sp. Holotype &. Total length 80 mm. Standard length 72 mm. Length of the head 13 mm. D 99. A 84. C 12. V 4.8 104. Mx II. D 1:I1/UI. In hundredths of the standard length: head 18; height 23. In hundredths of the length of the head: eye 14; interorbital space 0; C 61. In hundredths of the body height, height of D or of A 38. In alcohol, the eyed side is of a light reddish brown; fins pale; blind side colorless. U.S.N.M. 138043, holotype from Station 5268, @ speci- men, R:a 10 [4 + 6] + c 42 5 ¢t 52. Captured near the island of Luzon, the holotype of Symphurus luzonensis differs from JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 45, No. 1 S. regani in the fewer rays of its three median fins, notably of C (12 instead of 14); also by its caudal vertebrae (42 instead of 46 or 47), the formula for abdominal vertebrae are the same, a 10 [4 + 6], proof of the close affinity existing between these two species. Symphurus strictus Gilbert, 1905 D 116-121. A 101-106. C (13) 14. V (8) 4.78 130-140. Mx II-III. D 1:I-II. In hundredths of the standard length: head 15-18; height 21-24 (27). In hundredths of the length of the head: eye 11-14; interorbital space 0; C ? Inhundredths of the body height: height of D or of A 33. In alcohol the eyed side is evenly bright red, with the fins brownish grey, becoming lighter from front to back. The peritoneum is black. Blind side same color as eyed side, but a little lighter. Seven specimens studied, 4 @ and 3 9Q. Standard length (maxima observed): @ 126 mm; ? 86mm. Record of specimens for Albatross dredging stations: U.S.N.M. 138024, station 5269, 1 ¢ specimen; U.S.N.M. 138027, station 5290, 1 ¢# specimen, R:a 9 [3 + 6] + ¢52 =t61; US.N.M. 138030, station 5294,1 2 specimen; U.S.N.M. 138022, station 5589, 1 o&, R:a 9 [8 + 6] + c 62 = t 61; US.N.M. 138050, station 5621, 1 @ specimen; U.S.N.M. 152779, station 5623, 1 @ specimen; U.S.N.M. 138055, station 5645, 1 & specimen. 7C 13, for U.S.N.M. 138024. V 3, for U.S.N.M. 138050. MALACOLOGY .—Conus eldredi, new name for one of the poison cones. J. P. E. Morrison, U. 8. National Museum. The subgenus Gastridiwm Modeer (Sven- ska Vet.-Akad. Handl. (n. s.) 14: 196. 1793) includes a few relatively large but thin-shelled species of the genus Conus. It is probable that these species are more active and much more rapid in growth of shell than the great majority of cone species. One species somewhat smaller than the genotype of Gastridium (Conus geographus Linnaeus) but most closely related to it, and therefore to be handled with equal caution against its poison bite, is without a valid scientific name. The earliest name Conus geographus rosea Sowerby (Conch. Illus., pt. 32: fig. 33. 1833) was twice preoccupied by C. roseus Fischer, 1807, and Lamarck, 1810. The next name given, Conus intermedius Reeve (Conch. Icon.: pl. 28, fig. 129. 1843) is preoccupied by the name C. intermedius Lamarck, 1810. Likewise the third name Conus mappa Crosse (Rev. Mag. Zool. (2d ser.) 10: 200, 205. 1858), given as a nomen novum for intermedius Reeve, is preoccupied by the name Conus mappa Solander (in Humphrey, Portland Catalogue: 116, No. 2554. 1786). This poison cone is here given the new name Conus (Gastridium) eldredi, in honor of my brother Lt. Cmdr. R. Ray Eldred Morrison | (U.S.N.R.), who collected the species at Abamama in the Gilbert Islands in 1944. This new name may commemorate in a small way the considerable contributions to the knowledge of mollusks made by interested members of the United States Armed Forces (both regular and reserve) during World War II. Officers of the Washington Academy of Sciences Praslent 2256002 Se sesh eee Francis M. Deranporr, National Bureau of Standards Pavectdert-eleck.. 65. cece e Sees MarGaret Pitrman, National Institutes of Health SOTA es Seas ee eee ee Jason R. Swatuen, U.S. National Museum PUROGSUTET.<..- 25: : Howarp §S. Rappierg, U.S. Coast and Geodetic Survey (Retired) ERREIC URS EAI on, oi NS ore SSS bee Gls NERO Sale « JoHN A. STEVENSON, Plant Industry Station Custodian and Subscription Manager of Publications Haraup A. Reuper, U. 8. National Museum Vice-Presidenis Representing the Affiliated Societies: Philosophical Society of Washington... ............5:. 26: eens ee: S. E. Forsuss Anthropological Society of Washington.................. ..Wituiam H. GILBERT Esolovical Society of Washingtone 02.2 eet esae eds ce ne Wiuuram A. Dayton MhemicaliSocieuy OL WaShINftON. o. 6 5. wesc ones whee nee JoHN KX. TAYLOR Baomolorical Society of Washington. ...-.-.2.-.---..s0-+22---- 56s F, W. Poos Netional Geographic Society.............20..eeeeene seed ALEXANDER WETMORE Geological Society of Washington......................--+0-: ARTHUR A. BAKER Medical Society of the District of Columbia.................. FREDERICK O. CoE Metumbra Historical ‘Society: ..... . 0s ccsee es eee eet ene GILBERT GROSVENOR Berimical society of Washington... .....<5..2400+52.-2omencues Ler M. Hutcuins Washington Section, Society of American Foresters.......... GrorGE F, GRAVATT Washmeaton Society of Engineers. ...: 22.0... .65 tee ek eet C. A. Betts Washington Section, American Institute of Electrical Engineers. ARNoLp H. Scorr Washington Section, American Society of Mechanical Engineers. .RicHarp 8. DiuL Helminthological Society of Washington........ .............. L. A. SPINDLER Washington Branch, Society of American Bacteriologists......... GLENN SLocum Washington Post, Society of American Military Engineers...... Fioyp W. Houcu Washington Section, Institute of Radio Engineers... ... HERBERT Grove DorsEy District of Columbia Section, American Society of Civil Engineers. .D. E. Parsons District of Columbia Section, Society for Experimental Biology and Medicine Wauter C. Hess Washington Chapter, American Society for Metals........... JoHN G. THOMPSON Washington Section, International Association for Dental Research. 1. G. Hamprp Washington Section, Institute of the Aeronautical Sciences...... F. N. FRENKIEL District of Columbia Branch, American Meteorological Society F. W. REICHELDERFER Elected Members of the Board of Managers: Tip since Ta ere a ea ee R. G. Bares, W. W. Dirnt ramiearier any alObON. fo) ek et Ae sian as eo ee cd M. A. Mason, R. J. Srncer BREN PENT ATVI OD «5 o66 oie 68 oc oly crd cine sgt oesSee veers A. T. McPuerson, A. B. Gurney init! Op MGC ee All the above officers plus the Senior Editor muurdomediuors and Associate Editors: i..2 3h. 286 352.08 th See ele: [See front cover] Executive Committee.............. F. M. Deranporr (chairman), MarGcarer PITTMAN, J. R. Swauuen, H. S. Rappieye, J. A. STEVENSON Committee on Membership....H1nz Specut (chairman), Myron 8. ANDERSON, CLARENCE Cottam, Roger W. Curtis, JoHN Faser, J. J. Fanny, Francois N. FRENKIEL, Wess HayMAkeR, CLARENCE H. Horrmann, Louis R. Maxweuu, Epwarp G. REINHARD, JOHN A. SANDERSON, LEo A. SHINN, FrRANcis A. SMITH, ALFRED WEISSLER Committee on Meetings............... Dortuanp J. Davis (chairman), ALLEN VY. ASTIN, GrorceE A. Hortrie, Martin A. Mason, Wituram W. Rusey Committee on Monographs (W1Lu1AM N. FENTON, chairman): Th@® diensmarenreye SOE ee eee ae ca ee eee eee er WitiramM N. Fenton, ALAN STONE SRomeNrATaVal QOO Kc esc, Awe ote sk: G. ArtHur Coopmr, James I. Horrman Tho Uinmtneinyy OGY Cee a ee eerie Haratp A. Rexper, Witi1aM A. Dayton Committee on Awards for Scientific Achievement (RoBERT C. DuNcAN, general chairman): For Biological Sciences......Byron J. OLSON (chairman), Sara E. BRANHAM, LEE M. Hurtcuins, FREDERICK W. Poos, BENJAMIN ScHWARTZ, T. Date Stewart For Engineering Sciences. . ELuioTtT B. RoBERTS (chairman), CLIFFORD A. BETTs, Josera M. CaLDWELL, MicnanLt Gotppere, Harte H. Kennarp ARNOLD H. Scott, Horace M. Trent For Physical Sciences......... FRANK C. Kracrxk (chairman), Winiiam HH. AVERY, Ricwarp §. Burineton, NatHan L. Drake, Luoyp G. Henpesr, EpeGar R. Smita, BrnsAMIN L. SNAVELY HOV NEAChiING Of SClences.. 2) saee M.A. Mason (chairman), Keita C. JoHNsoN Commitiee on Grants-in-aid for Research.............. Herpert N. Eaton (chairman), Mario Mozart, Francis O. Rice, J. Leon SHERESHEFSKY, JAMES H TAYLOR Committee on Policy and Planning: (FRANCIS B. SInsBEE, chairman): POPU ATU ATV ODD cise Ochs seth ata see sce eben L. W. Parr, Francis B. SILsBEE sowVanwaryelO5Gy ce a. eee ea he eee nes E. C. CRITTENDEN, A. WETMORE onianucany 1957 ot io. eee ee Joun E. Grar, Raymonp J. SEEGER Committee on Hncowragement of Science Talent (A. T. McPuerson, chairman): owamiranyelQbory isres a eeacels tomatoe AGAR: McPHERSON, W. T. Reap PROM aT Vel OSG epee ee occa ince eure © AG ————_., J. H. McMrien PRowiamuanyslO57 6. .c0 0 Sl eee ce, L. Epwin Yocum, Wrut1am J. YoupEN EP LOSENLALZUCROTI (OUNCULIOSAMAMAN S Hanh nt ae er aelat shina seni an Watson Davis Gan mntlecnofeAUuaclonss <1. so sate ns oe ce ae Josperu P. E. Morrison (chairman), ; Gaten B. Scuuspaver, Easpert H. WALKER Committee of Tellers...Grorear H. Coons (chairman), SamuEL Levy, Watpo R. Wepre. CONTENTS PALEONTOLOGY.—New genera of Foraminifera from the British Lower Carboniferous. Rorert Ho. CumMinGs.............- 9 PALEONTOLOGY.—Foraminifera from some ‘‘Pliocene” rocks of Egypt. RUSHDIPSAID. 26 oR asian ees 2 Le. PALEONTOLOGY.—A new species of Cymbiocrinus from the Pitkin. Har- Min) IDA SBORIOMHN, 26 beep 6o boos F485 varbiwne tee. EntomoLocy.—The immature stages of Sarcophaga cooleyz, S. bullata, and S. shermani (Diptera: Sarcophagidae). VrERNE F. NewHouss, DAviIp > W. WALKER, and Maurice 2. JAMES......... >) ENnroMoLogy.—Some work of the periodical cicada. E. A. ANDREWS. . IcuTrHyoLogy.—F latfishes of the genus Symphurus from the U.S8.8. Alba- tross Expedition to the Philippines, 1907-1910. Paut CHABANAUD. MauacoLoey.—Conus eldredi, new name for one of the poison cones. PS INVORRISON: .. <6 caca80 0 ee nee okey sl sa. 2 This Journal is Indexed in the International Index to Periodicals. We Page 14 15 20 30 32 Von. 45 FrBRUARY 1955 No. 2 JOURNAL (lM? OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES BOARD OF EDITORS R. K. Coox FENNER A, CHACE NATIONAL BUREAU U.S. NATIONAL MUSEUM OF STANDARDS ASSOCIATE EDITORS J. I. HorrmMan BERNICE SCHUBERT CHEMISTRY BOTANY Dean B. Cowie Puitie Drucker PHYSICS ANTHROPOLOGY ALAN STONE Davin H. DuNKLE ENTOMOLOGY GEOLOGY PUBLISHED MONTHLY BY THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Mount Royat & GuILForD AVEs. BaLTIMoRE, MarYLAND Entered as second class matter under the Act of August 24, 1912, at Baltimore, Md. Acceptance for mailing at a special rate of postage provided for in the Act of February 28, 1925. Authorized February 17, 1949 Journal of the Washington Academy of Sciences This Journat, the official organ of the Washington Academy of Sciences, publishes: (1) Short original papers, written or communicated by members of the Academy; (2) proceedings and programs of meetings of the Academy and affiliated societies; (8) notes of events connected with the scientific life of Washington. The JouRNAL is issued monthly. Volumes correspond to calendar years. Manuscripts may be sent to any member of the Board of Editors. It is urgently re- quested that contributors consult the latest numbers of the JouRNAL and conform their manuscripts to the usage found there as regards arrangement of title, subheads, syn- onymies, footnotes, tables, bibliography, legends for illustrations, and other matter. Manuscripts should be typewritten, double-spaced, on good paper. Footnotes should be numbered serially in pencil and submitted on a separate sheet. The editors do not assume responsibility for the ideas expressed by the author, nor can they undertake to correct other than obvious minor errors. Illustrations in excess of the equivalent (in cost) of one full-page halftone are to be paid for by the author Proof.—tIn order to facilitate prompt publication one proof will generally be sent to authors in or near Washington. It is urged that manuscript be submitted in final form; the editors will exercise due care in seeing that copy is followed. Unusual cost of foreign, mathematical, and tabular material, as well as alterations made in the proof by the author, may be charged to the author. Author’s Reprints —Reprints will be furnished in accordance with the following schedule of prices (approximate): Copies 4 pp. 8 pp. 12 pp. 16 pp. 20 pp. Covers 100 $ 3.25 $ 6.50 $ 9.75 $13 .00 $16.25 $ 3.50 200 6.50 13.00 19.50 ' 26.00 32.50 7.00 300 9.75 19.50 29.25 39.00 48.75 10.50 400 13.00 26.00 39.00 52.00 65.00 14.00 Subscriptions or requests for the purchase of back numbers or volumes of the Jour- NAL or the PRocEEDINGS should be sent to Haratp A. ReuperR, Custodian and Sub- scription Manager of Publications, U. S. National Museum, Washington 25, D. C. Subscription Rates for the JoURNAL.—Per year..................-+-eseeeeees $7.50 Price of back numbers and volumes: Per Vol. Per Number Vol. 1 to vol. 10, incl.—not available*.................. — Vol. 11 to vol. 15, incl. (21 numbers per vol.)........... $10. 00 $0.70 Vol. 16 to vol. 22, incl. (21 numbers per vol.)........... 8.00 0.60 Vol. 23 to current vol. (12 numbers per vol.)........... 7.50 0.90 * Limited number of complete sets of the JouRNAL (vol. 1 to vol. 44, incl.) available for sale to libraries at $371.00. Monocrapu No. 1, ‘‘The Parasitic Cuckoos of Africa,’’ by Herbert Friedmann $4.50 INDEX to JOURNAL (vols. 1-40) and PROCEEDINGS.......................-0.. $7.50 PROCEEDINGS, vols. 1=13) (1899-1919) complete. ---:....-.:.-..---2+ 925 eee $25.00 Single volumes, unbound) is Wee 0s doe nes alah oo atetehe aes es ee eee 2.00 Singleenumbers) cyte eeoeee otc ee ie es eee ace ae eee Prices on request Missing Numbers will be replaced without charge provided that claim is made to the Treasurer within 30 days after date of following issue. Remittances should be made payable to ‘‘Washington Academy of Sciences”’ and addressed to the Treasurer, H. 8S. Rappieye, 6712 Fourth Street, NW., Washington ’ Exchanges.—The Academy does not exchange its publications for those of other societies. Changes of Address.—Members are requested to report changes of address promptly to the Secretary. JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vou. 45. February 1955 No. 2 BIOLOGY .—The unitary principle. A. A. Wiut1AmMson, Washington, D. C. (Com- municated by Waldo L. Schmitt.) The greatest thing a human soul ever does in this world is to see something, and tell what it saw in a plain way ...To see clearly is poetry, prophecy, and religion all in one——RuwsKIN. The Greeks, of course, “had a word for it.’ Contrasting magnitude with number, they said that magnitude is limited in the large but unlimited in the small, whereas number is limited in the small but unlimited in the large. For—with respect to the whole numbers only—the smallest is the unit, one. By addition it can always be enlarged with- out limit. However large it may be, it can be made still larger, as one thousand, by the addition of one, becomes one thousand one, and so on without limit. But magnitude is at its utmost when the universe is taken as a unit, as the Greeks did. It can, however, be divided and subdivided without limit. Therefore Aristotle denied that the atom of Leucippus and Democritus could be the ultimate small its name implied: even it must be divisible as modern physics has found it to be. But the ultimate large of magnitude still is the universe, the “turning to one’”’ indicated by its name. All of the world’s great religions, despite their differences, are in full agreement on one basic concept: the eternality and uni- _ versality of the divine. “Only its laws en- dure.” The theological religions of the | West see in their theoretic immortality of _ the human soul proof of its divinity, for the | immortal is divine. But the non-theological religions of the Far East teach how to lose the personal soul by union with the eternal soul of the universe from which (they say) come all incarnate souls. For everything _ that is manifest is transient; only the soul of the universe is immortal and therefore 33 divine. Thus, in both East and West, eternality—absolute independence of time— characterizes the divine and its abode, the universe. Today, the fundamental concept of the eternality of the universe is being questioned and, for some, disproved. Theories assign- ing a vast but nonetheless limited age to the heretofore ageless are being advanced and developed. But not only is the quality of eternality being questioned, the spatial extent of the cosmos itself is being conceived of as having limits. Although these theories raise as vital problems as they purport to settle, they are meeting with the wide- spread credence in scientific circles. If, for example, the cosmos had a beginning in time, what was there before it? And if it is to have an end, what will be there afterward? If it is spatially limited, what hes beyond those spatial boundaries? To all such questions Echo (but only Echo) answers, What? Modern cosmologies have one thing in common: all are mathematical. But mathe- matics is a branch of logic, and logic is concerned with proof, which is not neces- sarily synonymous with truth. It can confidently be said that when the proof of an axiological proposition is mathematical only, it is no proof of the truth-value, the factuality, of the proposition’s primary postulates, nor of the mathematically arrived at conclusions. The logical implica- tions of a proposition can be worked out in complete disregard of whether or not its primary postulates are factual: that is not the concern of mathematics. Something more than logic, even mathematical logic, is essential to the demonstration of truth. And truth, be it said, is simply nature, and MAR 1 7 1055 34 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON conformity to it, as science itself recognizes. That is why even Einstein’s theories have been and are being subjected to empirical test. Do lght rays bend when passing through a gravitational field, as they theo- retically should? Observation proved that they do. Then—but only then—the theory, the logic of its mathematics, could be accepted as, to that extent, true. But if observation had shown that no bending occurs, all the mathematical logic in the world would not have sufficed to overcome that discrepancy, that non-conformity of theory with nature. The mathematics might be above reproach, but the proposition would have to be rejected at once as untrue. Nature does not always accord with human reason; observation may be faulty, or crucial experiments not so perfectly ex- clusive of alternates as supposed. Witness the history of the phlogiston theory, con- firmed by thousands of experiments and everywhere accepted until Lavoisier dem- onstrated its falsity and founded modern chemistry. The extent to which mathematical cos- mologists now go is illustrated by Dr. George Gamow’s assertion that space is not only lmited but even changes shape with time, assuming convex, negative, and concave curvatures in a regular order.! The common sense questions of what, above suggested, are simply ignored. There is also the expanding universe theory, now widely accepted despite its reliance on the logical fallacy of affirming the consequent in a hypothetical syllogism (1.e., a non-sequitur which only may be true, not being at all necessarily so). Hubble, the discoverer of the ‘‘Doppler effect”? taken as indicative of dispersion, recognized that other factors might operate to produce it, but not all cosmologists are so conservatively cautious. The foregoing should not have a contempt for mathematics read into it. It is merely to assert that mathematics, while a powerful, an almost indispensable tool, is nevertheless only a tool and so, by itself, not enough. Its logically arrived at conclusions must, whenever possible, be checked against empirical observation or controlled experi- 1 Sei. Amer. 190(3) : 55. Mar. 1954. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 45, No. 2 ment. Should that not be possible, then the logic of the theory must suffice as the best we can do. . The first and second laws of thermody- hamics as formulated by Clausius are examples of this, for we do not know—we cannot know—from experience that the total energy of the cosmos actually is con- stant, or that the entropy of the universe actually tends to a maximum. But the extrapolation of a future state from a present state is impossible without a governing constant, which makes the aforesaid laws logical necessities. Until proved factually erroneous, they will stand because of their scientific usefulness, a major consideration. If. however, the cosmos is actually sub- ject to the second law of thermodynamics; and if it is therefore running down like a clock which cannot be wound up, then it is logically false to associate eternality and divinity, and what all of the world’s great religions are agreed upon despite conflicting differences must be abandoned. For it is hardly conceivable that divinity can survive the loss of its most distinctive characteristic: infinity in space and time. Enters now a concept of which no scientific notice is taken but which nevertheless merits grave consideration because of its pertinence and apparent validity as a universal law. This is the artistic canon of Number, which first came to the present author’s attention in a book on architecture as one of three great canons in the grammar of design, the two others being the canons of Punctuation and Inflection.? Number, says Edwards, is of three categories: Unity, Duality, and Plurality. Of these three, the first and third are artistt cally correct and acceptable, but the second (Duality) is artistically abhorrent and not permissible. It never (he says) occurs un- resolved in nature. Edwards defines duality as the juxta- position of two equals. It causes the two to compete for supremacy, each over the other, with almost literally painful effect upon the eye of the beholder, whose mind demands that the duality be resolved, for duality is of > Epwarps, A. Trystan. The things which are seen: A revaluation of the visual arts. London, 1921. Feprvuary 1955 WILLIAMSON: the very essence of discord, just as a second is in music. It is the canon of Number, Edwards explains, which causes architects always to to support a Greek pediment with an even —never an odd—number of pillars. For an odd number would, for the sake of balance, bring a central pillar directly beneath the apex of the pediment and indicate a median line bisecting the whole into two laterally inverted but equal parts, producing true duality. The artistic effect would be ex- eruciating, especially if (as in some church- building fronts) there were a median-line- continuing steeple surmounting the whole. Although two’s occur abundantly in nature, there is always a duality-resolving inflection if there is juxtaposition of the units. Each unit then becomes half of a pair, requiring the other to make a unitary whole, as with our hands, our feet, our eyes. Ed- wards gives many other examples. The skyline of a land- or seascape should never be exactly half way between the top and bottom of the picture, nor should the ribbon on a man’s straw sailor hat be just half as wide as the height of the crown. If a rectangular room is twice as long as it is wide, people assembling in it in considerable number will instinctively form two groups, one in each half, as if an invisible wall separated them. That invisible wall is the artistic canon of Number, which all sense _ though they never so much as heard of it. There seems no limit to the range of power of this canon of design. In the present author’s opinion, it forced a triune God upon Christianity. For when, in A.D. 325, the Council of Nicea, by majority vote, made the Son coequal with the Father, it unwittingly violated that canon by bringing two equals inte juxtaposition. Immediately the question arose: Which of the two is really God? So great a furore of debate ensued that it soon became evident that something had to be done to stop it. Ac- cordingly, in A.D. 381, the Council of Constantinople was convened. If the re- ligion was to remain Christian, no retreat to Unity (the One God of rejected Arianism) was possible. Only one way, therefore, lay open, and that was to resolve the duality by changing it to plurality. This was accom- UNITARY PRINCIPLE 35 plished by the introduction of the Holy Spirit. The plurality of the Trinity resulted, and Plurality is itself a kind of Unity, the unity of a group, which made preservation of the unity of the God-head possible. But it is because the Holy Spirit is part of the Trinity for artistic and not for theological reasons that it is so difficult to explain and to understand on theological grounds. On the basis of the canon of Number, however, it is easily explamed and understood. This example is introduced here solely for the purpose of illustrating the univer- sality and compelling power of the great canon of Number. Its rule can be seen to extend even to spiritual matters, to the immortal, the divine. When Emerson, in his essay on Com- pensation, wrote: ‘‘An inevitable dualism bisects nature, so that each thing is a half, and suggests another thing to make it whole; as, spirit, matter; man, woman; odd, even; subjective, objective; in, out; upper, under; motion, rest; yea, nay,” he substituted in that sentence (and for the worse) the word, dualism, for the word, polarity, with which the paragraph begins. For what he referred to is not dualism in the sense of duality as defined by Edwards. As the term, polarity, implies, it is, rather, complementarity. For as Emerson says, “‘each thing is a half, and suggests another thing to make it whole.” Dualism, in Emerson’s sense, is an ancient truth. It was central to the religious doctrine taught by Zoroaster (6th century, B. C.) and still held by the Guebers and Parsees. It recognized two creative Powers: Ormuzd or Ahuramazda, the god of light and creator of all that is good; and Ahriman or Angra- mainyus, the god of darkness and creator of evil. That every rose has its thorn is a by- word of long standing. Something very much like dualism as complementarity has sound scientific stand- ing. Thus, it is recognized that if there are statistical laws, then there must also be non- statistical laws in over-all universal law. In the course of a discussion of probability in quantum mechanics, Filmer 8. C. Northrop says: ““...a general rule concerning the universality of statistical laws in nature can be stated. This rule is that if there are certain laws in science which are statistical 36 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES then there must also be laws in that science which are not statistical. Otherwise the concept of theoretical probability essential to the meaning of the statistical law in question cannot be defined.’’ Planck has written to the same effect. And essentially the same principle of complementarity underlies Aristotle’s concept of positive forms and forms by privation as reciprocals, the former having factual existence, the latter—implied by the former—only poten- tial existence. ‘“‘Cold,”’ says Emerson, ‘‘is the privation of heat.” But there are regions where cold becomes positive, and tempera- tures at which that disorder of energy which is heat, is stilled. The concept of complementarity leads to an interesting assumption. It is that if cos- mic energy is constantly being dissipated, then there must be some way in which it is just as constantly being accumulated or regenerated. But if so, what becomes of the second law of thermodynamics? It would be reduced to, at best, a half-truth. A corollary assumption is that this assumed restoration of energy to effective- ness must be through the operation of a process. And that would imply something more than the negative entropy (or ‘‘negen- tropy’’) whose mathematical formula is given by Erwin Schrédinger in section 60 of his little book What zs life? This brings us to a consequential ques- tion: Is there anywhere in nature an ob- servable process appearing to operate in the direction of the accumulation and restora- tion of energy? To this question an affirmative answer can—it is believed—be given with con- siderable assurance. This process was out- lined in a paper by the present author published in this JourNAL for October 1953 (vol. 43, no. 10), under the title “Speculation on the Cosmic Function of Life.” It was further developed in a second paper in the same JouRNAL for October 1954 (vol. 44, no. 10), entitled ‘Integration and Indi- viduation as Elements of Evolution.” Both dealt with what was called the Pyra- mid of Life Concept.* 3 NortHrop, The logic of the sciences and the humanities. New York, 1947. Fifth (1952) printing, p. 216.' 4 There are suggestions of a growing tendency VOL. 45, NO. 2 The purpose of those two papers was to indicate that life—by no means limited to this planet—actually does accumulate, transmute, concentrate, and refine energy, and does it systematically through bio- logical evolution. By its pyramid-building process, mechanical, chemical, thermo- dynamic, and electromagnetic energy are— in the level of national social organisms— brought to such a state of refinement that electromagnetic energy overwhelmingly pre- dominates, forming that body of thought- produced, ideological ‘‘margins of vitality” which are the glory of civilization. Theoret- ically, national social organisms carry the process over into the pyramid’s psychozoic realm of reality. On the basis of age-long established precedent in its physical organis- mal realm (which is composed of three successively superimposed levels), two addi- tional levels in the psychozoic realm are to be expected. They can, indeed, be seen in process of slow formation now, in current history. Here we may pause to note a fundamental difference between emergence as defined by William Morton Wheeler (this JouRNAL 43: 10) as it operates in the inanimate world and in the animate. In the former, emergents result from the specific interaction of unlikes, as atomic physics has found and as every chemical compound formula pro- claims (e.g., H2SO.). But in animate nature, emergents result from the specific interaction or organization of likes only. (All the cells of every multicellular physical organism are direct descendants of the original single fertilized ovum.) In this fundamental differ- ence lies the root cause of that minority group antipathy (often miscalled prejudice, bigotry, or whatnot) from which all nations (not America alone) unhappily suffer. It is old as the hills. Moses, the great Lawgiver of the Hebrews, knew and feared it. Con- trast the commandment Thou Shalt Not Kill, with the deeds recounted in Deuteron- omy 2, and find their reason in Numbers 33, verse 55: “But if ye will not drive out the to give thought to life as a cosmic phenomenon, as (negative) in Harold Blum’s T7me’s arrow and evolution, and (positive) George Wald’s article, “The Origin of Life,’’ in Scientific American for August 1954. Fepruary 1955 inhabitants of the land from before you; then it shall come to pass, that those which ye let remain of them shall be pricks in your eyes, and thorns in your sides, and shall vex you in the land wherein ye dwell.” For those who remained would constitute a minority group, which spells trouble always. And it is significant that minority group antipathy is not basically a matter of superiority and inferiority. Always it is the conflict of difference, of unlikes in standard of living, or religion, or manners and cus- toms, or race, or whatnot. It arises when, and only when, there is (1) a marked differ- ence, and (2) numerical representation of that difference large enough to be con- spicuous. One swallow does not make a summer, nor does difference-representation by only a few arouse antipathy. Its root - eause is violation of the like-with-like rule - shown reconciliation of fundamental throughout animate nature and operative at the human societal level in family, clan, phratry, tribe, and nation, the antithesis of the rule fundamental to inani- mate nature. It is an antithesis having pro- found implications bearing on the refining, regenerative process working for the per- petuation of the cosmic unitary principle. In his two masterly works, The meeting of Fast and West and The taming of the nations, Dr. Filmer 8. C. Northrop, Sterling Profes- sor of Law and Philosophy at Yale, has that the greatest humanitarian problem facing mankind today is the the indigenous Asian (Far Eastern), nontheological religions (Buddhism, Taoism, Confucianism, and the purer Hinduism) with the theological religions prevalent in the Near East and the West (Judaism, Christianity, and Moham- -medanism). While the difficulties standing in the way of such a consummation are appalling, there is an element of hope in the fact which Northrop so clearly shows: that both categories of religion seek, by different ways, to show man how to relate himself to _ the timeless and the therefore divine. The - difference is that the nontheological religions concentrate on what Northrop aptly calls the aesthetic component of things and our knowledge of them—that apprehension of nature which is conveyed directly by the senses; whereas the theological religions WILLIAMSON: UNITARY PRINCIPLE 37 concentrate mainly on the theoretic com- ponent thereof, which cannot be known by direct perception. The two categories are opposed, therefore, in the doctrinal develop- ment by each of but one of the two compo- nents of the same thing: nature. Yet those two components are complementary aspects of the whole, and he who sees but one sees not the whole. To neglect the one is to exaggerate the other, with unhappy effect.° While Northrop has presented the problem with beautiful clarity and logic, backed by an astounding fund of thoroughly and fruit- fully analyzed information, he does not offer any unifying concept as a solvent. In this respect, but in it only, his work is deficient. (It does not, however, diminish the value of that work, nor lay it open to censure.) He brings the problem into clarifying focus, but does not tell us how to solve it—by what means. He does, however, make it clear that a new set of basic assumptions is required, in the discovery and formulation of which both imagination and speculation can play legitimate, even necessary, roles.® As has been intimated in the two JouRNAL papers hereinbefore mentioned, it is the firm belief of the present author that the Pyramid of Life Concept, if developed and elaborated as it can be, could furnish all that is needed to (1) place the social sciences and the humanities on a firmer foundation (for they have a schematic part in it, and in the complementarity of the integrative and individuative principles practical ethics and morals are rooted as derivatives); (2) to thus help raise those disciplines to a parity of authority with the physical sciences (for on its showing no mechanical universe could endure without life’s rejuvenating action); and (3) to show explicitly how that great humanitarian problem could be solved (by a general adoption of the Con- cept as the closing nexus of an improved, more adequate basic understanding). That belhef—that conviction—is the remoter, deeper-lying justification for the presenta- tion of these papers. They attempt to tell > Tt is interesting and encouraging that Pro- fessor Northrop’s major works have required re- peated reprinting to meet the demand for them. 5 Northrop. Op. cit. supra. Pp. 321, 124, 347. 38 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES what has been seen, and tell it ‘in a plain way.” The Pyramid of Life Concept challenges the truth of all those mathematical cos- mologies which, by limiting space and time, would make irrational man’s age-old asso- ciation of eternality and infinity with the divine. On the basis of that Concept, life does have meaning and cannot logically be neglected; eternality and infinity are ra- tional conceptual attributes of the divine; and assurance of validity comes whence it should: the broad field of Biology. For it is forees amassed, made inherent in, and systematically restored to power by life through the pyramid-building process that give movement to—that animate—the uni- verse as an indeterminate continuum and ensure its perpetuity. The cyclic character of the evolution of its distinguishable, determinate parts, together with the ap- parently direct relationship of those three great mysteries, magnetism, electricity, and mind, lends support to such a conclusion. The present author dares hope that if and when the scientific, philosophical, and even religious usefulness of the Pyramid of Life Concept is seen, the way may be opened to its general acceptance. For it offers a new VOL. 45, NO. 2 concept of history, superior in every way to the Hegelian concept out of which grew two world wars and on which Karl Marx drew heavily for the dialectic materialism theory underlying his communistic doctrines. Kmphasizing as it does the cooperative, organizing principle, especially in interna- tional affairs; stressing the irreversible evolutionary priority of importance of individual man rather than the State, be- cause of his sustenance-supplier status in relation thereto; finding in free intellectual inquiry the necessary basis for the ‘‘max- imization of human potentialities’ for the enrichment of that mental sustenance by which peoples and their nations live through their social institutions; and requiring of evolution only that it continue to operate just as it has for untold ages—it can fortify the democratic doctrine with a theoretic, philosophical justification such as it never had before and of which it stands in dire need today. It is a Justification which can be published to the world with no fear whatever of evil consequences to follow, but, on the con- trary, with the utmost confidence in its beneficial effects. MATHEMATICS.—-A pplication of two methods of numerical analysis to the com- putation of the reflected radiation of a point source. Peter Henricr, American University, Washington, D. C. (Communicated by John Todd.) Let a monochromatic source of light of intensity J be fixed at the point (0, 0, h) of a (a, y, z)-space and let the horizontal plane z = 0 reflect independently from the angle of view a constant fraction » of the incident radiation. Let a small horizontal plane p be located at the point (a, y, z). Then the illumination per unit area of p due to reflection at the planez = 0 is ul (h, r, 2), where r = (@ + y’)!? and | p dy Jo (h? + 7? + p? — 2rp cos ¢)*/?(p? + 27)? 1 This paper was prepared under a National Bureau of Standards contract with American University. 2 See [6], p. 1 + 3. Introducing the dimensionless quantities r jaligg h’ may we can express this function in terms of one of two variables by putting B(h, r, 2) = — WE 2) h and WE, 1) = 2 dt (1) C t dp 0 1+2+ 2 — 2teos¢)??2(2 + 7)" | In order to get some information about the | quantitative behavior of W(é, 7), this func-_ | Frespruary 1955 HENRICI: tion was tabulated for the two sets of values See l| .05(.05) 1.6 n = .05(.05)1.6 and 2 = SER 7 = .25(.25)8.0 In this paper we describe some of the pre- liminary analy tical work necessary for this computation. In §1 we reduce the integral (1) to a finite simple integral involving the hypergeometric function. The computation of this function, including an application of Aitken’s 6-method to speed up the con- vergence of its power series, is discussed in $2. In §3 we give a rigorous discussion of the error committed by evaluating the simple integral numerically. This part of our work is based on a method proposed recently by P. Davis and P. Rabinowitz [8, 4]. A major part of the subsequent analysis can be extended to the case where the orientation of the plane element p is arbi- trary. We do not, however, discuss these generalisations in the present paper. | 1. TRANSFORMATION OF THE INTEGRAL (1). 1.1 Reduction to a simple integral. Our first aim is to reduce the double inte- gral (1) to a simple integral by carrying out the integration with respect to g. This can be done with the aid of hypergeometric func- tions. Although these functions are not ele- | mentary, they can be computed numerically to any desired accuracy, as will be shown in §2. By an elementary trigonometric identity we have Piet — 22 cos ¢ =1+ (t+ &) — 4té (co ae We expand the integrand in terms of _ powers of 4té tes (cor a where X = Too Gabe and observe that |. * The numerical results have been computed * on SEAC and are on file at the Computation Lab- - oratory. REFLECTED RADIATION OF A POINT SOURCE 39 of ¢ and &. Integrating term by term, we ob- tain® , 270 | (1+ f+ — 2 cos ¢) *” dy Dit 4 @ +6 Bare? © By 7 I (3/2), X" ' cos” dd 0 n=0 nN ! Qr[l + (¢ + €)) PRG, 351; X), (2) where (3) F(a, b; @3 ZB) = Ss (a)n (bd), as A=0 (One is the hypergeometric function. Hence W(E, n) = 2n i (7 +t)” -( + (t+ €)) PRG, 351; X)tdt (4) This integral can be simplified further by using the transformation theory of the hypergeometric functions. Applying the formula’ 2 —b ING, (03 Pos 2) = (1 — 5) bb+1- ao ge oe) to the hypergeometric function in (4) and introducing the new variable° = (le ey, (4) becomes | ate tat fee X HG, 251; Zz dz, (5) where now Ae # Z=Z = - : 6 OO} ete oe 08 = bh Op =a(a+1)--- (a +n —1), nm = 5 Bidelyi [5], eq. 2.11(28). ‘ This will not be confounded with the geo- metrical coordinate z used in the introduction. 40 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES In order to avoid the numerically undesirable improper integration, we put, denoting the integrand in (5) by f(z), be j@) ee = i jie + = (4) ab Since in view of (6) Z(z) = z(4), the hypergeometric function in (5) has the same value for z and 1/z, and we can there- fore write | gle)lgale) + gile)P(Z) dz, (7) where we have put for brevity q(z) = 21+ 2)" (8a) g(z)=[n ++ 8)e]° (8b) gs(z) = [ne +1 + &] 2" (8¢) jaa) = 1G ep 118 A). (9) 1.2 Special cases. 1.21 & = 0. By direct integration e.g. of (4) one finds 1 f 9 37? A OO NCU et Te ym a Qsyy\7 V1 — -+ anhV/1 — 7, <q <i n= 1 te Se {on + ieee ET (@? — 1)2\" Vip = 1 -+an lV 7? — i, L<p<Kp It is easily seen that in spite of the apparent singularity V(O, 7) is a regular function of n at 7 = 1, the Taylor expansion being WO, ») = 6 & ee = 1 1.22 » = 0. For n = O, W(E, n) is not de- fined. Writing in (4) VoL. 45, No. 2 Lace and applying to each integral the second mean value theorem, it can however be shown that Me) = Clap ky 2. COMPUTATION OF THE HYPERGEOMETRIC FUNCTION. 2.1 Estimation of the error due to trunca- tion of the hypergeometric series. Since for all values of z and all finite values of &£ 0 S Z(z) < 1, the hypergeo- metric series in (7) can be computed to any degree of accuracy from its power series. Putting PG,#1;2) = Line, 0) we have 1 ote We Ye = (1 = re Yn-1) Ge = il, Bees) and hence : 1 Rea U (1 a ms <7 On the other hand, Denoting by the n-th partial sum of (10) and putting s = lim s, , we have thus for the remainder s — s, of the series the following estimates from above and from below (valid under the assumption 0 S Z < 1): 00 Gps pred < pie = s—s, 3 = Z i= (11) Frepruary 1955 Ve NW /S, 2.2 Aitken’s 6-method. The sequence s, defined above has the property that, using the symbol A for the forward differences, AS;-1 ASn_2 = 0) ar Ep. (13) where g is a constant and ¢, ~0asn— ~. The convergence of sequences of this type can be sped up by a process which is known as Aitken’s 6-method and which has been studied by various authors [1, 2, 7, 8]. This process consists in transforming the original sequence s, into a new sequence §, accord- ing to the rule 3, =f = (As,—1) (n = O, 3, a -) (14a) A*Sn—2 which may be written alternatively as Sn —= Spz—1 — pollen! ASn—2 (14b) APSn—2 A n—2 : Sno. ( ) . (14¢) A*Sn—2 The following facts are known: (i) If g ¥ 1, the sequence §, is ultimately defined; (i) If |q| < 1, the sequence §, has the same limit as the original sequence; Gnjelia O< |"q|< 1, the ‘sequence’ s;, converges faster than s, in the sense that’ Sim S77 S — Sn (15) lim (=0. no | We also will have to make use of the follow- ing simple quantitative properties of the transformation: (iv) If s, and §, 4, are defined, then AE, (il = Oh E_) (l= Ona E2255) AS, = (16) “See Lubkin [7], p. 233, where, however, the quite unnecessary assumption is made that e, de- pends analytically on the variable z = 1/n. 0 ASn-1 0 HENRICI: REFLECTED RADIATION OF A POINT SOURCE 41 (v) From (16) it follows easily that if tm = Max | Ae,, | m=n a, = Mex | ealf and if 0) <q < 1 — 6, then |s — 3, | us |s—s,a|. (17) i! : 5 GC S]@=)0 = ¢q— dea) (vi) Further refinements may be possible by making use of special properties of the correction terms ¢,. For instance if, as in the present case, €, < 0, if the sequences €, and Ae, are monotonic from m = n on and if 0 < g < 1 + &,, we can replace (17) by AE =n ——— Ch = OP S IIA DH (s = s,-1). (18) 2.3 Application to the summation of the hypergeometric series. In the present case q = Z, and thus A Pee Ne A n = = . "2 = 16 we ee Equation (18) thus yields together with (11) the estimate ype < Fa ay seep ee sen ay < (19) Tt follows that for a given number of terms the 6-method reduces the truncation error by a factor § = & BI 1 = In/2 8s — JU): which for Z = 0.5, n = 10 is approximately Vigoo. The gain in accuracy can thus be considerable. In practice, however, not the number of terms, but the accuracy is given, and the question arises how many terms of the series can be saved when a given ac- curacy has to be obtained. We shall next discuss several aspects of this question. S — Sn 42 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES 2.31 Asymptotic savings in the number of terms. We first compute for a given n a lower bound for the number m of terms necessary to obtain with s,, the same accuracy as with §, . Putting m = n + k, we have for k the condition SG > Sat SS = fa, or, using (12) and (19), 2v/2 Gerais xr 1-Z open 8n3(1 — Z)?’ which yields log 62 + 2log(1 — Z) + 3 logn is 7 (20) ar —log Z This is for fixed Z and n large ~ C log n, where the constant C = —3/log Z can be- come arbitrarily large if Z is close to 1. 2.32 Savings for a given accuracy. Upper bounds 7 (Z, ¢) for the number of terms n necessary to attain with §, a given accuracy € can be computed from (19) by trial and error methods. In the following table we give these values 7 for several typical values of Z and for an accuracy of 10-*. They are contrasted with the lower bounds m, computed from (12), for the number of terms necessary when _ the speed-up is not used. Z nN m l 5 df 5 15 27 9 92 196 .99 953 2279 2.33 Ratio of practical convergence. The situation that the number of terms of an infinite series necessary for a given ac- curacy is either not known a priori or can only be determined by the solution of a transcendental equation arises frequently in practice. In such cases one usually proceeds with the summation until one or several terms of the series become smaller than a preassigned quantity, and the last partial sum is then taken to be the sum of the series. This ‘‘practical convergence” of the series has obviously nothing to do with mathematical convergence, unless some re- VOL. 45, No. 2 lationship between the first neglected term and the remainder of the series is established. To this end we define as ratio of practical convergence (r.p.c.) for any series DAs, the quantity 3 = & he T° (21) For series of type (13) we find under the assumptions of (vi) §2.2, and it follows from (16) and (18) that under the same assumptions (22) ies S 9, | where p, is the r.p.c. of the transformed series. The r.p.c. is thus not affected ad- versely by the 6-method. For our present problem it results that a uniform accuracy ¢ in the hypergeometric function is obtained if the summation is extended until AS, = 61 — 2): 2.34 Savings in computation time. In general, the time needed for the com- putation of s, will be negligible in compari- son with the time needed for the computa- tion of the original sequence s, . In a case like the present one, however, where the computation of s, itself is very simple, the question can be raised if it pays to apply the 6-method. In order to make it pay, it was decided here to compute §, not for every n but only for a set of equidistant values = kN, N > ik — 2 eee se if N is large enough® the additional time used for the computation of s, becomes negligible in comparison with the time con- sumed for the computation of s,, and the savings in computation time are of the same order as the savings in the number of terms.’ If the assumptions of (vi), §2.2 are satisfied, then AS, > 0, AS, — O monotonically, and we obtain for the r.p.c. of the sequence s, = Sy the estimate 8’ N = 8 was found convenient in the present case. 8 An alternate procedure would be to apply the 6?-method to the sequence t; = sxy. For this and various other practical aspects of the 6?-method see [9]. FEBRUARY 1955 HENRICT: = Si Sev S — Sauyy fs Ss == = a 1 S&iDN — SkN SG+DN — Skv Ze SaqpN lik ges é =. =e +l= = P(k+t)N ap ll. N AS(41)N N For the present case it results that a uniform accuracy © is guaranteed if the summation is carried out until Ne(1 — Z) ol N= Ne 3. ESTIMATION OF THE QUADRATURE ERROR. 3.1 Description of the method. On the basis of the discussions of the last section the integrand in {7) may be con- sidered as known for numerical purposes. It remains to estimate the error induced by carrying out the simple integration (7) numerically. Since the integrand is an analytic function of z on the path of inte- gration, this can be done by a method which has been devised recently by P. Davis and P. Rabinowitz and which can be summarized as follows: Suppose the function f(z) (2 = x + ty) is regular analytic in a domain © containing the segment [—1, 1] of the real axis, and denote by &, the ellipse with foci at +1 and semiaxes a and b = ‘a — 1)"? such that (a + b) = p. If now the integral f(z) dz is evaluated numerically by a given integra- tion rule R (e.g. by the trapezoidal rule, by Weddle’s rule, or by a Gaussian n-point rule), then the quadrature error is bounded by the quantity Min || f |lg, ozo), (PlGpeD} (24) where ik. = ff \v@ Pardy ees) and or(p) is a numerical coefficient depend- ing only on the integration rule and on p, but not on the particular function f. The values of « have been tabulated for various 1 Tt follows that Di. < Ptin) if Pern z= N/(N — 1). REFLECTED RADIATION OF A POINT SOURCE 43 values of p and various integration rules in [4]. If this method is applied in practice, the quantity || f||/g,, which is hard to obtain exactly, will usually have to be replaced by a suitable upper bound, such as VrabMeg,, (26) where Mg, is an upper bound of | f(z) | in & - Moreover, instead of taking the mini- mum of (24) with respect to the continuous variable p, one will in general have to be satisfied with the minimum for a few dis- tinct values of p. It will be seen that in complicated cases such as the present one still further simplifications have to be made in order to get a working estimate. 3.2 The singularities of the integrand. In order to determine the ellipses €, at our disposal, we first have to locate the singu- larities of the integrand in (7). Singularities arise (a) from gi(z) at the points 21,2 = +1; (b) from g2(z) at the points (c) from g;(z) at the points VTA Sel 25,6 = 2 ; n 24,3 (d) from the hypergeometric function, which is singular at Z = 1, at the points z satisfying Z Danleeee Ga) Bae 1.€., at kE +7 CUS = 7 —=———1 V1i+ 2 where all four combinations of signs are possible. The ellipse &, , which encloses the path of integration, has in the present case its foci at 2 = 0 and z = 1. It is clear that if there are singularities near the path of integration, the choice of available ellipses &, is re- 44 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON stricted and, since the coefficients o are comparatively large for very slender el- lipses, the integration will be less accurate. In our problem this will happen when é is large, in particular when simultaneously 7 is small, because then the points 23,4 and two of the points 27, ... 1 are near to the points z = Oandz = 1 respectively. 3.3 The rectangle R,. In view of the complexity of our integrand the task of obtainng Mg, for a given &, exactly is a difficult one. A particular com- plication arises from the fact that a working estimate for the function F defined by (9) is available only for | Z| < 1. In this case we find, using results of 2.1, EG 2) see) In order to overcome these two difficulties, we again forego some accuracy and consider in place of the ellipse 6 the smallest rectangle with sides parallel to the axes con- taining it. If a and b are the major and the minor semiaxes of €,, the corners of this rectangle R, are situated at 1g + a + ib. An upper bound for the modulus of the integrand in R, will clearly also be an upper bound in §,. The rectangle R,, then, must have the following two properties: (a) None of the singularities z; must lie 1004 JfH 8 (DS) |Fi-< W aa Condition (a) is easy to check and yields the inequality (27) b < min Bb,, (28) i=1,2,3 where aE NS, Ip ES Vise Vila Pe ”" iat) ee aa nN Aer If this is satisfied, then we have for the functions g;(z) ( = 1, 2,3) the upper bounds [nl S oh =(% tay +o)70—b)? (9) el S & =[" —(+8)b)~ (29) ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 45, NO. 2 lgs| S 9s =[0g +4) +0? + = 70) Condition (b) requires some closer in- vestigation. It is certainly satisfied for a sufficiently flat ellipse, since for z real, | Z| < 1. The condition will thus result in another upper bound for 6, namely, ~?, (295) UD) 07 | PAB) |< Al}. pee OS @ S OPO. Since e Lea Y a peers eS AO ae ea the problem of determining 6, is equivalent to that of finding for a given value of now 1+2 the largest value y = y, with the property that the function h(x, y) = | 46@ + Ie) f satisfied the inequality h(x, y) <p for |z—%| 3 4,|y| SY 2 p= . Then = Up. (30) It is easy to see that the function hy) = min h(x,y) |z—7]Sa is for a > 14 independent of a and is repre- sented analytically by 1+ wae T= 4, hoe ee (31) @= oy) = Te ion Wappen Sy = 1 This is evidently a continuous, strictly monotonically decreasing function of y in [0, 1] with h(O) = 1, h(1) = O. The function y = Yp is the inverse of the function p = h(y) and hence given by FEBRUARY 1955 HENRICI: REFLFCTED RADIATION OF A POINT SOURCE 45 In a rectangle Rp with b < by the hypergeo- metric function is thus by (27) bounded by F = 1/(1 — p/h(b)), (33) where h(b) is given by (31) with b = y. Finally, the norm || f ||g, of the integrand will be bounded by IF || =V rab giGe+ 9s)F. 3.4 Numerical results. The material is now at hand to compute upper bounds for the quadrature error for given values of — and 7 and for any rule for which the coefficients o are tabulated. The practical computation proceeds as fol- lows: First the upper bounds 6; for the minor semiaxis of the ellipse have to be ascertained according to (28) and (30). Then an ellipse has to be selected which meets the geo- metrical conditions and for which cr(p) is known. Experience shows that this ellipse should be chosen rather large, since with increasing p,cr(p) seems to decrease much more rapidly than the norm increases. For this ellipse the norm || f || has to be com- puted by (34). An upper bound for the error induced by the rule RF is then given by lf | oR(p). The following is a table of error bounds for the function W(é, 7) (including the factor in front of the integral sign in (7)) for a few representative values of & and 7, if Gauss’s 16-point rule is applied. (34) E n 22 1 5 1 4.37(—14) 1.40(—10) 2.48(—2) 5 6.24(—5) 6.46(—5) 4.78(—5) ; (a) = 104 Concerning this table, two remarks are in order. 1. If the above error bounds are computed for small values of 7, it turns out that only exceedingly flat ellipses &, are available, for which the values of o are either bad or are not tabulated at all. This is an indication that in these cases the simple application of even a high-powered integration rule is in- adequate and that the interval has to be subdivided. If this is done, the above method is still explicitly applicable to each subinter- val, although, of course, the computations become more and more involved. 2. It is likely that in view of the numerous simplifications made the above error esti- mates are much too large. We base this remark on the two following empirical facts: (a) The results of the computations of (7) by one and by two Gaussian 16-point rules, carrying eight digits after the decimal point, agreed completely for & = 0(.05)1.6, 7 = .3(.05)1.6; (b) The value V(O, 1) = .4 (see $1.2) was obtained exactly. Nevertheless it will be observed that at least for moderate values of € and 7 the estimates are still very practical. To establish bounds of the same quality by conventional real-variable tech- niques is probably not easy. Acknowledgment—The author wishes to acknowledge a number of stimulating discus- sions with J. Todd, P. Davis, and L. Joel. on the subject of this paper. Credit must also go to L. Joel for the successful computa- tion of (1) on SEAC along the lines indicated in §1 and §2. : BIBLIOGRAPHY (1] ArrKen, A. C. On Bernoulli’s numerical solu- tion of algebraic equations. Proc. Roy. Soc. Edinburgh 46: 289-305. 1926. . Studies in practical mathematics IT. The evaluation of the latent roots and latent vectors of a matrix. Proc. Roy. Soe. Edinburgh 57: 269-304. 1936-37. [3] Davis, P. Errors of numerical approximations for analytic functions. Journ. Rational Mech. Anal. 2: 303-313. 1953. [4] Davis, P., and Rapinowrtz, P. On the estima- tion of quadrature errors for analytic func- tions. Math. Tables and Other Aids to Com- putation 8: 193-203. 1954. [5] Erppiyr, A., pr au. Higher transcendental functions, 1: New York, 1953. [6] Fusseuyu, W. L. The reflected radiation from an infinite Lambert plane. NRL Memorandum report no. 122. 1953. [7] Lusxin, 8. A method of summing infinite series. Journ. Res. Nat. Bur. Standards 48: 228-254. 1952. [8] STEFFENSEN, J. F. Remarks on iteration. Skand. Aktuarietidskr. 16: 64-72. 1933. [9] Experiments in the computation of conformal maps. Nat. Bur. Standards Applied Math. Ser. no. 42. Papers by J. Todd, 8S. E. Warshawski, G. Blanch, L. K. Jackson. [2] 46 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 45, NO. 2 METEOROLOGY .— Dynamic linkages between westerly waves and weather.’ H. WeExLeR, U.S. Weather Bureau. Improved predictions of the large-scale westerly flow pattern for 24-48 hours on a routine basis will soon be available. A denser network of radiosonde stations, a better understanding of the dynamics of atmospheric flow, and availability of fast, large capacity computers have combined to make possible for the first time a useful mathematical prediction of the future positions and intensities of the major troughs, ridges, and cyclonic and _ anti- cyclonic eddies in the midlatitude flow pattern. There remains the problem of predicting the weather pattern from the predicted flow patterns. Since an important part of what we mean by ‘‘weather” is cloudiness and precipitation, which are dependent on vertical velocities and water vapor, it is necessary to know the field of vertical motions. This has already been done in several cases treated dynamically, the vertical velocities being expressed as average horizontal values over 200-mile squares (which is the basic data mesh used) and over several hundred millibars in the vertical. The results of these calculations (e.g., for the November 5-6, 1953, storm on the east coast of the United States) show good agree- ment with precipitation amounts averaged over large areas, but not with individual amounts (7). In other words, the large-scale westerly flow pattern leads to large-scale fields of vertical velocities which, combined with the predicted moisture content, will delineate the associated large-scale pre- cipitation patterns. However important this information is, the meteorologist must know more about the smaller-scale fine-grained — structure which he observes as ‘‘weather,’’ not only visually by cloud formations and distribution but also as radar displays of precipitating clouds. These show an amazing amount of “organization” in weather patterns, with p) 1 Summary of remarks presented before Con- ference on High-Speed Computing Applications to Meteorology and Oceanography, sponsored by the National Science Foundation and the University of California at Los Angeles, May 13-15, 1954. cellular, eddy, and line phenomena present whose sizes or widths are much smaller than the westerly wave lengths and in fact, smaller even than the average 200-mile mesh length used in present dynamic prediction methods (2). These smaller-scale phenomena which have principal effect on most human activities cannot be delineated by present larger-scale predictions of average vertical velocities and, therefore, average precipitation over 200-mile squares. For example, precipitation cellular pat- terns of scale 10 by 10 miles (corresponding to thunderstorms) are often found super- imposed on the general large-scale warm- front precipitation area when the ascending tropical air is convectively unstable, and account for the heavier bursts of precipita- tion amounts hitting some spots and missing others a few miles away—which makes so difficult agreement of precipitation amounts predicted with those observed. Line phenomena in weather have been long observed as the terms: line-squall or squall-line, front, instability line, and pres- sure jump line indicate. These lines, which may be hundreds of miles long, have widths measured in tens of miles. A very large percentage of violent weather, such as severe thunderstorms, windstorms, and the small but violent vortices known as torna- does, is located on these lines (3). The general location in space and time of weather phenomena is controlled mainly by the large-scale westerly flow pattern in that “weather” usually occurs between the planetary wave trough and the ridge sonie hundreds of miles to the east. The extent and average intensity of the associated large- scale weather pattern will depend on the flow, thermal, and moisture properties of these westerly waves and are amenable to quantitative prediction as discussed earlier; but there is as yet no quantitative method of predicting the scale and ‘‘unsmoothed”’ intensity of the fine-grained structure of weather. More must be learned of dynamic links connecting the large-scale flow pattern with FEBRUARY 1955 WEXLER: WESTERLY the fine-grained weather pattern. The front was one of the first dynamic links discovered which connected atmospheric energy sources and surface weather; the recent concept of the pressure-jump line as an explanation of certain types of squall-lines provides another example. There is some evidence that the front owes its origin and maintenance to transverse air motions associated with the jet-stream aloft. The pressure-jump line has been shown to be a gravity wave on an internal surface; it may move faster than the surrounding winds and by its violent lifting of air causes the release of precipita- tion and latent energy, forming severe storms of small-scale. Such gravity waves may also play an important part in the initiation and propagation of cellular pre- cipitation patterns. In the present large-scale dynamic meth- ods gravity waves are considered to be meteorologically unimportant noise, and are automatically eliminated by the geo- strophic assumption. In the case of the large-scale planetary waves with which dynamic methods are presently concerned, the elimination of gravity waves may be entirely justified, but not for the finer- grained weather. Recent work has emphasized the earlier discovery by O. Reynolds (4) regarding the direction of flow of kinetic energy from eddies to zonal currents and vice versa. It appears that under certain conditions, usually fulfilled in middle latitudes, the large-scale eddies of the size of conventional “highs” and “lows” transfer their energy to the maintenance of zonal currents, the smaller eddies serving to diffuse some of the energy of the zonal currents. Thus the flow of energy from large zonal motions to small motions is important not only as regards the atmospheric energy cycle but in creating the fine-grained structure of weather. Some likely areas of investigation are suggested: (a) Deepening or motion of an upper trough in the westerlies and consequent unbalanced ac- celeration of low-level currents which by their induced lateral motions produce line phenomena. This may be considered as an extension of the Rossby-Cahn effect and recent work by Tepper WAVES AND WEATHER 47 (5) indicates that this model, treated as non- linear, causes ‘‘shocks”’ or pressure jumps propa- gating eastward if the basic unbalanced current is from the south. This may create squall-lines at the time of deepening or moving troughs in the westerly waves aloft. The linearized model of Rossby-Cahn did not yield such shocks or pres- sure-jump lines. Solution of this problem would also apply to Hawaiian precipitation, most of which apparently comes from warm clouds bounded by an inversion at 5,000 to 8,000 feet, where air temperatures are well above freezing. The appearance of a westerly wave trough at 30,000 feet aloft induces an upward motion in the inversion, thickening the clouds sufficiently to allow coagulation of cloud drops into larger drops which can precipitate to the ground. This process may also lead to formation of line phenomena, traveling away from the initial disturbance. (b) Effect of mountainous and hilly terrain in producing moving discontinuities requires further investigation. The maximum frequency of tornadoes east of the Rocky Mountains may be a direct effect of the disturbance of air flowing over the mountains, or what seems more likely, the usual formation of troughs to the lee of the mountains tends to deepen the westerly wave trough as it passes east of the mountains. Never- theless, the tendency of line phenomena to appear on the east side of the mountains without a pronounced trough aloft indicates that at times there may be a direct mountain effect on atmos- pheric pulsations. The strong convective activity on a hot summer afternoon over the Rockies for example seems to generate travelling cloud lines which may cause nocturnal showers and thunder- storms farther east. Also the strong tendency for cold air drainage at night down the mountain and foot-hill slopes may cause Rossby-Cahn effects to the right of the unbalanced current. For example, the average vector difference at 1,000 meters at Oklahoma City in summer from 4 p. m. and 4 a. m. winds is 20 mph from the southwest, which might create line phenomena propagating to the southeast. (c) Effect of sudden changes in air density caused, for example, by cooling by precipitation produces oscillations of a quasistationary front. A marked case of this sort occurred in May 1953 and created among others, the famous Waco, Tex., tornado (6). 48 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES (d) Spiralform bands in the hurricane present a fine example of curved line phenomena (2) similar in appearance to a spiral nebula. The first or ‘forerunner’ squall-lnes often appear 200-300 miles in advance of the hurricane. The occasional occurrence of tornadoes in hurricanes may also be associated with these bands, since most of the hurricane rain and squally winds are also concentrated there. The explanation of these marked bands is still lacking; they may be as- sociated with the “pumping”’ of the hurricane itself, generating waves which travel outward from the center and rotate or the entrainment and intensification of the cloud ‘streets’ often found over the tropical oceans. VOL. 45, No. 2 BIBLIOGRAPHY (1) SMacorinsky, J., and Couuins, G. O. The numerical prediction of precipitation. (To be published in Monthly Weather Rev.) (2) Wexurr, H. Structure of hurricanes as deter- mined by radar. Ann. New York Acad. Sci. 48: 821. 1947. (3) Tepprr, M., etal. Pressure jump lines in mid- western United States, January—August 1951. U.S. Dept. of Commerce, Weather Bureau, Research Paper no. 37. 1954. (4) Reynoups, O. Dynamical theory of incom- pressible viscous fluids, etc. Phil. Trans. Roy. Soc. London, A186: 123. 1895. (5) Tepper, M. On the generation of pressure jump lines by the impulsive addition of momentum, etc. (To be published in Journ. Meterology.) (6) Wexuer, H. Readjustment of a front after cooling by precipitation Monthly Weather Rev. 81: 152. 1953. PALEONTOLOGY .—A new Pleistocene bat (Corynorhinus) from Mexico. CHARLES O. Hanpuey, Jr., United States National Museum. Vertebrate remains in large quantities were collected by the late Chester Stock in San Josecito Cave, Nuevo Leén, Mexico. These have been reported in part by Cushing (1945), Findley (1958), Furlong (1943), Miller (1940, 1942, 1943), and Stock (1948). A portion of this material is temporarily at the University of Kansas, on loan from the California Institute of Technology. I am indebted to the authorities of the De- partment of Geological Sciences, California Institute of Technology, and to E. Raymond Hall of the University of Kansas for the opportunity to study a skull of the big- eared bat, Corynorhinus, from this collec- tion. It proves to differ significantly from other known forms and may be described as follows: Corynorhinus tetralophodon n. sp. Type.—California Institute of Technology (Vert. Pal.) no. 192/2989; well-preserved skull with worn teeth, lacking mandibles, auditory bullae, hamular processes, all incisors, right canine, and the minute premolar, P!, from both maxillae; collected by Chester Stock in Pleisto- cene deposits of San Josecito Cave, near the town of Aramberri, southern Nuevo Leén, Mexico, elevation 7,400 feet. Diagnosis —Resembles Recent Corynorhinus in most cranial details. Rostrum broad and flattened; anterior nares, relative to greatest length of skull, small and rounded in outlne (dorsal view); skull relatively narrow; braincase relatively shallow; zygoma with postorbital ex- pansion in posterior third of arch; supraorbital ridges lacking; temporal ridges prominent and converging posteriorly, so that they meet, but do not completely merge; intermaxillary notch relatively small; extension of palate posterior to M2? relatively short; median postpalatal process styliform, basial pits deep and well-defined. Tooth rows crowded; teeth relatively fragile (not robust); canine with small internal cingular cusp; P* wider than long, with anterointernal cingular cusp only slightly indicated; no trace of hypocone cusp on molars; M* with well-developed fourth commissure, almost equaling third commissure in length. Measurements.—In millimeters, taken with dial calipers with aid of bmocular microscope. Great- est length (incisors excluded), 15.6; zygomatic breadth, 8.2; interorbital breadth, 3.4; breadth of brain case, 7.7; cranial depth, 5.3; maxillary tooth row (anterior edge of canine to posterior edge of M*), 5.0; postpalatal length (posterior margin of palate, excluding median process, to anteroventral lip of foramen magnum), 5.9; palatal breadth (at M3), 5.7. Comparisons.—Closely resembles Recent spe- cies of Corynorhinus, but the retention of a well- developed fourth commissure on M* distinguishes tetralophodon from these as well as from all other species of plecotine bats. The fourth commissure Fesruary 1955 of MS is barely indicated in Barbastella, Huderma, Tdionycteris, Recent Corynorhinus, and in the Pleistocene C. alleganiensis, but there is no trace of it in Eurasian Plecotus, which shows some re- duction even of the third commissure of M°. Shallowness of the brain case is a feature ob- served in Plecotus, Euderma, Idionycteris, and possibly in C. alleganiensis (uncertain because of the likelihood that the only known almost com- plete skull has suffered dorsoventral compres- sion). This degree of shallowness (cranial depth equals 34 per cent of greatest length) is equaled in Recent Corynorhinus only by extreme variants. Failure of the temporal ridges to merge com- pletely to form a sagittal crest is a character chared with C. alleganiensis, Idionycteris, and Euderma. However, in these forms the ridges remain farther apart. Occasional specimens of Recent Corynorhinus resemble C. tetralophodon in this respect. Specimen examined.—One, the type. HANDLEY: A NEW PLEISTOCENE BAT FROM MEXICO 49 LITERATURE CITED Cusuine, J. E., Jr. Quaternary rodents and lago- morphs of San Josecito Cave, Nwevo Leon, Mexico. Journ. Mamm. 26(2): 182-185. 1945. FinpueEy, J. 8. Pletstocene Soricidae from San Josecito Cave, Nwevo Leon, Mexico. Univ. Kansas Publ. Mus. Nat. Hist. 5(36) : 633-639. 1953. Furtone, E. L. The Pleistocene antelope, Stocko- ceros conklingi, from San Josecito Cave, Mexico. Carnegie Inst. Washington Publ. 551: 1-8, 5 pls. 1943. Mitier, L. A new Pleistocene turkey from Mexico. Condor 42: 154-156. 1940. Two new bird genera from the Pleistocene of Mexico. Univ. California Publ. Zool. 47(8): 43-46. 1942. The Pleistocene birds of San Josecito Cavern, Mexico. Univ. California Publ. Zool., 47(5): 148-168. 1948. Stock, C. The cave of San Josecito, Mexico. New discoveries of the vertebrate life of the ice age. Engineering Sci. Monthly, California Inst. Tech., Baleh Grad. School Geol. Sci. Contrib. no. 361, 5 pp. September 1943. MYCOLOGY —A southern Basidiobolus forming many sporangia from globose and from elongated adhesive conidia. CHARLES DREcHSLER, Plant Industry Station, Beltsville, Md. During more than 30 years the Petri plate cultures that I prepared for the isolation of parasitic fungi from decaying roots and stems of various cultivated plants collected in the District of Columbia and in neighboring localities within Maryland and Virginia have now and then shown some limited development of smooth-walled zygo- spores which from their paired juxtaposed protuberances were recognizable as_ per- taining to a species of Basidiobolus. Since the zygospores, often badly contaminated with bacteria and miscellaneous molds, never germinated after their transfer to a fresh agar medium, and never were found accom- panied by conidia, my efforts to obtain the adventitious phycomycete in pure culture long remained unsuccessful. In recent years, however, unquestionably the same fungus has been isolated many times from numerous mycelia found developing in maize-meal agar plate cultures canopied with leaf mold taken from deciduous woods near Beltsville, Maryland, and Arlington, Vir- ginia. These cultures yielded, besides, an even larger number of separate isolations referable to a second species of Basidiobolus differing from the first in the strongly musty odor it emitted (Drechsler, 1953), in its much earlier production of globose conidia, in its readier conversion of globose as well as of elongated adhesive conidia into sporangia, and in the strongly undulating outer con- tour of the frequently two-layered wall surrounding its mature zygospore. Because of similarity to B. ranarum Eidam (1886), especially in the character of its zygospore wall, the widely distributed second species— I have obtained it also from decaying plant detritus collected in New Hampshire, Pennsylvania, Delaware, North Carolina, and Louisiana—awaits comparison with congeneric isolations from the excrement or stomach contents of frogs and other am- phibians. The varied asexual reproduction displayed under ordinary cultural conditions by the species with zygospores of undulate profile takes place rather more abundantly in still another species of Baszdiobolus that came to light in several Petri plate cultures that had been canopied with small quantities of decaying plant detritus gathered in north- eastern Florida, on January 1, 1954. When iad growing on maize-meal agar this third species does not give off the musty odor emitted by many species of Streptomyces. As its zygospores are typically smooth it would seem Clearly distinct from B. ranarwm. For the same reason it would appear separate also from B. myxophilus R. E. Fries (1899) the zygospores of which were described as being provided with “‘episporio undulato”’; and this separateness would hold true whether the doubts expressed by Levisohn (1927), and later by Fries (1929) himself, concerning the independence of B. myz- ophilus were justified or not. Its smooth zygospores presumably distinguishes the Florida phycomycete lkewise from B. intestinalis (Léger and Hesse), for the statement by Léger (1927) that the ‘‘oeuf sphérique” of the fungus inhabiting the trout imtestine becomes surrounded by a wall composed of ‘‘écailles concentriques”’ must almost certainly imply the presence of numerous convex contour markings similar to the wavy peripheral markings shown in Eidam’s (1886, pl. 12, fig. 7-9, 12-14) and Thaxter’s (1888, pl. X XI, fig. 413) illustra- tions of the mature undulate zygospores of B. ranarum. Although Levisohn found the Basidiobolus developing from the excrement of lizards to agree with the single species infesting the digestive tracts of frogs, toads, salamanders, and blindworms, and _ there- fore held B. lacertae Eidam to be identical with B. ranarum, it yet seems expedient to note here that very short and consistently unseptate protuberances such as Hidam set forth as being characteristic of conjugating segments in B. lacertae are not usually observable in the Florida fungus. In view of the readiness with which its conidia are converted into sporangia this fungus may appropriately be described under an epithet compounded of two words pepioros, oropa meaning “‘divided” and ‘‘seed,”’ respectively. Basidiobolus meristosporus, sp. nov. My- celium mediocriter conspicuum, saepe in aerem visibiliter crescens, incoloratum; hyphis sterilibus ramosis, plerumque 3-20 crassis, mox septatis, hic illic disjunctis, cellulis eorum plerumque 30- 230u longis, uno nucleo visibili praeditis. Primi- formibus fertilibus hyphis singulatim ex cellulis myceli vel ex conidiis vel ex zygosporis surgenti- bus, incoloratis, simplicibus, basi 4-9 latis, in 50 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 45, No. 2 aerem vulgo 60—200u ad lucem protendentibus, sursum in tumorem jaculatorium 35-60u longum et 15-30u latum inflatis, apice unum primiforme conidium ferentibus, denique hoe violenter ab- jicientibus; primiformibus conidiis globosis sed basi ad instar mammiculae leviter prominulis, plerumque 20—45y in diametro, nune uno nucleo nune duobus nucleis praeditis, interdum in sporangium transeuntibus denique 5-90 sporas intus gignantibus. Hyphis formae gracilis fertili- bus ex primiformibus vel tenacibus conidiis nec umquam ex cellulis mycelii surgentibus, incolora- tis, rectis, saepius 75—200u longis, basi 1 .5-3 .5u latis, sursum leniter attenuatis, apice 1—2y latis, ibi unum conidium tenax ferentibus. Tenacibus conidiis omnino 20-70u longis, 6-20 latis, ex infera viventi cellula et supero glutinoso rostro constantibus; glutinoso rostro flavido, tubulato, 3-10.54 longo, sursum 1—2.7y lato, apice vulgo guttula materiae glutinosae flavae 3-10u crassa vestito; viventi cellula imeolorata, elongato- ellipsoidea, recta vel leviter curvata, pleurumque 17-55u longa, uno nucleo vel duobus nucleis in- structa, interdum in sporangium transeunte denique 1-50 sporas intus gignantibus. Sporis incoloratis, globosis vel elongato-ellipsoideis vel rotundo angulatis, plerumque 7—15y longis, 6— 12, latis, uno nucleo praeditis. Zygosporis ex con- jugio duabus cellularum contiguarum in hyphis mycelii etiam in conidiis ortis, globosis vel elongato-ellipsoideis, plerumque 23-35, longis, 20-32, latis, in maturitate uno nucleo instructis, muro levi saepe aliquid flavido 2-8 crasso cir- cumdatis. Habitat in materiis plantarum putrescentibus prope Palatka, Florida. Mycelium usually readily visible, growing noticeably into the air, colorless; assimilative hyphae branched, mostly 3 to 20u wide, early be- coming divided by cross-walls; hyphal segments mostly 30 to 230u long, in many instances soon becoming separated from their neighbors, in the living state showing a single nucleus. Primary conidiophores arising singly from hyphal seg- ments or from conidia or from germinating zygospores, colorless, unbranched, proximally 4 to 9 wide, commonly extending to 60 to 200z into the air and toward the main source of light, inflated distally into a propulsive swelling 35 to 60un long and 15 to 30u wide, bearing at the tip a single primary conidium and forcibly shoot- ing it off; primary conidia globose, but with a wide mammiform protrusion at the base, mostly 20 to 45u in diameter, colorless, containing 1 or FEBRUARY 1955 DRECHSLER: 2 discernible nuclei, rather often functioning as sporangia in forming 5 to 90 spores internally. Conidiophores of slender type arising singly either from primary or from adhesive conidia but never originating from hyphal segments, color- less, straight, mostly 75 to 200z long, 1.5 to 3.5; wide at the base, tapering gradually upward, 1 to 2u wide near the tip on which a single adhesive eonidium is borne in axial alignment. Adhesive conidia mostly 20 to 70x in total length and 6 to 20u in greatest width, composed of a living cell and an apical adhesive beak; the adhesive beak yellowish, tubular, 3 to 10.5 long, 1 to 2.7u wide above its broad attachment, at the tip com- monly surrounded by a globose mass of golden yellow glutinous material 3 to 10u in diameter; living cell colorless, elongated-ellipsoidal, straight or slightly curved, mostly 17 to 55y long, con- taining 1 or 2 clearly visible nuclei, often func- tioning as sporangia in forming 1 to 50 spores internally. Spores colorless, globose or elongate- ellipsoidal or somewhat angular, mostly 7 to 15u long and 6 to 12u wide. Zygospores originating from union of 2 contiguous cells in mycelial hyphae or in conidia, mostly globose or elongate- ellipsoidal, often 23 to 35y long and 20 to 32u wide, in mature resting state apparently contain- ing a single nucleus and surrounded by a smooth, slightly yellowish wall 2 to 3u thick. Occurring in decaying plant materials near Palatka, Florida. In the readily visible character of its mycelium and in its tendency toward aerial development Basidiobolus meristospsrus differs markedly from the two congeneric forms ubiquitous on leaf mold near the District of Columbia, both of which are often virtually indiscernible on maize-meal agar, and are little given to production of aerial hyphae on this substratum despite their robust sub- merged growth. Yet under the microscope a young mycelium of B. meristosporus looks much like young mycelia of the two congeneric species with respect to branching habit, cellular dimen- sions, and protoplasmic texture. Where vegeta- tive growth takes place in an ample expanse of unoccupied agar substratum the terminal seg- ments (Fig. 1, A) at the advancing forefront are commonly 8 to 10 wide. Fluctuations between 9 and 13 are usual in the penultimate and ante- penultimate segments, and prevail rather gener- ally also among the older segments to the rear. However, the short proximal segments near the empty envelope of the conidium from which a sizable mycelium has originated often measure SPORANGIA FROM CONIDIA 51 15 to 20u in width. In tube cultures 10 to 15 days old elongated ellipsoidal segments 50 to 125 long and 25 to 30u wide can sometimes be found in large numbers 4 or 5 millimeters below the sur- face, but as these massive cells are often wholly disconnected or have only meager contact with any neighbor they give somewhat the appearance of resting bodies. Filaments conspicuously nar- rower than the axial hyphae at the margin of an expanding mycelium may originate as lateral branches given off by axial segments in positions well back from the advancing forefront, or as germ hyphae extended from conidia that have happened to fall on substratum already occupied by mycelium. Many such filaments measuring only 3 or 4y in width are commonly present in cultures several weeks old. The individual hyphal segment, irrespective of width, contains a single nucleus which with the relatively large endosome is, as a rule, clearly visible in an unstained living condition. Many hyphal segments in an actively growing mycelium of Basidiobolus meristosporus expend their protoplasmic contents in asexual or in sexual reproduction within a few hours after their for- mation. In initiating asexual reproduction the individual segment puts forth a stout branch (Fig. 1, B, a; C, a) usually from a median posi- tion. If the segment is on the surface of the sub- stratum this branch sometimes ascends at once into the air, directing its growth toward the main source of light. After ascending about 100, (Fig. 1, D, a), or sometimes no more than 25u (Fig. 1, E, a), the branch, or conidiophore, may widen out terminally to form the propulsive enlarge- ment (Fig. 1 D, b; E, b) characteristic of the genus. When the enlargement has received much of the protoplasm originally contained in the underlying segment it gives rise at its tip to a single globose conidium (Fig. 1, E, c). Rather commonly the branch extended from the hyphal segment is considerably longer than 25 or 100xz, for in the many instances where it originates under the substratum it must first make its way to the surface before it can grow into the air. Besides, on reaching the surface the conidio- phorous branch in B. meristosporus often elon- gates procumbently before its tip ascends to form the propulsive enlargement and the conidium (Fig. 1, F, a). A growing branch several hundred microns in length contains in its forward portion all the protoplasm of the whole reproductive unit. Successive stages in the forward movement of the granular material and single nucleus may be 52 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON marked by deposition of retaining septa in the rear. When finally all the protoplasm has been received into the terminal conidium the empty wall of the hyphal segment and an extensive proximal portion of the empty membrane of the conidiophorous branch may have collapsed badly or have otherwise become unrecognizable. If a conidiophore bearing a globose conidium nearly ready for discharge (Fig. 1, F, a) is mounted in a moist preparation under a cover glass normal discharge does not take place, but the terminal enlargement slowly undergoes some changes that presumably are similar to those oc- curring when it serves as a propulsive mechanism. An irregular fissure appears in the lower portion of the enlargement (Fig. 1, F, b), where in nor- mal discharge the membranous envelope is torn apart. Through contraction of the membrane in a zone a little above the equator of the enlargement the main portion of membrane normally shot off with the conidium acquires the curious tower-and- cupola outline first made known in Eidam’s ac- count of Basidiobolus ranarum. The proximal portion of membrane represented in the tower- like profile sometimes is markedly thinner than the distal portion making up the cupola-like com- ponent (Fig. 1, F, b) and may then be expected to vanish from sight relatively early. Although in many instances the empty membranous piece remains attached to the conidium (Fig. 1, G) it more often becomes disengaged in flight and reaches the substratum separately. If its lower ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 45, NO. 2 portion has evanesced it presents a conical shape (Fig. 1, H, a-e) rather than the more familiar tower-and-cupola conformation (Fig. 1, H, fm). The globose conidia found scattered abun- dantly on maize-meal agar cultures 3 or 4 days old are mostly about 30u in diameter, and in un- stained living material usually show, even if somewhat indistinctly, a single nucleus near the center (Fig. 1, I, a-d; Fig. 2, A-C), yet here and there an individual conidium (Fig. 2, D) may reveal 2 nuclei. On fresh unoccunied agar globose conidia commonly germinate by extending indi- vidually a broad germ hypha (Fig. 1, J, a, b) from which a new mycelium may originate. A relatively narrow germ hypha (Fig. 1, K), as has been men- tioned, may be put forth from a globose conidium that has fallen on a tract of agar substratum already permeated with mycelium of the fungus. Often a globose conidium gives rise to a germ conidiophore (Fig. 1, L, a; M, a) that ascends into the air and forms a propulsive enlargement (Fig. 1, L, b; M, b) on which another globose conidium (Fig. 1, L, ce; M, ¢) is produced. After the new conidium has been shot off similar repe- titional development may ensue again and again, each successive generation being accompanied by noticeable reduction in size. Many of the globose conidia formed in maize- meal agar cultures of Basidiobolus meristosporus become converted into sporangia (Fig. 2, E—H) through three-dimensional segmentation of their contents. In slanted tube cultures, where conidia Fie. 1.—Basidiobolus meristosporus as found developing in maize-meal agar; X 500 throughout. A, Terminal portion of hypha at margin of an actively growing mycelium. B, C, Submerged hyphal seg- ments from each of which a conidiophorous branch, a, is being extended upward. D, Portion of hypha at surface of culture showing an intercalary segment from which has been extended a short conidiophore, a, with a terminal propulsive swelling, b. E, Unusually wide hyphal segment at surface of culture that has become emptied in forming a unit of asexual reproductive apparatus: a, unusually short empty conidio- phore; b, propulsive swelling, c, globose conidium ready to be shot off. F, Globose conidium on propul- sive enlargement terminating a long condiophore sent up from a submerged hyphal segment: a, condition when newly mounted in a moist preparation under a cover glass; b, condition 20 minutes later. G, Dis= charged conidium with attached piece of envelope of propulsive swelling. H, Pieces of envelopes of propulsive swellings left detached on substratum: a-e, short conical pieces; f-m, longer pieces of tower- and-cupola design. I, Detached globose conidia, a-d. J, Two conidia, a-b, germinating on fresh un- occupied maize-meal agar. K, Conidium germinating on surface of agar already occupied by mycelium of fungus. L, M, Globose conidia that are giving rise to other globose conidia: a, germ conidiophore; b, propulsive terminal swelling; c, young secondary conidium. N, Detached globose conidium that in part has undergone conversion into a sporangium: a, condition observed in a moist, newly prepared mount; b, condition observed 30 minutes later, showing production of a germ hypha from the large residual cell not included in the sporangium. O-Q, Empty membranous envelopes of globose conidia from each of which has been sent up an erect slender conidiophore, a, that bears aloft an elongated adhesive conidium, b. R, Detached adhesive conidia, a-d.S, Adhesive conidium germinating on fresh unoccupied agar. T, Empty envelope of an adhesive conidium from which has been sent up an erect slender conidio- phore bearing aloft a secondary adhesive conidium. U, Detached adhesive conidia, a-c, each of which has been converted into a sporangium. V, Detached adhesive conidium in part converted into a spo- rangium: a, condition observed in a moist, newly prepared mount; b, condition 20 minutes later, showing production of a broad germ hypha from the residual cell not included in the sporangium. W, Adhesive sporangium that has released from its basal opening all except one of its spores. X, Spores after libera- tion from sporangium: a-l, individual spores; m-o, spores united in pairs; p, spores united in a group of three. Y, Unit of sexual reproductive apparatus at early stage of conjugation. Z, Mature zygospores, a-c. FEBRUARY 1955 DRECHSLER: are often propelled onto the glass ceiling in such large numbers that they make up a coating readily visible to the naked eye, a greater pro- portion of conidia are converted into sporangia on the ceiling than on the agar floor. Sporangial development thus takes place under ordinary conditions of culture and in a wholly spontaneous manner. As a rule the sporangial envelope re- mains intact for some time after the delimited spores have begun rounding up, but eventually C. Drechsler del. SPORANGIA FROM CONIDIA 53 it ruptures irregularly. The size of the parent conidium largely determines the number of spores that are produced but does not greatly affect their size. Globose conidia of unusually large dimensions (Fig. 2, H) may yield from 60 to 90 spores, those of average size commonly yield about 25 spores, and those of unusually small size may form only about 5 spores. Some conidia (Fig. 1, N, a) are converted into sporangia only in part, the residual portion in such instances 504 10 20,30 ,40 ce) ) Fia. 1.—(See opposite page for legend). 54 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON retaining its coarsely granular texture as well as its capacity to germinate promptly by emission of a broad germ tube (Fig. 1, N, b). In maize-meal agar cultures of Basidiobolus meristosporus numerous globose conidia (Fig. 1, O-Q) give rise individually to a tall slender co- nidiophore (Fig. 1, O-Q: a) bearing a solitary elongated conidium (Fig. 1, O-Q: b). This co- nidium is of the unusually distinctive secondary type described earlier (Drechsler, 1947) in an- other member of the genus. It is prolonged dis- tally into a yellowish beak that normally termi- nates in a globular mass of golden yellow adhesive substance, though sometimes under the dry con- ditions prevailing on the glass ceiling of a slanted tube culture no adhesive globule is secreted (Fig. 1, R, a). The elongated conidia are not forcibly shot off but become detached (Fig. 1, R, b-d; Fig. 2, I-M) on slight disturbance. In a living unstained condition they show one (Fig. 1, R, a-d; Fig. 2, I-L) or two (Fig. 2, M) nuclei. Like the primary conidia they often put forth a broad germ tube (Fig. 1, 8) capable of growing either into an extensive assimilative mycelium or into a phototropic conidiophore that even- tually shoots off a globose conidum. In aging cultures, and more especially in the presence of alien molds, they are much given to repetitional development, each sending up a slender conidio- phore (Fig. 1, T, a) on which a new adhesive conidium is borne. They readily become con- verted into sporangia (Fig. 1, U, a-c; Fig. 2, N-R) through segmentation of their contents. Like sporangia generally they produce spores in numbers approximately proportional to their size. Tn the few instances where an adhesive conidium is only partially converted into a sporangium (Fig. 1, V, a) the unconverted residual portion retains its capacity for promptly putting forth a broad germ hypha (Fig. 1, V, b). Many adhesive sporangia in the later stage of their development show one or two transverse markings (Fig. 1, U, b, c; Fig. 2, O) in the portion of envelope sur- rounding the basal spore. These markings apparently indicate definite modifications for dehiscense, since elongated sporangial envelopes ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 45, No. 2 are often found that are wide open at the basal end (Fig. 1, W) and are either wholly empty or occupied by only 1 or 2 spores. The spores (Fig. 1, X, a-p; Fig. 2, 8, a-e) formed in the two types of sporangia appear in- distinguishable. In unstained living condition they show clearly a single nucleus surrounded by very finely granular protoplasm wholly devoid of vacuoles. The individuals that have rounded up into a nearly spherical shape commonly measure about 10 in diameter. Owing to imperfect sepa- ration within some sporangia 2 spores (Fig. 1, X, m-o) or even 3 spores (Fig. 1, X, p; Fig. 2,8, e) are occasionally found united after they have been released. Sexual reproduction takes place early and abundantly in maize-meal agar cultures of Basidiobolus meristosporus. As in other members of the genus conjugation is initiated by the pro- duction of 2 juxtaposed protuberances from the adjoining ends of paired neighboring cells (Fig. 1, Y). The mature resting zygospore is sur- rounded by a thick smooth wall that usually ap- pears intimately united with the thin enveloping membrane of the parent gametangium (Fig. 1, Z, a-c; Fig. 2, T, U). However, in small areas of some cultures many zygospores were found rather loosely surrounded by the wall of the parent gametangium, so that the gametangium envelope was partially (Fig. 2, V) or wholly (Fig. 2, W) separated from the zygospore wall proper and presented an irregularly wavy profile. In these reproductive units the separation observed did not correspond accurately to that usual in repro- ductive units of the musty-smelling congeneric form abundant in our middle latitudes, for in the latter, as also in sexual apparatus of Conidiobolus osmcdes Drechsler (1954), extensive separation is found between the 2 layers making up the zygo- spore wall proper. Localized separation between an outer and an inner layer of the zygospore wall proper is sometimes noticeable in reproductive units of B. meristosporus, especially at the proxi- mal or the distal end (Fig. 1, Z, ec; Fig. 2, V), but the smoothness of the outer contour is never affected thereby. Fia. 2.—Basidiobolus meristosporus as found developing in maize-meal agar cultures; X 1000 through- out. A-C, Uninucleated globose conidia. D, Binucleated globose conidium. H-H, Sporangia formed from globose conidia. I-L, Uninucleated adhesive conidia, M, Binucleated adhesive conidum. N-R, Sporangia formed from adhesive conidia. 8, Spores after release from sporangia: a-d, individual spores; e, group of 3 united spores. T-W, Mature zygospores with adjacent portions of hyphal membranes. X, Ad hesive conidium divided into 2 cells preliminary to sexual development. Y, Adhesive conidium that has formed a zygospore in which 2 nuclei are visible. Z, Adhesive conidium that has formed a zygospore showing a single nucleus. NIDIA SPORANGIA FROM CO DRECHSLER Frepruary 1955 nt Sa st OL S$ O Fig. 2.—(See opposite page for legend). Zygospores are produced rather often in maize-meal agar tube cultures of Basidiobolus meristosporus through conjugation of segments resulting from median division of a globose or of an elongated conidium (Fig. 2, X). In instances where an elongated conidium serves as parent, reproductive units of bizarre design (Fig. 2, Y, Z) are brought into being. Except for their greater irregularity in outward shape and their somewhat smaller size the zygospores of conidial origin ap- pear similar to those of mycelial origin, some- times being filled with coarsely granular proto- plasm (Fig. 1, Z, a, b; Fig. 2, U, Y) and at other times containing granular protoplasm inter- spersed with many small reserve globules (Fig. 1, Z, c: Fig. 2, T; V, W, Z). A mature zygospore in its resting state appears to contain only a single nucleus, so that the presence of two nuclei (Fig. 2, Y) indicates either an early immature state or a late after-ripened state prior to germination. REFERENCES Drecusuier, C. A Basidiobolus producing elon- gated secondary conidia with adhesive beaks. Bull. Torrey Bot. Club 74: 403-413. 1947. 56 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 45, NO. 2 ———. Production by Basidiobolus spp of odor. familiar in Streptomyces spp. and in benzene hexachloride. (Abstract.) Phytopathology 43: 405. 1953. Two species of Conidiobolus with minutely ridged zygospores. Amer. Journ. Bot. 41: 567- 575. 1954. Erpam, E. Basidiobolus, eine newe Gattung der Entomophthoraceen. Beitrage Biol. Pflanzen 4: 181-251. 1886. Fries, R. E. Basidiobolus myxophilus, en ny phycomycet. Bih. Svenska Vet.-Akad. Handl. 25: Afd. III, no. 3: 1-15. 1899. Vad dr Basidiobolus myxophilus? Svensk. Bot. Tidskr. 23: 149-150. 1929. Liécer, L. Sur la nature et Ulévolution des ““sphérules”’ décrite chez les Ichthyophones, phycomycetes parasites de la truite. Comptes Rendus Acad. Sci. (Paris) 184: 1268-1271. 1927. LevisoHn, Ina. Beitrag Entwickelungsge- schichte und Biologie von Basidiobolus rana- rum Eidam. Jahrb. Wis. Bot. 66: 513-555. 1927. Tuaxter, R. The Entomophthoreae of the United States. Mem. Boston Soc. Nat. Hist. 4: 133- 201. 1888. zur ZOOLOGY .—The genus Ogyrides (Crustacea: Caridea) in North Carolina. AusTIN B. WruutaMs, University of North Carolina Institute of Fisheries Research, Morehead City, N. C. (Communicated by Fenner A. Chace, Jr.) In 1879 J. 8. Kingsley described a small caridean shrimp, Ogyris alphaerostris, from the eastern shore of Northampton County, Va. He based his description on a single specimen that was in poor condition. Hay and Shore (1918) redescribed the species on the basis of another specimen, which was collected near Beaufort, N. C. They placed this aberrant genus in a family of its own, setting aside previous assignments to the families Hippolytidae and Alphaeidae apparently unaware of a change in the generic nomenclature. The genus Ogyris was proposed by Stimpson (1860) on the basis of an oriental species, but Stebbing (1914) found this name to be preoccupied and proposed the name Ogyrides to supplant it. The family status of the group remains undecided. Two species of Ogyrides have been found in North Carolina in the past three years. One of these is apparently O. alphaerostris (Kingsley). The second is different from any known species of Ogyrides and is described herein as a new species. Un- fortunately, the status of the new species depends upon a clear definition of Kingsley’s species, and circumstances make such a definition difficult.” Neither Kingsley’s description nor the accompanying figure exactly agrees with either of the species considered here. Kingsley did not mention any spines on the dorsal surface of the carapace, whereas both of the species treated here possess sucht spines. His figure shows the blade of the antennal scale extended as a small distal lobe instead of tapering toward the terminal spine as in both of the North Carolina species. This figure does not exactly fit the short description, and moreover, the type (an ovigerous female formerly housed at Union College, Schenectady, N. Y., and now at the U.S. National Museum) almost 1 For many suggestions and for the historical information I am indebted to Dr. Fenner A. Chace, Jr., and Dr. L. B. Holthuis. W. A. Van Engel gave information on the type locality of O. alphaerostris. FEBRUARY 1955 WILLIAMS: GENUS certainly belongs to the same species as the one described below. This ‘type’? specimen has a dubious history. It was probably identified by Kingsley as O. alphaerostris, and he stated that there was but one specimen in the collection. The specimen was sent to Coutiére in Paris when he was working on alphaeids. The locality label is in another handwriting and may have been written on the assumption that it was the type specimen. A slip in the vial bears the number 417; Kingsley gave the catalogue number of the type of O. alphaerostris as 407. The circumstantial evidence is strong that this specimen is the type, but Kingsley’s statement that this species differs from the genotype QO. orientalis (Stimpson) in lacking a carina on the carapace leads to doubt as to the validity of this specimen as the type. Hay and Shore did not have access to the type of OQ. alphaerostris when they made their redescription, for at that time it was in the hands of Coutiére. Their description and figures clearly show a single movable spine on the dorsal surface of the carapace. This and other characters described by them are shown by 35 specimens of Ogyrides, mostly juveniles, now available for study from the vicinity of Beaufort, N. C. From these facts two conclusions may be drawn. First, there are two species of Ogyrides on the east coast of the United States. One was described and inadequately figured by Kingsley; the type was lost and a new type was designated. Unfortunately, the new type belonged to an unrecognized and undescribed second species. Second, there are three species of Ogyrides on the east coast of the United States: (a) One was described and figured by Kingsley, and subsequently the type was lost. The species has not been rediscovered. (b) A new type was designated for Kingsley’s species by accident, but unfortunately the specimen chosen belonged to an unrecognized and undescribed second species. (c) Hay and Shore referred their redescription to Kings- ley’s name alphaerostris, but in reality they were describing a third form which is fairly common in the Beaufort, N. C., area. The matter will not be settled until topotypes of Kingsley’s species are collected OGYRIDES IN NORTH CAROLINA 57 and studied. For the present it seems per- missible to refer Kingsley’s and Hay and Shore’s species to the name alphaerostris on the basis of circumstantial evidence. O. alphaerostris in the Beaufort region attains a slightly larger size than the species described below, and this larger size agrees with the total length measurement given by Kingsley. The original description of the carapace more nearly fits that of Hay and Shore’s species than it does the form herein de- seribed. O. alphaerostris in the Beaufort region has invariably been taken near Beaufort Inlet in water with a high salinity (above 25%). The type locality for the species seems to be somewhat like the Beaufort Inlet region in this respect. Fig. 1 Description Rostrum short, depressed, equi- laterally triangular; postrostral carina with 11 teeth, flanked on each side by row of setae ex- tending to rostrum tip; eyestalks long, hghtly setiferous dorsally and mesiodorsally, narrowest in middle, exceeding antennular peduncles by approximately 214 times corneal length; antennal Ogyrides limicola, n. sp. Fie. 1.—Ogyrides limicola: (a) Carapace and anterior appendages, lateral view; (b) terminal segment appendages, dorsal view; (c) anterior appendages and portion of carapace, dorsal view. Approximate magnification X11. 58 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES and antennular peduncles nearly equal in length, second antennular segment three times as long as third segment; stylocerites terminating in two strong acuminate spines of nearly equal length; antennal scales and second segment of antennular peduncles reaching nearly same level distally, scales evenly rounded mesially, three times longer than greatest width, greatest width in basal half; third maxillipeds when extended exceeding eyestalks; pterygostomian area broadly obtuse; first legs exceeding midlength of antennal peduncles by full length of chelae; fingers of chelae pointed, agape when closed; telson with anterior pair of spines placed well behind lateral prominences; uropods with exopods slightly falciform, lateral borders nearly straight; telson with three horny ridges at proximolateral corners ventrally and uropods with an interlocking horny eminence on basal segment dorsally. Types.—The holotype (an ovigerous female, U.S.N.M. no. 96675) and a series of 14 paratypes, as well as 11 other specimens, have been de- posited in the U. 8S. National Museum. A second series of nine paratypes has been placed in the Museum of Comparative Zoology at Harvard University. The carapace length of the holotype is 514 mm, and the total length from tip of rostrum to tip of telson is 16 mm. Type locality Mouth of Far Creek at Engel- hard, Hyde County, N. C. The creek at this locality is a shallow mud-bottomed estuarine stream which is not subject to periodic tides. The depth varies from 1 to 8 feet. The holotype was taken from the channel near the white light beacon. Variations —The chief individual differences observed in this species are the variable number of spines on the postrostral crest (11 in the illustrated specimen, 8-14 in other specimens), and variations in the lengths of the stylocerite spines. Color of females (from females at type locality, May 17, 1954).—General body structure color- less, clear, internal organs visible, gut dark, hepatopancreas light brown. Eyestalks, antennal and antennular peduncles, and distal portions of anterior appendages with red and yellow spots. Uropods and sixth segment of abdomen with scattered red spots. Ovigerous females with yellow-green (chartreuse) colored eggs on swim- merets. One small female, apparently not com- pletely spawned out, with chartreuse colored ova inside ovary; these ova smaller than external eggs. VOL. 45, NO. 2 Relationships.—This species seems to be most closely related to Ogyrides yaquiensis Armstrong (1949), differmg from it chiefly in having shorter eyestalks and antennal peduncles. Specimens examined.—Thirty-five as follows: NortH Carourna: Carteret County: Newport River Narrows approximately 4 miles northwest of Morehead City; White Oak River, near mouth; Adams Creek near mouths of Jonaquin and Cedar Creeks; Hyde County: Far Creek at Engelhard; west side of upper Wysocking Bay; Onslow County: Hall Creek, tributary of Queen Creek. A few specimens were not properly labeled when collected. They are known to come from some of the Carteret County estuaries listed above and from South River, Carteret County, N.C. Remarks.—Ogyrides limicola has invariably been found on (or in) the bottom of muddy estuarine streams. The specimens were collected with a small beam trawl equipped with a bag and codend made of 14-inch bar mesh. A tickler chain was used to stir the bottom ahead of the net. The shrimp collected could have come from the surface of the mud or from shallow burrows in the surface layer of mud. The length of the eyestalks indicates that the animals may live in shallow burrows with only the tips of the eyestalks projecting above the surface. The paucity of specimens taken in over 600 collec- tions from estuaries further indicates that the form is a burrower and may have a light popula- tion density. The Hyde County localities show the greatest population densities. , The collections of O. limicola have been made in a bottom salinity range of 9-31%>. Samples were taken throughout the year at most of the localities listed, but O. limicola has been col- lected only in February and from April to September. Ovigerous females are known to occur from May to September. The chief crustacean associates found with O. limicola are juveniles of Penaeus setiferus, P. duorarum, P. aztecus, and Callinectes sapidus. LITERATURE CITED ARMSTRONG, JOHN C. New Caridea from the Domini- can Republic. Amer. Mus. Nov. no. 1410: 1-27, 9 figs. 1949. Hay, W. P., and SHorg, C. A. The decapod crusta- ceans of Beaufort, N. C., and the surrounding region. Bull. U. S. Bur. Fish. 35 (1915-16): 371-475, 20 figs., pls. 25-39. 1918. Fespruary 1955 Kinestey, J. 8. On a collection of Crustacea from Virginia, North Carolina, and Florida, with a revision of the genera of Crangonidae and Palaemonidae. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sei. Phila- delphia 31: 383-427, 1 pl. 1879. SressineG, THomas R.R. Part VII of South African SHOEMAKER: NOTES ON AMPHIPOD CRUSTACEAN 59 Crustacea, for the marine investigations in South Africa. 15 (1914-16): 1-55, 8 pls. 1914. Strueson, W. Prodromus descriptionis animalium evertebratorum ... observavit et descripsit. Pars VIIT. Crustacea macrura. Proce. Acad. Sci. Philadelphia 12: 22-47. 1860. ZOOLOGY .— Notes on the amphipod crustacean Maeroides thompsoni Walker. CLARENCE R. SHOEMAKER, Smithsonian Institution. A. O. Walker in 1898 described a species of amphipod, Maerozdes thompsoni, from two males, not fully mature, from Puget Sound, Wash., creating the genus to re- ceive it. It is now known that the male of this species exhibits marked changes in some of its characters as growth advances toward full maturity. For this reason Walker’s species appears to have been over- looked, and its immature stages have been at times described as distinct species. It is a widely distributed species and has been recorded from Puget Sound down to the Gulf of California. T. R. R. Stebbing in 1899 transferred Walker’s species to the genus Gammaropsis. In 1904 S. J. Holmes described it as a new species, Gammaropsis tenuicornis, from Puget Sound. T. R. R. Stebbing in 1906, in Das Tierreich, placed Walker’s species in the genus Eurystheus. In 1913 Vinnie R. Stout described it from Laguna Beach, Calif., as Fimbriella robusta, making the new genus for it. C. R. Shoemaker in 1916 described it as a new species, Podoceropsis concava, from Venice, Calif. In 1931 Shoemaker re- described and figured the fully mature male of Eurystheus tenuicornis (Holmes), giving its geographical range, and making Podo- ceropsis concava a synonym of it. A. L. Alderman, in 1936, recorded Hurystheus tenuicornis (Holmes) from Moss Beach, San Mateo County, Calif. In 1942 Shoe- maker recorded EHurystheus tenuicornis (Holmes) from Magdalena Bay, Lower California. It now appears that Gammaropsis tenui- cornis Holmes, 1904, Fimbriella robusta Stout, 1913, and Podoceropsis concava Shoe- maker, 1916, are synonyms of the earliest species, Hurystheus thompsoni (Walker), 1898. LITERATURE CITED Waker, A. O. Crustacea collected by W. A. Herdman, F.R.S., in Puget Sound, Pacific coast of North America, September 1897. Proc. and Trans. Liverpool Biol. Soc. 12 (session 1897-98) : 268-287, pls. 15, 16. 1898. STEBBING, T. R. R. Revision of Amphipoda. Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist. (7): 3: 350. 1899. Das Tierreich. Amphipoda: I, Gamma- ridea: 612. 1906. Hormes, 8. J. Amphipod crustaceans of the Expedition. Harriman Alaska Expedition 10: 233-246, figs. 118-128. 1904. Strout, V. R. Studies in Laguna Amphipoda. Zool. Jahrb. 34: 633-659. 1913. SHOEMAKER, C. R. Descriptions of three new species of amphipods from southern California. Proc. Biol. Soc. Washington 29: 157-160. 1916. . A new species of amphipod crustacean (Acanthonotozomatidae) from California, and notes on Eurystheus tenuicornis. Proc. U.S. Nat. Mus.: 78 (art. 18): 1-8, figs. 1-4. 1931. Amphipod crustaceans collected on the Presidential Cruise of 1938. Smithsonian Mise. Coll. 101 (11): 1-52, figs. 1-17. 1942. ALDERMAN, A. L. Some new and little known amphipods of California. Univ. California. Publ. Zool. 41 (7): 53-74, 51 figs. 1936. ORNITHOLOGY —Description of a new chipping sparrow from Canada. Harry C. OBERHOLSER, Cleveland, Ohio. Several years ago, in the course of a survey of the races of Spizella passerina to determine those that occur in Texas, a new Canadian form seemed worthy of recognition. This is now put into print, particularly at the request of a prominent ornithologist of Canada. Spizella passerina boreophila, n. subsp. CANADIAN CHIPPING SPARROW Subspecific characters—Similar to Spizella passerina passerina, but larger, and ground color of upper surface, except pileum, paler, more erayish, near drab. Like Spizella passerina 60 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES arizonae, but darker above, particularly the pileum; sides of head and the hind neck more clearly gray (less brownish) and somewhat darker; postocular streak wider. Measurements in millimeters —Adult Wing, 70.0-74.0 (average, 72.0); tail, 59.5- 65.0 (62.3); exposed culmen, 9.0-10.0 (9.3); tarsus, 17.0-18.0 (17.3); middle toe without claw, 11.5-13.0 (12.3). Adult female: Wing, 65.0-69.5 (67.8); tail, 57.0-61.0 (58.8); ex- posed culmen, 9.0-10.0 (9.5); tarsus, 16.0— 17.5 (16.8); middle toe without claw, 11.5-12.8 (i2%3)2 Type.—Adult male, U. 8. National Museum no. 194942, Biological foo collection; Fort Simpson, Mackenzie, Canada; May 23, 1904; Edward A. Preble, original number, 1761. Geographical distribution Breeds north to northeastern Manitoba, northern Saskatchewan, northeastern Alberta, central southern and central western Mackenzie, central western Yukon, and east-central Alaska; west to east central Alaska, western British Columbia, south- western Montana, western Wyoming, southern Idaho, and northern Utah; south to northern Utah, northern Colorado, and western Nebraska; and east to middle Nebraska, middle South male: Dakota, middle North Dakota, west central Ontario, and northeastern Manitoba. Winters north to north central Texas, northern Sonora, and southern California; and south to Michoa- cin, State of Mexico, and Puebla. Accidental in central northern Alaska (Point Barrow). Remarks.—As evidenced by the range given above, this race occupies a wide area in Canada and sufficiently different from both Spizella passerina passerina and Sprzella pas- serina arizonae to make its subspecific separation desirable. The original description of the Eastern Chipping Sparrow, Fringilla passerina Bech- stein,? was based on the bird from Canada. Since seems ‘ In comparison, average measurements of male Spizella passerina passerina are: wing, 69.3; tail, 56.6; exposed culmen, 9.1; tarsus 16.3; middle toe without claw, 11.7. 2 Fringilla passerina Bechstein (Borkhausen VOL. 45, No. 2 at that time most of the Canadian specimens that found their way to Europe came from the vicinity of Quebec, it is now, therefore, thought proper, as is herewith done, to designate the city of Quebec in the province of Quebec, Canada, as the type locality of Fringilla passerina Bechstein. Birds from this area have been examined and found to be identical with birds from the eastern United States, so that the eastern chipping sparrow is properly entitled to the name Spizella passerina passerina (Bechstein) 2 The Fringilla socialis of Alexander Wilson? was described without locality, but the specimen that Wilson examined was ‘‘Peale’s Museum No. 6571.” Therefore it is reasonable to suppose that Philadelphia, Pennsylvania, was the place at which this specimen was obtained. By fixing the type locality of Fringilla socialis Wilson as Philadelphia, Pa., which is now here done, in accordance also with the characters shown by Wilson’s plate in the work above cited, the name becomes of course a synonym of Spizella passerina passerina (Bechstein). Therefore neither of these two is applicable to the bird from middle Canada, now described; nor is this northern race the same as Spizella passerina stridula Grinnell* from California, from which it differs in its longer wing and tail, and somewhat lighter upper parts. From Spizella passerina atremaea Moore’, of northern Mexico, it is readily distinguished by its lighter, less heavily steaked upper parts and lighter lower surface. Breeding birds of this species from southern Idaho and northern Utah belong to the present race, although they are somewhat intermediate between it and Spvzella passerina arizonae. MS.), in Latham’s Algem. Uebers. Végel 6 ay pt. 2): 544, pl. 120, fig 1. 1798 (‘‘Canada’’). 3 American ornithology 2: 127, pl. 16, fig. 5. 1810 [preface, Jan. 1]. 4 Condor 29(1):81. Jan. 15, 1927. 5 Spizella passerina ,atremaeus Moore, Proc. Biol. Soc. Washington 50: 203. Nov. 26, 1937. (‘‘Los Frailes, Chihuahua, Mexico, near Durango- Chihuahua state line, ten miles east of Sinaloa state line, Mexico’’). Frepruary 1955 FITCH: NEW SCORPAENID FISH 61 ICHTHYOLOGY .—Pontinus clemensi, a new scorpaenid fish from the tropical eastern Pacific. JoHN E. Frrcn,! California Department of Fish and Game. (Communicated by Leonard P. Schultz.) The single specimen upon which this description is based was one of several fish species taken with hook and line in 300 feet of water by H. B. Clemens, May 3, 1954, lat. 02° 25’ N., long. 79° 00’ W. Clemens, a guest aboard the tuna clipper Mayflower, was biologist in charge on an official tuna tagging trip for the California Department of Fish and Game. This new scorpaenid is referable to the genus Pontinus, which is predominantly deep-sea and tropical. Five species of the genus have previously been described from the eastern Pacific: Pontinus sierra (Gilbert, 1890), from specimens taken in 71 to 112 fathoms by the Albatross in the Gulf of California; P. furcirhinus Garman, 1899, from numerous specimens taken in 66 to 210 fathoms by the Albatross off Panama, and near Cocos and Malpelo Islands; P. dubius Steindachner, 1902, from a specimen taken at Paita, Peru; P. strigatus Heller and Snodgrass, 1903, from a single individual found in the stomach of a shark taken near Wenman Island, Galapagos; and finally P. vaughani Barnhart and Hubbs, 1946, from an adult caught off Cedros Island, Baja California, in relatively shallow water. Diagnosis—Pontinus differs from other genera in the family Scorpaenidae in having all pectoral rays simple. The eighth ray of the left pectoral of the present specimen is branched for most of its length. This throws doubt upon the value of using ‘‘absence of branched pectoral rays” as a character for distinguishing Pontinus from Helicolenus, Hozukius, and Neomerinthe, closely related genera having few to several upper pectoral rays branched. Large series of Pontinus would have to be examined before one could 1The author is especially grateful to Jack Schott, California Department of Fish and Game, for taking the excellent photograph of the holo- type; to Dr. Carl L. Hubbs, Scripps Institution of Oceanography, La Jolla, Calif., for his encourage- ment and helpful suggestions during preparation of the manuscript and to Arthur O. Flechsig, Scripps Institution of Oceanography, for the time and effort he spent looking for the type of P. vaughani. properly evaluate the taxonomic significance of this occurrence. The greatly produced second and third dorsal spines, which are largely free from their mem- branes, distinguish Pontinus clemenst from all species within the genus except P. vaughant. The large eye (contained 4.5 times in head), the large head (contained 2.1 times in standard length), the more numerous pored scales on lateral line (33 as compared to 28), and the generally red coloration, numerous dark spots over the entire head, body and fins, and numerous other charac- ters (Table 1) readily distinguish clemensi from vaughani. Description.—The holotype, a well-preserved specimen 282 mm in standard length, has been deposited in the collections of the United States National Museum, Washington, D. C. (no. 163597). Because of the greatly produced second and third dorsal spines, which suggest a close affinity to P. vaughani, a direct comparison of the two species would have been desirable; however, a search through the Barnhart collection at Scripps Institution of Oceanography as well as a careful check of other preserved material at that institu- tion failed to produce the holotype (and only known specimen) of vaughant. As a result, for ease in comparing clemensi to vaughani, the en- suing description purposely closely parallels that of Barnhart and Hubbs (1946) for P. vaughani. Head relatively large (468)? contained 2.1 times in standard length; length of orbit (104) enters head 4.5 times; greatest diameter across cornea (83) contained in head 5.7 times; length of snout (154) measures 3.0 times in head; least bony interorbital (66) measures 7.1 times; fleshy suborbital width (59) measures 8.1 times in head. When mouth is tightly closed tip of mandible fails to extend to a vertical from margin of upper lip by approximately one millimeter. The maxil- lary (247) extends to nearly vertically beneath 2 Corresponding figures in parenthesis through- out the description represent the proportional measurements expressed in thousandths of stand- ard length. Measurements, unless otherwise indi- cated, were taken according to the recommenda- tions of Hubbs and Lagler (1941). 62 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY posterior margin of cornea and in greatest width (63) is contained 7.4 times in head length. Spines of head are moderately strong and for the most part closely agree with the arrangement ascribed by Barnhart and Hubbs (1946) for P. vaughani. The strong, slightly convergent nasal spines are separated at their tips by a distance (33) equal to one-half bony interorbital width; tips of trifid left and simple right pre- orbital spines separated by a distance (70) only slightly less than separation (71) of blunt supra- orbital spines; right postorbital bifid as is left tympanic; left postorbital, right tympanic, and TABLE 1.—COMPARISON OF PONTINUS CLEMENSI WITH P. VAUGHANI Measurements and counts P. clemensi |\P. vaughani2 M®ASUREMENTS:! Standard length. ........ by pet roe 282 427 Motalélenethwerrna sees reer 1227 Head length.... Baer cer 468 417 Eye diameter (cornea)........... 83 61 INEM iia couksussosanvocsmends 104 81 Maxillary length................. 247 244 Least suborbital width. .......... 59 70 Bony interorbital width.......... 66 56 Snoutelensthyeer eens 154 136 Third dorsal spine (longest)... . 221 208 Second anal spine (longest)....... 152 126 Fourth dorsal ray (longest).. . . 156 169 Second anal ray (longest)...... 197 221 Eleventh pectoral ray (longest)... 248 246 Relyicilensthersee re cena ; 230 254 Snout to first dorsal insertion..... 431 Snout to second dorsal insertion. 741 Snout to anal insertion........... 738 Snout to pelvie insertion......... 429 Snout to pectoral insertion. . .. 426 Pectoral insertion to first dorsal IMsentionveree reer Bye sip bn oo} 241 Pelvic insertion to first dorsal in- sertion ; eee 355 Anal insertion to dorsal contour (perpendicular). ... Laan ehh eye 266 Least caudal peduncle depth... . 106 Greatest body width (shoulders). 202 168 Dorsal peduncle length......... 142 Anal peduncle length. . Oe ee 181 First gill raker below angle (length) 32 Counts: DOrsali het ers ae re Dy Met) XI, I, 9 Anal. SNabatuaae ust 5 Ill, 5 III, 5 Pectoral ti. ola ae Er ere eee 19 20 Pel Vai gs Aaa sige ee I, 5 1,5 Caudal (principal rays)........... 7+ 6 13 Lateral line scales (pored)........ 33 28 Oblique scale rows above and parallel to lateral line........... 50 39 Seales down and back from D1 in- sertion to lateral line. ......... 10 8 Gill rakers (functional)...........| 4+ 1+ 8 2+14+49 1 Standard length in millimeters, all others expressed in thousandths of standard length. 2 From Barnhart and Hubbs (1946). OF SCIENCES VOL. 45, NO. 2. both parietal and nuchal spines simple; tips of these spines separated by distances slightly greater than least bony interorbital (80, 73, 67, and 78, respectively); below and behind tympanic spine is a thick, prominent ridge somewhat less than one-fourth as long (23) as orbit but does not end in a spine; below this ridge, near edge of orbit, behind and slightly above middle of eye lies a cluster of tiny spines (5 on the left side, 4 on the right); these spines not connected with definite ridges, but they he in advance of and just below a strong horizontal ridge that ends in a spine and that lies just above upper end of preopercle; two spines lie on shoulder near upper edge of opercle and just anterior to lateral line; more anterior of these quite strong and in length (80) enters orbit 3.5 times; posterior spine scarcely noticeable; shoulder girdle above base of pectoral fin bears a very flat bony ridge directed more upward than backward and ends in a single flat spine, tip of which is a distance (63) above pectoral insertion nearly equal to least bony in- terorbital width; the rather strong suborbital keel bears four spines on right side and only three definite spines on the left; first of these, weak on right and obsolescent on left, lies slightly behind and on a vertical beneath hind margin of pos- terior nostril; between first and second spines the ridge arched upward; second spine, bifid on right side, lies almost directly beneath center of eye; third and strongest lies on a vertical below pos- terior margin of orbit; fourth, almost at margin of preopercle, slightly above and anterior to up- per preopercular spine; before origin of sub- orbital ridge on preorbital are two other, non- spinous ridges, divergent forward; three strong, triangular spines on preorbital margin project downward, central one slightly forward and other two slightly backward; uppermost of the five preopercular spines by far strongest, ridge of the right side bears a secondary spine at its base; broadly triangular third spine next strong- est; second, much nearer first than third (roughly one-third distance between the two), also rather strong; fifth spine, obsolescent on right and weak on left, partially embedded on both sides; two strong opercular spines lie at end of slightly divergent ridges. The teeth are in villiform bands on jaws, vomer and palatines; medially premaxulary band strongly arched; anteriorly, under cover of upper lip, it becomes moderately expanded; anterior process of premaxillary tooth band somewhat Fesruary 1955 FITCH: NEW extroverted yet lies posterior to and somewhat concealed by thick, upper lip; premanillary teeth lie outside those of mandible when mouth is closed; vomerine band very narrow posteriorly but broadens anteriorly just behind anterior semicircular section; palatine band, weakly arched inward, is narrow though slightly ex- panded toward posterior end and moderately dilated at mward-hooked anterior end. Six branchiostegals; pseudobranchiae short; gill rakers on outer arch number 8 + 1 + 14 = 23; of these, ten may be considered rudimentary or non-functional (4 on upper limb and 6 on lower); On right side first raker below angle bi- furcate and its length (32) measures 3.3 times in diameter of orbit. Body covered with finely ctenoid scales; on average about one-half of surface of each scale covered by small accessory scales, also strongly etenoid; oblique rows, rather irregular and diffi- eult to count, number 50 just above and parallel to lateral line; 10 scales in series running obliquely downward and backward between first dorsal insertion and lateral line; lateral line has 33 pores _ to caudal base; scales like those of body, but somewhat smaller, cover all opercles, postorbital region and cheeks; ctenoid accessory scales occur over these areas in abundance and somewhat similar minute ctenoid scales cover interorbital ‘ a ~~ SCORPAENID FISH 63 region and extend thence forward to near nasal spines; such scales also occur on suborbital and preorbital regions; before nasal spines, on the lips, and on anterior half of mandible are numerous somewhat scalelike villi and fimbriae; small to minute ctenoid scales cover most of maxillary except near edges; small scales roughen the upper surface of eyeball and edge of bran- chiostegal rays; minute ctenoid scales cover most of outer surfaces of nearly all fin rays, including dorsal spines and also pectoral rays except where 9 of 10 lower rays are thickened. Two forward directed, round pores open at tip of lower jaw, one on either side of symphyseal knob; following this five pairs of slitlke pores from anterior to posterior are located as follows: under tip of lower jaw; under margin of lower lip half-way between first and third pairs; on center of dentary at a distance equal to half length of maxillary; behind and on a level with lower edge of maxillary; and between fourth and fifth preopercular spines; of these pores, those on dentary are largest and most obvious. Dermal filaments consist primarily of a slender supraorbital cirrus somewhat flattened at its tip (length, 12), posterior border of anterior nostril produced into a flat, fimbriated flap, no cirri apparent on body. Dorsal rays number XI, I, 9; all soft rays i he Fic. 1.—Pontinus clemensi, n. sp., holotype (U.S.N.M. 163597), from 50 fathoms, 22 miles off the coast of Colombia (lat. 02° 25’ N., long. 79° 00’ W); 282 mm in standard length. 64 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES branched and in last one the two elements widely separated; anal rays III, 5 and all soft rays branched; principal caudal rays number 138, 11 branched and two unbranched rays extend nearly to tips of lobes; pelvic fin has one stiff spine and five branched rays; pectoral fin of 19 rays. Second and third dorsal spines greatly elon- gated, second almost completely exserted; mem- brane behind second spine deeply indented and on distal one-half reduced to a shght mem- braneous keel, terminating in a leathery flap that projects beyond bony point; behind third spine membrane curves gently for entire length to con- nect with fourth spine approximately two-thirds distance from base to tip; distally membrane of third spine terminates in a flap similar to that of second; lengths of dorsal spies in thousandths of standard length are respectively: 47, 207, 221, 128, 119, 111, 111, 106, 89, 67, 53, 99. Soft dorsal fin abruptly higher than last dorsal spines; fourth ray longest but its length (156) scarcely greater than that of either third or fifth. Second anal spine slightly longer than third and both somewhat more than twice as long as first, in thousandths of standard length these measure, respectively, 57, 152 and 131; first and second soft anal rays longest, essentially of equal length (197). Width of pectoral base (111) considerably less than half lengths (248) of tenth and eleventh (longest) rays; eighth ray on left side branched for much of its length, all others simple; all mem- branes incised to varying degrees, particularly between lowermost 10 pectoral rays; first nine of lowermost ten rays swollen distally. Length (230) of pelvic fin somewhat less than that of pectoral, contained 2.0 times in head length. Spinous dorsal, pectoral and pelvic fins in- serted almost equal distances from tip of snout (431, 429, and 426, respectively); similarly distances from tip of snout to anterior insertion of dorsal spine XII (second dorsal insertion) and insertion of first spine of anal almost equal (741 and 788). An examination of the otoliths (sagittae) indi- cates an age of eight years. When fresh the specimen was generally rose pink over most of head, back and sides, grading to silvery pink on belly; body and fins were pro- fusely spotted; most of spots were dark brown, VOL. 45, NO. 2 and sharply outlined with rust-orange rings; there were several yellow-orange blotches on and around head; most noticeable of these were on posterior part of maxillary; on cheek just pos- terior to maxillary, directly beneath eye; on nape, between dorsal insertion and a point above opercle, thence ventrally almost to a level with pectoral fin; lips were a bright orange with some yellow, membrane at hind border of eye was yellow, cirri on supraorbitals and anterior nostrils were a bright scarlet; dark brown blotches on interspinal membranes of dorsal bore overcolors of greenish yellow; otherwise, all fins had a pinkish-red cast; lining of buccal cavity was clear white; areas under opercles and around pseudo- branchiae were a dusty pink. It is an especial pleasure to be able to associate with this new and interesting scorpaenid the name of Harold B. Clemens, a biologist with the California Department of Fish and Game, whose untirmg collecting efforts have resulted in quantities of exceedingly fine specimens. LITERATURE CITED BarRNuHART, Percy 8., and Huspps, Cart L. Pon- tinus vaughani a new scorpaenid fish from Baja California. Bull. Scripps Inst. Oceanogr. 5 (5): 371-390, 1 fig. 1946. GARMAN, SAMUEL. feports of an exploration off the west coasts of Mexico, Central and South American, and off the Galapagos Islands, in charge of Alexander Agassiz, by the U. S. Fish Commission Steamer Albatross, during 1891, Lieut. Commander Z. L. Tanner, U. S..N., commanding. No. 26: The Fishes. Mem. Mus. Comp. Zool. 24: 432 pp., 85 pls. 1899. GILBERT, CHARLES Henry. Scientific results of explorations by the U. S. Fish Commission steamer Albatross. No. 12: A preliminary report on the fishes collected by the steamer Albatross on the Pacific coast of North America during the year 1889, with descriptions of twelve new genera and ninety-two new species. Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus. 13: 49-126. 1890. Hewtiter, Epmunp, and Snoparass, RosBert Evans. Papers from the Hopkins Stanford Galapagos Expedition, 1898-1899 No. 15: New fishes. Proc. Washington Acad. Sci. 5: 189-229, pls. 2-20. 1903. Husss, Cari L., and Lagimr, Karu F. Gwide to the fishes of the Great Lakes and tributary waters. Bull. Cranbrook Inst. Sci. 18: xi + 100, 118 figs. 1941. STEINDACHNER, FRANZ. Herpetologische und ich- thyologische Ergebnisse einer Reise nach Sudamerika. Denkschr. Acad. Wiss. Wien (math.-nat. Cl.) 72: 89-148, 5 pls. 1902. Officers of the Washington Academy of Sciences President. ......................... MarGaret Pittman, National Institutes of Health PAVOSRHENT CLEC: aim nye sc he oe odes Fleas RaupH E. Grsson, Applied Physics Laboratory DOA A Baca te bene Se Cree re eee see Heinz Speecut, National Institutes of Health Preasurer.........-; Howakp 8. Rappnere, U. 8. Coast and Geodetic Survey (Retired) DURIEQESE oo Aen A ree Sc Sas ears CES Joun A. STEVENSON, Plant Industry Station Custodian and Subscription Manager of Publications ; Harautp A. Reuper, U.S. National Museum Vice-Presidents Representing the Affiliated Societies: Philosophical Society of Washington......................... LAWRENCE A. Woop Anthropological Society of Washington...................... Biological Society of Washington........................-. Hersert G. Direnan Chemical Society of Washington.................--..4 ee eee Wiiu1am W. Watton Hatomolorical Socieby of Washington... 20.2... 0--.. ees ee eee wee seers eWeekoos NeanronalGeorraphic Society.........-.-.--2-228e senate ALEXANDER WETMORE Gecolorical Society of Washington... ....25-..-.2525: +22. dee Medical Society of the District of Columbia................... FREDERICK O. Cor Wolambia Historical Society. ......6. 2.500. feet ee ta eee ves GILBERT GROSVENOR Borinical society of Washington... 2.0.22... ece ee ee eee ee S. L. EmMswEeLuer Washington Section, Society of American Foresters.......... Grorce F. Gravatr Washington Society of Engineers....................... HERBERT Grove Dorsey Washington Section, American Institute of Electrical Engineers........ Washington Section, American Society of Mechanical Engineers... . Helminthological Society of Washington........ eu contind sous ome Joun §. ANDREWS Washington Branch, Society of American Bacteriologists.......Luoyp A. BuRKEY Washington Post, Society of American Military Engineers...... Fioyp W. Houeu Washington Section, Institute of Radio Engineers................ District of Columbia Section, American Society of Civil Engineers... . District of Columbia Section, Society Experimental Biology and Medicine W. C. Hess Washington Chapter, American Society for Metals............ Tuomas G. DigcEs Washington Section, International Association for Dental Research Rosert M. StrppHan Washington Section, Institute of the Aeronautical Sciences....... F. N. FRENKIEL District of Columbia Branch, American Meteorological Society Francis W. ReicHELDERFER Elected Members of the Board of Managers: PibepeUEaT ayn O00 tio, We tse Ce tee scl nae qian ® M. A. Mason, R. J. SEEGER pReamiemrrany 1 OD (2. hc.3 oacksuc. oe ae oe eee ow eel A. T. McPHerson, A. B. Gurney ‘Thay disinireniy ie IGS ae ee ec, APS repack clone ere et W. W. Russy, J. R. SWALLEN BOR Of WAC Gh All the above officers plus the Senior Editor MS RIRUL EMCI TMB TELE COTES PM PF ce case US oe ails Ging WEP GATS OL Eo Ll NOE [See front cover] PRECCULIUC | COMMULEE.. .. cc ce ee ees M. Prrrman (chairman), R. E. Greson, H. Specut, H. S. Rappieysz, J. R. SwaAuLen Committee on Membership....RoGgpR W. Curtis (chairman), JoHN W. ALprRicH, GEORGE Anastos, Haroup T. Cook, Josppu J. FAHEY, FRaNcots N. FRENKIBL, PETER KING, Gorpon M. Kunz, Louis R. Maxwestu, Frorence M. Mears, Curtis W. SABROSKY, BENJAMIN ScHwartz, Bancrort W. Sitteriy, Wiuure W. SuitH, Harry WexLER Commitiee on Meetings...... ARNOLD H. Scorr (chairman), Harry 8. Brernron, Harry R. Bortuwick, Herpert G. Drergnan, Wayne C. Hauu, AtBert M. Srone MOTE CHOWMVONOGTADRS... 01... 2.25.6 ee nor aen seas dss G. ArruHur Cooper (chairman) Mowwamuanyel956.6 5... co ts5 nas feces G. Artuur Coopmr, JamrEs I. Horrman pikyeUmery pLOOMs See cies ese ee Sn era ne: Harawtp A. Reaper, Witiiam A. Dayton omianuany: 1958. 2. os. ne ee Dean B. Cowin, JosepyH P. EK. Morrison Committee on Awards of Scientific Achievement... FREDERICK W. Poos (general chairman) For Biological Sciences..... Sara EH. BranHam (chairman), JoHN S. ANDREWS, James M. Hunptey, R. A. St. Groree, Bernice G. Scuupert, W. R. WevEeu For Engineering Sciences...... Horace M. Trent (chairman), JosppH M. CaLpWwELL, R.S. Diit, T. J. Hickury, T. J. Kintian, Gorpon W. McBrips, EH. R. Priore For Physical Sciences...... BENJAMIN L. SNAVELY (chairman), Howarp W. Bonn, Scorr E. Forsusu, Marearer D. Foster, M. HE. Freeman, J. K. Tayior For Teaching of Science....Monror H. Martin (chairman), Kerra C. Jounson, Loutss H. MarsHanu, Martin A. Mason, Howarp B. OwEns Committee on Grants-in-aid for Research.............. Francis O. Rick (chairman), HeRMAN Branson, CHarues K. TRUEBLOOD Committee on Policy and Planning...................... E. C. CrirtenpDEN (chairman) Ihe digmueyane IO. an eednecsaascondoee E. C. CrittenpEN, ALEXANDER WETMORE sRopdonuUaryelO5 (ee a) eee. a a ose cs ee JouHN EH. Grar, Raymonp J. SEEGER oyJamuaryl G58ie eee ee ease eee Francis M. Deranporr, FRANK M. SerzLer Committee on Encouragement of Science Talent..ARcHiIBALD T. McPHerson (chairman) SOV ANU ATI 81 OSG iet nie clsdts setts souk Ge dieses Harowp H. Finuey, J. H. McMitien Mowanuanyl O57 oye heer ek Ans teae L. Epwin Yocum, Wruiiam J. YOUDEN pow amianvel OOS ames tiger eis setae ocean: A. T. McPumrson, W. T. Reap Committee on Science Education. ... RAYMOND J. SEEGER (chairman), RonALD BAmrForD, R. Percy Barnes, Wauiace R. Bropr, LeEonarp CarmicuaEL, Huenu L. Drypen, Reeina FuanNeRy, Rautpn E. Grsson, Furoyp W. Hoven, Martin A. Mason, Grorce D. Rock, Winuiam W. Rusey, Wiuiiam H. Sespreti, Watpo L. Scumrrr, B. D. Van Evera, Wititiam EH. Wratuer, Francrs EK. JOHNSTON LUCDESCHILMLOUE OTC OUNCULOf PALALAl Sun. tm. eeeituse eos set ey Watson Davis Committee of Auditors...Francis E. Jounsvron, (chairman), S. D. Conuins, W. C. Hess Committee of Tellers...Raupu P. Tirrsumr (chairman), E. G. Hamer, J. G. THoompson’ CONTENTS Brotocy.—The unitary principle. A. A. WILLIAMSON............... Matuematics.—Application of two methods of numerical analysis to the computation of the reflected radiation of a point source. PETER HENRICI Merrrorotocy.—Dynamic linkages between westerly waves and weather. EL WABSRUDBR fc Gh she bs MeO, ete ea csrgts ee er PALEONTOLOGY.—A new Pleistocene bat (Corynorhinus) from Mexico. CHARLES O. HANDLEY, JR. 2. 25/660...) «oo dle Ce oe Mycotoey.—A southern Basidiobolus forming many sporangia from globose and from elongated adhesive conidia. CHARLES DRECHSLER ZooLocy.—The genus Ogyrides (Crustacea: Caridea) in North Carolina. AUSTIN, B. WILLIAMS... 2.60006 cule seen ss de cee Zootoacy.—Notes on the amphipod crustacean Maeroides thompsoni Walker (CuARENCE Ri SHOEMAKER, =-oe-)- --e eee oe OrnitHoLoGy.—Description of a new chipping sparrow from Canada. Harry ©: OBERHOLSER:.......-c8 6.0... tsaleneink ae oe IcutHyoLocy.—Pontinus clemensi, a new scorpaenoid fish from the trop- ical ‘eastern Pacific, JoHN By Hitch]. ---.. 25. 45-eeee This Journal is Indexed in the International Index to Periodicals. Page 38 46 48 49 56 59 Von. 45 Marca 1955 No. 3 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES BOARD OF EDITORS R. K. Coox FENNER A, CHACE NATIONAL BUREAU U.S. NATIONAL MUSEUM OF STANDARDS ASSOCIATE EDITORS J. Ll. HorrMan BERNICE SCHUBERT CHEMISTRY BOTANY Dean B. Cowie Puitip DRUCKER PHYSICS ANTHROPOLOGY ALAN STONE Davip H. DUNKLE ENTOMOLOGY GEOLOGY PUBLISHED MONTHLY BY THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Mount Royat & GuiLrorp AVES. BALTIMORE, MARYLAND Entered as second class matter under the Act of August 24, 1912, at Baltimore, Md. Acceptance for mailing at a special rate of postage provided for in the Act of February 28, 1925. Authorized February 17, 1949 Journal of the Washington Academy of Sciences This JouRNAL, the official organ of the Washington Academy of Sciences, publishes: (1) Short original papers, written or communicated by members of the Academy; (2) proceedings and programs of meetings of the Academy and affiliated societies; (3) notes of events connected with the scientific life of Washington. The JoURNAL is issued monthly. Volumes correspond to calendar years. Manuscripts may be sent to any member of the Board of Editors. It is urgently re- quested that contributors consult the latest numbers of the JoURNAL and conform their manuscripts to the usage found there as regards arrangement of title, subheads, syn- onymies, footnotes, tables, bibliography, legends for illustrations, and other matter. Manuscripts should be typewritten, double-spaced, on good paper. Footnotes should be numbered serially in pencil and submitted on a separate sheet. The editors do not - assume responsibility for the ideas expressed by the author, nor can they undertake to correct other than obvious minor errors. Illustrations in excess of the equivalent (in cost) of one full-page halftone are to be paid for by the author Proof.—In order to facilitate prompt publication one proof will generally be sent to authors in or near Washington. It is urged that manuscript be submitted in final form; the editors will exercise due care in seeing that copy is followed. Unusual cost of foreign, mathematical, and tabular material, as well as alterations made in the proof by the author, may be charged to the author. Author’s Reprints.—Reprints will be furnished in accordance with the following schedule of prices (approximate) : Copies 4 pp. 8 pp. 12 pp 16 pp. 20 p Covers 100 $ 3.25 $ 6.50 $ 9.75 $13.00 $16. "5 $ 3.50 200 6.50 13.00 19.50 26.00 32.50 7.00 300 9.75 19.50 29.25 39.00 48.75 10.50 400 13.00 26.00 39.00 52.00 65.00 14.00 Subscriptions or requests for the purchase of back numbers or volumes of the Jour- NAL or the ProceEpDINGS should be sent to Haratp A. ReEHpDER, Custodian and Sub- scription Manager of Publications, U. S. National Museum, Washington 25, D. C Subscription Rates for the JouRNAL.—Per year.................--- saoernredh eee $7.50 Price of back numbers and volumes: Per Vol. Per Number Vol. 1 to vol. 10, incl.—not available*.................. — Vol. 11 to vol. 15, incl. (21 numbers per vol.)........... $10. 00 $0.70 Vol. 16 to vol. 22, incl. (21 numbers per vol.)........... 8.00 0.60 Vol. 23 to current vol. (12 numbers per vol.)........... 7.50 0.90 * Limited number of complete sets of the JouRNAL (vol. 1 to vol. 44, incl.) available for sale to libraries at $371.00. MonocraPu No. 1, ‘‘The Parasitic Cuckoos of Africa,’’ by Herbert Friedmann $4.50 INDEX to JOURNAL (vols. 1-40) and PROCEEDINGS............... OP arc cc $7.50 PROCEEDINGS, vols. 1-13 (1899-1911) complete........................-2005- $25.00 Single: volumes} unbound <1/2.4. . cyaeeee t eeicte igs neste sme) ahold Re 2.00 Single numibers)2 code cease woe ater ee ele iain ene Peerage Prices on request Missing Numbers will be replaced without charge provided that claim is made to the Treasurer within 30 days after date of following issue. Remittances should be made payable to ‘“‘Washington Academy of Sciences’? and addressed to the Treasurer, H. S. RappLeys, 6712 Fourth Street, NW., Washington 12, D.C Changes of Address—Members are requested to report changes of address promptly to the Secretary. JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Wor. 45 Marcu 1955 No. 3 MATHEMATICS.—Vote concerning the number of directions which, in a given motion, suffer no instantaneous rotation. J. L. EricksEn, Naval Research Laboratory. Let » denote! the velocity vector associ- ated with a motion in a three-dimensional Euclidean space. In order that the element of are in the direction of the unit vector \° be suffering no instantaneous rotation, it is necessary and sufficient that there exist a real scalar k such that @; — ko’)? = 0. (1) Thus-/ must be a real root of the cubic det (v'; — ks';) = 0. Truesdell’ calculated the discriminant D of this cubic, obtaining Me “181K. —41L + 2K? —4K® —2717 where : a Me: 2 i iE = D ; : K = 1667.1 iv = He then concluded that the number of dis- tinct directions suffering no instantaneous rotation is determined by the sign of D and that (a) If D > O there are exactly three such directions. (b) If D < 0 there is exactly one such direction. (ec) If D = O there may be one, two, three or an infinite number of such directions. He remarks that it is difficult to obtain other kinematical interpretations for the condi- mons) > (), DP) — 0, D < 0: We obtam a ' Standard tensor notation is used throughout. > TRUESDELL, C. The kinematics of vorticity. Indiana Uniy. Publ. Sci. Ser. no. 19. 1954. 65 reformulation of his conditions which should make this task easier. Let V'; = v ; — 4l6;, so that V’; = 0. We note that / is a real root of (1) if and only if 1 = k — 14/ isa real root of det (V’; — 15';) = 0, (2) from which it follows that either both of the discriminants of these two cubies vanish, or both are nonzero and of the same sign. Thus, in a, b, ¢ we may replace D by the discriminant F# of (2). Using Truesdell’s re- sults, we easily obtain E = 4M° — 27N’, where M = —45%1V'V'; = 4V*V';, N = det V';. For an isochoric motion, J = 0, so V'; = y,. At a pomt, an arbitrary motion can be decomposed into an isochoric motion for which V'; are the velocity gradients and a pure expansion or contraction, for which 12/6; are the velocity gradients, and only the isochoric part influences EH. In trying to obtain local characterizations of the three types of motions described in a, b, ¢, it is thus sufficient to consider only isochoric motions, a fact which is not obvious from Truesdell’s analysis. One conclusion is easy to obtain. Letting D;; = 4(V.; + Vy), Wi; = ’Vi; — Vis), we obtain M=ViD"D; — WW. A necessary condition that H > 0 is that M > O. The latter condition holds if and only if 66 JOURNAL OF 0 ANDY Din << Ik, DY Ds > 0, wnere We is the kinematical vorticity num- 2 Mf mn 2 3 ber introduced and studied by Truesdell” °, calculated for the isochoric part of the * TRUESDELL, C. Two measures of vorticity. Journ. Rational Mech. Anal. 2: 173-217. 1953. MINERALOGY —Thermal analysis and Faust, U.S. Geological Survey. Griffthite was described by Larsen and Steiger in 1917 as a new member of the chlorite group. It was found as fillings in the amyegdules of a basalt from Cahuenga Pass, Griffith Park, Los Angeles, Calif. They noted that griffithite ‘differs so greatly, both opti- cally and chemically, from any of the chlo- rites previously described as to require a new name... .” In 1928 Larsen and Steiger restudied erifithite, investigating in particular the dehydration and rehydration phenomena. They noted the parallel behavior of non- tronite and griffthite on thermal treatment but did not suggest that they might be members of the same group of minerals. A. N. Winchell (Winchell and Winchell, 1927) considered griffiithite to be a member of his leverrierite-stilpnomelane system, closely related to jefferisite. Orcel (1927) in his comprehensive study of the chlorite group included griffithite within the group, but he was not too con- vineed, for he writes (p. 307): ‘Elle posséde le clivage habituel des chlorites et renferme une grande quantité d’eau s’échappant a 100°. Il serait interessant d’etudier a nouveau sa déshydration.” (Italics G.T.F.) Turner and Hutton (1935) described a second occurrence of griffithite in ‘‘a fine grained red schist which outcrops in the bed of Twelve-mile Creek Lake Wakatipu District”? of Western Otago, New Zealand. This schist contains about 50 percent highly ferruginous green epidote, percent erifithite, 15 percent fine-grained quartz, 8 percent hematite, and, as accessory minerals, a uniaxial pennine, opaque iron ores, and calcite. Berman (1937), probably following Win- 25 _ | Publication authorized by the Director, U.S. Geological Survey. THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 45, NO. 3 motion. It can be shown that the kinematical vorticity number calculated for the actual motion is never larger than that mentioned above, so it too must be less than one in order that H > 0. A motion for which H > 0 is less rotational than a simple shearing motion, for which Wx = 1 and F = 0. X-ray studies of griffithite.s Groren T chell’s classification (1927), classified grif- fithite as a member of the vermiculite group. In 1945 Faust (unpublished data), using differential thermal analysis equipment and the tube sample used by Steiger, proved erifithite to be a member of the mont- morillonite group. Ross (1946) independently had arrived at the same conclusion from optical data and classified griffiithite as an iron-rich saponite. He recalculated Steiger’s analysis in the now conventional form for a member of the montmorillonite group, that is: (Ca)o.50 Nao. 9) 1G = 01 T [Mei ss Feo.s2 Feo.a Alo.osl [Alo 81 Sis.19] OwlOH|> and noted that the presence of 7.83 percent of FeO is the highest recorded for any member of the montmorillonite group. DESCRIPTION AND CHEMICAL Griffithite locality: Cahuenga Pass, Griffith Park, Los Angeles, Calif. Tube sample prepared ANALYSES by Steiger for analysis, U.S.G.S. Record no. 3112-B (Steiger’s No. 1444-b). Analysis 1, Table 1. Saponite locality: Cathkin, Carmunnock Parish, County Lanarkshire, Scotland, U.S.G.S. Record no. D-67. Analysis 2, Table 1. Thuringite locality: Schmiedefeld, near Saal- feld, Thuringia, Germany, U.S.N.M. no. R-4554. Analysis 8, Table 1, is on similar material de- scribed by Jung and Kohler (1930). Chlorite (Prochlorite?) locality: Prince’s Soap- stone Quarry, on the Schuylkill River, approxi- mately one-quarter mile south of Lafayette Station, Philadelphia County, Pa. No analyses. Leuchtenbergite locality: Nevada Tungsten mine near Gabbs, Nev. Analysis 4, Table 1. Marcu 1955 FAUST: Taste 1—CHEMICAL ANALYSES OF GRIFFITHITE, SAPONITE, THURINGITE, AND LEUCHTENBERGITE No. 1 2 3 | 4 Mineral | Griffithite Saponite | Thuringite graces we | Sete | Cai | eter | ne Locality Angeles, Lanarkshire, eet mines near * Calif. Scotland Gaananv Gabbs, Nev. SiO, 39.64 | 40.16 ZOSSZ a eee OZ, AlsO; 9.05 8.03 ACL Nee ZORC9 Fe.0; eae, Soa) |! S70 4) 0.04 FeO 7.83 SECO Se OG 1.20 MgO 15.80 AQEAON S| 45 34.25 MnO — a — trace CaO 2.93 iQ} 0.02 Na.O| 0.71 | — | = 0.51 K.0 none | — | — 0.07 TiO. | — — | trace | trace Sa | | 001 HsO> | 12.31 1 || Oe?” |) O83 H:O7 4.90 7.60 10.31 12.77 > 100.49 | 100.58 | 99.65 | 100.71 Analyst: 1. G. Steiger, 2. L. T. Richardson, 3. H. Jung and E. Kohler, 4. C. Milton. DIFFERENTIAL THERMAL ANALYSIS The differential thermal analysis appara- tus used in this study is a modification of that designed by Alexander, Hendricks, and Nelson (1939). A description of the tech- niques used in the Geochemistry and Petrol- ogy Laboratory, U.S. Geological Survey, has been given by Faust (1948) and (1950). The samples were heated at the rate of 12°C. per minute. The records were obtained as photographs. Differential thermal analyses curves of eriffithite, saponite, thuringite, chlorite, and leuchtenbergite were prepared under the same experimental conditions. In addition a sample of thuringite was placed in the furnace and vented with two holes by means of a stiff wire. Venting a charge, after it has been tamped in place, produces a group of holes in the charge so that a series of paths are available for the escape of gases from the charge or the passage of the furnace gases into the vent holes. The results of the DTA experiments are given in Fig. 1, and the data are summarized in table 2. GRIFFITHITE 67 The selection of the chlorites, thuringite, chlorite, and leuchtenbergite for study was to provide for comparison an iron-rich chlorite, thuringite, and two other chlorites giving typical curves for the chlorite group. Orcel (1927, 1929) has published curves for typical chlorites that he studied which are similar to the curves for chlorite and leuch- tenbergite shown in Fig. 1. A study of these curves shows conclusively that griffithite is related to saponite and is thus a member of the montmorillonite group. The differential thermal analysis curve for griffithite is totally unrelated to the curves of the chlorites. Chlorites differ C-180 347 207 922 164 c-82 TE ee 634 860 240 904 179 c-588 707 SS aN eee rt en ree 534274 c-589 707 593 573 535 C-198 86890! 822 am 7 842 883 682 87I C-193 919 810 = 898 851 ® 5 7. oD a € \ 2 \ X=) 5 3 = 694 [S) > Increasing temperature Fia. 1.—Differential thermal analysis curves for griffithite, C-180; saponite, C-82; thuringite, C-588; thuringite, vented with two holes, C-589; chlorite, C-198; leuchtenbergite, C-193. The tem- perature on the left is about 25°C, the temperature at the termination of the curves, on the right, is about 1000°C. 68 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 45, No. 3 TABLE 2.—OBSERVATIONS ON THE THERMAL ANALYSIS CuRVEsS! OF GRIFFITHITE, SAPONITE, THURINGITE, CHLORITE, AND LEUCHTENBERGITE Temperature of Peaks (°C) Record | Low temperature Mineral Intermediate temperature Weight High temperature of Locality sample Endother- J Exother- mic i ie Endothermic used Endo- (grams) ther- mic Endo-) Exo- ther- mic Exo- ther- mic Exo- ther- mic Griffithite..| C-180 | 164 | 207 347 = = — C-82 179 | 240 | Present — — | 634 (Broad hump) | Saponite... Thuringite | C-588 | — | — — 534 | 574 | 584 CAD |) = = 535 | 573 | 593 C-198 | — = Thuringite Chlorite.... Leuchten- bergite...| C-193 | — — = — = ay = == S00 — | 904 = = || cor — | 822 | 842 | 868 | 883 | 901 — | 810 | 851 | 871 | 898 | 919 Cahuenga Pass, | 0.4625 | Griffith Park, Los Angeles, Calif. Cathkin, Car- munnock Parish, County Lan- arkshire, Scotland, Schmiedefeld, near Saalfeld, Thuringia, Germany. Same as above. Prince’s Quarry Lafayette Station, Philadelphia County, Pa. 0.5290 0.5323 0.5905 0.5185 Nevada Tung- 0.5540 sten mine neat Gabbs, Nev. 1 These curves were all obtained with a resistance of 600 ohms in the galvanometer circuit. from montmorillonite in that they have only a negligible amount of “‘low-tempera- ture’ water and that they undergo their ereatest loss in water content at an inter- mediate temperature. For the curves given in Fig. 1, the temperature range is from 535 to 695°C. It is interesting to compare the dehydra- tion data of Larsen and Steiger (1928) with the DTA curves given in this paper. Their studies required 5 to 7 hours to raise the temperature of the sample from 25°C. to 290°C., after which most of the water had been driven off. Optical examination of the erifithite heated to 290°C. led them to conclude: “Their crystal structure does not break down even when heated at about 300°C. at which temperatures nearly all their water is driven off.’ Their conclusions are in accord with the present work. The DTA studies show lower temperatures for the peaks representing the loss of the ‘‘low- temperature’? water, as would be expected when more rapid rates of heating are em- ployed. X-RAY STUDIES X-ray data for griffithite—The X-ray data on griffithite were obtained using a portion of the tube sample prepared by Steiger. This material had been kept tightly corked and represents the air-dried mineral. The samples for X-ray analysis were pre- pared as spindles with Duco cement as the mounting medium. The patterns were made using filtered copper radiation. The indices were assigned following the methods given by Brindley (1951). The value of the b parameter was calculated from the 06 reflection. The results of this work are given in table 3 along with data for saponite (Faust, 1951) and thuringite (Von Engel- hardt, 1942). A comparison of the data in Table 3 shows that the X-ray powder diffraction data for griffithite and saponite are in good agreement, allowing for differences in com- position, whereas the data for the iron-rich chlorite, thuringite, are totally unrelated to these montmorillonite minerals. A portion of the griffithite was treated with ethylene Marca 1955 FAUST: glycol, packed into a Lindemann glass capillary tube, and examined by X-ray techniques. The resulting X-ray powder diffraction pattern showed that the positions of the basal reflections (001) had shifted. The value for (001) was found to be 18.0 + A. The results of the study by X-ray meth- ods show that griffithite is a member of the montmorillonite group. Identification of the phases formed from the dissociated minerals——X-ray powder dif- fraction patterns were obtained from the products remaining after the dissociation had taken place and the samples had been TasBLe 3—X-RAY PowpeR Dtirrraction Data For GRIFFITHITE, SAPONITE, AND THURINGITE (Cu/Ni; } = 1.5418A) Thuringite Griffithite Saponite Schmiedefeld, Cahuenga Pass, Cathkin near Germany; after Calif. Glasgow, Scotland Von Engelhardt, 1942 Indices | d(A) | I | Indices | d(A) it |) lepiBees (exe) || it | | 001 [15.4 |vs | 001 {14.8 | vs | | | C01 13.6 |ms 002 7.9 |m 002 Hott || yest) | 002 | 6.89 lvs 003 | 5.28 \vw| 003 | 5.14 | vw 11, 02 | 4.6C |m | 11, G2 | 4.59 | ms b} 003, 020) 4.62 |s 4.34 | vw 004 3.93 ivw 004 3.79 | vw | | 13, 20 | 2.613) m = 006 m 202, 131] 2.602|ms 560 006 =| 2.545] md _ 2.452 |lvw 203, 132) 2.451/ms 202, 133] 2.384/ms 04, 22 | 2.298 lvw 204, 133] 2.259|ms | 204, 135) 1.995|s 1.852| vw | 206, 135] 1.875|/mw | 205, 136] 1.809|w 15, 24, | 1.740 |vw |15, 24, | 1.747|w 31 31 207, 136] 1.713|vw 206, 137] 1.654|w 06, 33 | 1.541 |ms | C6, 33 | 1.543] sb | 060, 331] 1.551\s ‘ 062, 331,| 1.513|mw 1.495) vw 333 1.458)vw |209, 138,| 1.419|vw 333 0.0.10 1.405|\ vw 208, 139) 1.386|m 26, 40 | 1.330 |w | 26, 40 | 1.327) m b | 400 1.332|w 17 1.278] vw b 19, 46, | 1.001 |vw 53 19, 46,| 0.999] vw d 53 60, 39 | 0.888 |vw | 60, 39 | 0.890) vw b b = broad d = diffuse GRIFFITHITE 69 heated to about 1000°C. The results are as follows: 1. Dissociated griffthite, sample C-180, consists of maghemite, cristobalite, and hypersthene. The quality of the X-ray powder pattern obtained from this material is fair. 2. Dissociated saponite, sample C-82, consists of hypersthene, hematite, and cristobalite. The quality of the X-ray powder pattern is fairly good. 3. Dissociated thuringite, samples C-588 and C-589, seems to contain a spinel-group mineral, probably maghemite. The X-ray patterns obtained from these two samples are rather poor, and they both contain the same lines, but the number of lines present is small and they are rather broad and diffuse. SUMMARY AND CONCLUSIONS This paper presents the experimental evidence for classifying griffthite as a member of the montmorillonite group and withdrawing it from the chlorite group. The inclusion of griffthite and cron- stedtite in the chlorite group of minerals has always posed some difficulties in the correlation of their optical properties with those of the other members. The strong birefringence of cronstedtite and griffithite (y — a = 0.087) can not be correlated with the low birefringence of the chlorites. Hendricks (1939) showed that the crystal structure of cronstedtite (2FeO-Fe.O3-SiO,- 2H.O) is related to that of kaolinite. With the reclassification of griffithite as a mont- morillonite, two of the principal enigmas have been removed from the puzzling accumulated data on the chlorites. The recent experimental demonstration of poly- morphism in this group by Brindley, Oughton, and Robinson (1950) will further simplify the relationships. REFERENCES ALEXANDER, Lyte T., Henpricks, STERLING B., and Neuson, R. A. Minerals present in soil colloids; II, Estimation in some representative soils. Soil Sci. 48: 273-279. 1939. BerMAN, Harry. Constitution and classification of the natural silicates. Amer. Min. 22: 342- 408. 1937. Brinpiey, G. W., editor. X-ray identification and 70 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES crystal structures of clay minerals: Chapters 4 and 12 London, Mineral. Soe. 1951. Brinpiey, G. W., Oucutron, B. M., and Rostn- son, K. Polymorphism of the chlorites. I, Or- dered structures. Acta Cryst. 8: 408-416. 1950. ENGELHARDT, WoLtr von. Die Strukturen von Thuringit, Bavalit und Chamosit und thre Stellung in der Chloritgruppe. Zeit. Krist. 104: 142-159. 1942. Faust, Groren T. Thermal analysis of quartz and its use in calibration in thermal analysis studies. Amer. Min. 88: 337-345. 1948. Thermal analysis studies on carbonates: I, Aragonite and calcite. Amer. Min. 85: p. 207-224. 1950. Thermal analysis and X-ray studies of sauconite and of some zinc minerals of the same paragenetic association. Amer. Min. 386: 795-822. 1951. HENDRICKS, STERLING B. Random structures of layer minerals as illustrated by cronstedtite (2FeO: Fe.O;-SiOz:2H»O0). Possible iron con- tent of kaolin. Amer. Min. 24: 529-539. 1939. Henpricks, Stertine B. and ALpxanpErR, LYLE T. Minerals present in soil colloids. I, De- scriptions and methods for identification. Soil Sci. 48: 257-272. 1939. vol. 45, No. 3 June, H., and Kéuupr, E. Untersuchungen tiber den Thuringit von Schmiedefeld in Thiiringen. Chemie der Erde 5: 182-200. 1930. Larsen, Esper S., and Steiger, Georar Minera- logic notes. Jour. Washington Acad. Sci. 7: 6-12. 1917. Dehydration and optical studies of alunogen, nontronite and griffithite. Amer. Journ. Sci. (5) 15: 1-19. 1928. OrRcEL, JEAN Recherches sur la composition chimi- que des chlorites. Bull. Soc. Francaise Min. 50: 75-456. 1927. . Recherches sur la déshydratation des chlo- rites. Congrés Soc. Savantes, Comptes Ren- dus 1927: 75-80. 1929. Ross, CLarence 8. Sauconite, a clay mineral of the montmorillonite group. Amer. Min. 31: 411-424. 1946. Turner, F. J., and Hurron, C. O. Stilpnomelane and related minerals as constituents of schists from western Otago, New Zealand. Geol. Mag. 72: p. 1-8. 1935. WincHetu, N. H., and WincHetu, A. N. Elements of optical mineralogy; An introduction to micro- scopic petrography; ed. 2, 2: 424 pp. New York, 1927. PALEONTOLOGY .—Notes on Permian rhynchonelliids. FRANcIS G. STEHLI, California Institute of Technology, Pasadena, Calif.! (Communicated by David H. Dunkle.) Attention has frequently been called to the intensive diversification of Jurassic rhynchonellids. Cooper and Williams (1952, p. 330) have pomted out, however, that this expansion is in part an artifact of the literature resulting from the contrast be- tween the intensive splitting of Jurassic forms and a more conservative treatment of those of the Triassic. These investigators have also noted that the rhynchonellid deployment actually began at least as early as the Triassic. This observation is readily confirmed by a survey of literature on Triassic brachiopods, for it indicates the presence of a large number of still unrecog- nized rhynchonellid genera. The Mesozoic expansion may have resulted from reduced competition concomitant with the termina- tion or severe reduction of many brachiopod lines at the close of the Paleozoic. Such a condition would have favored the rapid expansion of pre-adapted rhynchonellid phyla. Whether or not this was the case, the 1 Publications of the Division of the Geological Sciences, California Institute of Technology, Pasadena, California. Contribution No. 702. late Paleozoic, and particularly Permian rhynchonellid faunas, are of unusual sig- nificance for here are to be found the stocks ancestral to the Mesozoic diversification. Rhynchonellids are not common in the Permian of North America. They are, however, more diverse than the present literature indicates. Recent collecting in the Wordian rocks of the Guadalupe Mountains, Tex., has revealed the presence of several new forms and allows increased detail in our knowledge of some previously described forms. Because of the unusual evolutionary interest attaching to Permian rhyncho- nellids, those forms represented by suffi- ciently abundant and perfect material are described below. All the specimens studied are siliceous replacements prepared by acid etching of material collected in the upper part of the lower Getaway member of the Cherry Canyon formation. The collections were made near Pine Springs Camp, Tex., be- tween U. 8. Highway 62 and the Pasotex pipeline road on the west side of a road leading from U.S. 62 to the Airways Station. Marcu 1955 The best silicified material was found on the ridge crest south of the middle gully of a eroup of three running east-west and drain- ing into the water course parallel to the road. All the easily accessible worthwhile material has been collected. The etched faunas are housed at the American Museum of Natural History in New York City, the United States National Museum in Wash- ington, D. C., and at the California Insti- tute of Technology, Pasadena, Calif. The deposits from which the fossils were collected appear to represent a detrital fan adjacent to a small reef, though the latter has been largely removed by erosion. Some specimens are in position of growth, but much of the material is detrital. The locality is remarkable for the diversity of its fauna. Invertebrate groups represented in the approximate order of abundance are Bra- chiopoda, Fusulinidae, Bryozoa, Porifera, Gastropoda, Pelecypoda, Echinoidea, Tetra- coralla, Crinoidea, Ammonoidea, Nauti- loidea, Trilobita, Amphineura, and Seaphopoda. The rhynchonellid brachiopods are found largely in the detrital material about the reef, but occur sparingly in blocks in which much of the material is in position of growth. The material here described and figured is housed in the paleontological collections of the American Museum of Natural History in New York City. Superfamily RHYNCHONELLACEA Schuchert, 1896 ? Family CAMAROTOECHIIDAE Schuchert, 1929 Genus Fascicosta? Stehli, n. gen. Genotype—Rhynchonella ? longaeva Girty. Diagnosis—Small impunctate uniplicate in- cipiently fascicostate Permian rhynchonellids ornamented with fine concentric lines; foramen small, subapical; deltidial plates large; pedicle interior with dental plates; brachial interior with hinge plate undivided and supported by a broad median ridge or low septum; teeth and sockets denticulate. Range—Wordian to Capitanian. Discussion—The incipiently fasciostate rib- bing of this genus is very unusual for a rhyn- chonellid. Insofar as the writer is aware it is approached among upper Paleozoic members of 2 Lat. fascis, bundle; Lat. costa, rib. STEHLI: PERMIAN RHYNCHONELLIDS 71 the group only by Allorhynchus ramosum Bell from the Windsor group of Nova Scotia in which there is bifurcation of the costae. The form described by Bittner (1890, p. 192) as Rhyn- chonellina juvavica from the Triassic deposits in the Alps also exhibits fasciocostation but bears a divided hinge plate and is thus generically dis- tinct. The strong denticulation of the hmge teeth and sockets is not unusual in Permian rhyn- chonellids and has been noted in several genera by Cloud (1944, p. 55). Extensive and detailed studies will be necessary to determine its presence or absence in other genera and its taxonomic significance. Fascicosta longaeva (Girty) Figs. 1-17 Rhynchonella ? longaeva Girty, U. 8. Geol. Surv. Prof. Pap. 58: 322-323, pl. 15, figs. 18-19. 1909. Material—This species is represented by two complete specimens, AMNH 27904:1 and AMNH 27904:2. In addition there are seven pedicle and four brachial valves, all of which are more or less complete, which collectively bear the designation AMNH 27904. Diagnosis—Small subpentagonal rhyncho- nelliform shells. Pedicle valve slightly convex; sulcus well developed, beginning near midlength and containing 2 to 4 costae on the floor of the valve, while each lateral margin usually bears a smaller one; beak long, little incurved; foramen small, subapical, limited by large conjunct deltidial plates. Brachial valve strongly convex; fold low with 3 to 5 costae on top and a smaller one at each side. Each valve ornamented with 15 to 25 fine high rounded costae extending to the beak and increasing toward the front by bifurca- tion and implantation; the entire shell surface bearing fine concentric lines. Pedicle interior with small dental plates; posi- tion of the muscle insertions indeterminable. Brachial interior with a raised undivided hinge plate separated from the lateral shell walls by deep denticulate sockets; hinge plate bearing posteriorly a slight depression which received the diductor muscles; hinge plate supported by a low broad ridge or rarely by a low but well developed septum; crura not observed; anterior adductor sears depressed, elongate, located at either side of the ridge or septum near its anterior end; posterior adductor scars raised, located posterior to the other pair and anterolaterally directed. “I i) JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 45, NO. 3 Measurements in millimeters of two specimens on Capitan Peak and from several somewhat are as follows: questionable localities in the vicinity. It is un- ; 9.8 2 known outside the Guadalupe Mountains. Length 9.8 10.2 Width 10.2 11.2 Discussion.—In his original description of the Thickness 6.9 7.8 species Girty (1909, p. 322) expressed doubt as to Range.—I have found this species in the lower its exact generic placement. He placed it ques- part of the Getaway member of the Cherry — tionably with Rhynchonella. It is so distinctive as Canyon formation. It has been reported by to deserve a position as the genotype and only Girty (1909, p. 323) from the Capitan limestone known species of a new genus. Fascicosta longaeva (Girty) Fre. 1.—Pedicle exterior showing fascicostation and prolongation of costae onto the umbo. AMNH 27904:1 (X2). Fig. 2.—Pedicle exterior showing increase of costae by bifurcation. AMNH. 27904:2 C<2ye Fig. 3.—Exterior of brachial valve showing the fine concentric ornamentation characteristic of the species. AMNH 27904:1 (X7). Fic. 4.—Brachial exterior showing increase of costae by im- plantation and the extension of costation onto the umbo. AMNH 27904:1 (X2). Fie. 5.—Brachial exterior showing extension of costae onto the umbo and the small pedicle foramen and large deltidial plates of the pedicle beak. AMNH 27904:2 (x2). Fra. 6.—Brachial interior showing the reflection of the external ornamentation and also the undivided hinge plate. AMNH 27904:3 (x2). Fie. 7.— Profile showing the strong convexity of the brachial valve and the lesser convexity of the pedicle valve. AMNH 27904:1 (X2). Fie. 8.—Posterior showing extension of costation onto the umbo, pedicle valve slightly broken. AMNH 27904:2 (x2). Fria. 9.—Posterior view showing the increase anteriorly of the costae. AMNH 27904:1 (x2). Fig. 10.—Anterior showing irregular lamination of the valves near the front and the nature of the fold and sulcus. AMNH 27904:2 (x2). Fra. 11.—Profile showing unequal convexity of the two valves. AMNH 27904:2 (X2). Fie. 12.—Anterior showing irregular laminae and the nature of the fold and suleus. AMNH 27904:1 (2). Fria. 13.—Pedicle interior showing hinge teeth and dental plates and unusual plate partly shutting off the rostral cavity. AMNH 27904:4 (X2). Fria. 14.—Brachial interior of a specimen with a small median septum, showing the undivided hinge plate. AMNH 27904:7 (X2). Fre. 15.—Hinge plate showing denticulation of dental sceket. AMNH 27904:6 (X5). Fia. 16.—Pedicle interior showing the small pedicle foramen and large deltidial plates and the adductor and diductor muscle scars. AMNH 27904:4 (2). Fic. 17.—Brachial interior of a specimen without a median septum showing the undivided hinge plate and depressed posterior adductor scars and raised anterior adductor scars. AMNH. 27904:5 (X2). Allorhynchus ? permianus Stehli, n. sp. Fra. 18.—Pedicle exterior of a specimen with the pedicle beak missing but paucicostate ornamenta~ tion evident. AMNH 27905:1 (x2). Fra. 19.—Brachial exterior showing paucicostate ornamentation. AMNH 27905:1 (X2). Fia. 20.—Profile of specimen with the pedicle beak missing and the two valves gaping slightly. AMNH 27905:1 (X2). osterior showing the extension of paucicostation onto the umbo. AMNH 27905:1 (x2). Fra. 22.—Hinge plate showing its divided nature and at the left the teeth in the denticulate hinge socket. AMNH 27905:2 (x7). Fie. 23.—Anterior view showing the nature of the fold and suleus. AMNH 27905:1 (X2). Fig. 24.—Umbo of the brachial valve and underside of the beak of the pedicle valve showing the large pedicle foramen and the very small deltidial plates, which fail to close above the brachial valve. AMNH 27905:3 (x5). Fra. 25.—Brachial interior showing the divided hinge plate and the internal reflection of costation. AMNH 27905:2 (X2). Fra. 26.—Pedicle interior showing the well developed dental plates. AMNH 27905:4 (X2). Fie. 27. Pedicle exterior showing paucicostate ornamentation extending onto the umbo. The holotype, AMNH 27905:5 (x2). Fra. 28.—Profile showing the unequal convexity of the valves. The holotype AMNH 27905:5 (X2). Fre. 29.—Brachial exterior showing paucicostate ornament and the large almost unrestricted pedicle foramen. The holotype AMNH 27905:5 (X2). Fic. 30.—Posterior view showifig extension of costation onto the umbones. The holotype AMNH 27905:5 (x2). Fig. 31.—Anterior view showing the nature of the fold and sulcus. The holotype AMNH 27905:5 (X2). Leiorhynchoidea cloudi Cooper Fig. 32.—Brachial interior showing hinge plate and median septum as well as adductor muscle scars- AMNH 27906:3 (X2). i ate and dental socket showing denticulation. AMNH 27906:1 (X65). Fre. 34.—Interior of beak region of the pedicle valve showing the central raised adductor scars, the 2 Sepressee diductor sears and in the rostral cavity the tracks and scars of the median pedicle muscles. 1 Note also the absolescence of dental plates. AMNH 27906:2 (x2). Fia. 35.—Pedicle exterior showing ie strong paucicostate ornamentation and its obsolescence at the umbo. AMNH 27906:4 (X1). Fre. 36.—Detail of the hinge region of the brachial valve showing the medial trough, the median septum, the insertions of the brachial pedicle muscles and the special triangular insertions of the diductor mus- cles. AMNH 27906:3 (<5). Wellerella ? sp. Fic. 37.—Hinge plate and dental socket showing fine denticulation. AMNH 27907:1 (X5). Fia. 38.—Brachial interior showing entire hinge plate, and strong median septum. The floor of the valve shows the adductor sears. AMNH 27907:1 (X2). Fig. 39.—Exterior of brachial valve showing the relatively few costae and their obsolescence on the umbo. AMNH 27907:1 (X2). Marcu 1955 STEHLI: PERMIAN RHYNCHONELLIDS 73 Fias. 1-39.—(See opposite page for explanation). 14 JOURNAL OF THE Genus Allorhynchus Weller, 1910 Discussion—Means for distinguishing this genus from other Mississipian rhynchonellids have been pointed out by Weller (1914, p. 197). There are few known Pennsylvanian or Permian genera with which Allorhynchus might be con- fused. It most nearly approaches Terebratuloidea from which it is distinguished by the presence of dental plates. It bears some resemblance to Uncinunellina ? pulchra Cooper from the middle Permian of Sonora, Mexico, but differs in the absence of concentric surface ornament and a brachial median septum. Allorhynchus ? permianus Stehli, n. sp. Figs. 18-31 Material.—This species is known from 15 more or less complete specimens and from 9 brachial and 11 pedicle valves. Holotype, AMNH 27905:5. Paratypes, AMNH 27905. Diagnosis.—Small subpentagonal rhyncho- nelliform shells. Pedicle valve slightly convex; sulcus shallow, arising near midlength and con- taining 3 through 4 costae; lateral slopes bearing 5 through 8 costae; beak long, not incurved; delthyrium mostly open, deltidial plates reduced to small triangular projections which may or may not meet above the brachial beak. Brachial valve moderately convex; fold generally low with 4 through 5 costae; beak short and hidden beneath that of the other valves. Both valves paucicostate with 15 to 20 fine angular costae extending to the beak; no other surface ornamentation is present. Pedicle interior with dental plates and large flat topped denticulate hinge teeth; position of muscle insertions uncertain. Brachial interior with a deeply divided hinge plate; median septum absent; crura long and recurved; sockets dentic- ulate; position of muscle insertions uncertain. Measurements in millimeters of seven speci- mens are as follows: WEVAvoos Gol 19 1G WhO Wd O38 BA WCW ccc. 109 m8 M7 iB 0.0 O68 7.0 Thickness... 6.8 7.0 6.6 8.4 5.7 5.6 5.5 Range:—Lower Getaway member of — the Cherry Canyon formation (Wordian). Discussion:—The generic reference of this species is made with some reservations for Allorhynchus is unknown in the Pennsylvanian, and in addition there are noteworthy differences between A. ? permianus and Mississippian species placed in the genus. Among these is the absence in A. ? permianus of concentric striae on the shell WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 45, NO. 3 surface and the presence of well developed dental plates and strong hinge teeth. In addition, some details of the morphology of the genotype are unknown and make comparison difficult. It is unknown, for instance, whether or not the teeth and sockets of A. heteropsis are denticulate. Should they prove not to be, A. ? permianus represents a new genus. MORPHOLOGY OF OTHER PERMIAN RHYNCHONELLIDS Leiorhynchoidea cloudi was described by Cooper (1953, p. 44) from the middle Permian of Sonora, Mexico. Additional material is present in the Getaway member of the Cherry Canyon formation in the Guadalupe Mountains, and though largely fragmentary shows excellent de- tail. The sockets in Cooper’s material did not show denticulation, but it is clearly present in the material at hand. Its absence in the Mexican specimens is probably due to poor preservation. Cooper noted that the dental plates were greatly reduced in his specimens. In the Guada- lupe Mountains specimens they are united in adults with the wall of the rostral cavity. In addi- tion to the muscle scars noted by Cloud (1944, p. 57) in Leiorhynchoidea, Guadalupe Mountains material shows in the rostral cavity the pair of small median pedicle muscle scars characteristic of modern rhynchonellids. The examination of a large number of speci- mens of various rhynchonellid species currently assigned to Wellerella and taken from various Permian horizons has shown that the teeth and sockets are denticulate. Insofar as I am aware, the nature of the teeth and sockets has not been ascertained for the genotype, W. tetrahedra, and the question deserves further study in the in- terests of achievement of a natural classification. REFERENCES y Birrner, A. Brachiopoden der Alpinen Trias. Abh. Geol. Reichs. 14: 1890. Croup, P. E. Jn R. E. King et al., Geology and paleontology of the Permian area northwest of Las Delicias, southwestern Coahuila, Mexico. Geol. Soc. Amer. Spec. Pap. 52. 1944. Cooprr, G. A. In Cooper et al., Permian fauna at El Antimonio, western Sonora, Mexico. Smith- sonian Mise. Coll. 119 (2). 1953. Coopger, G. A., and Wriuiams, A. The signifi- cance of the stratigraphic distribution of bra- chiopods. Journ. Pal. 26: 326-337. 1952. Girty,G.H. The Guadalupian fauna. U.S. Geol. Surv. Prof. Pap. 58. 1909. Wetter, S. The Mississippian Brachiopoda of the Mississippi Valley basin. Illinois State Geol. Surv. Monogr. 1. 1914. Marcu 1955 REINHARD: RHIZOCEPHALA 75 ZOOLOGY —Some Rhizocephala found on brachyuran crabs in the West Indian region. Epwarp G. ReinHaArb, Catholic University of America. The present paper contains notes on six species of the genus Sacculina which occur in the Gulf of Mexico and the Caribbean Sea. Two of these are described as new and are named Sacculina americana and Sac- eulina boschmai. The specimens reported on are chiefly recent accessions of the United States National Museum which were lent to the writer for study. The drawings (except Fig.1) were made by Miss Pei-Tsing Liu. In addition to the species treated here, there are two other members of the genus reported for the West Indian region. These are Sacculina hirsuta Boschma, which occurs on Pilumnus caribaeus and Pilumnus dasypodus (Boschma 1925, 1931; Reinhard 1950), and Sacculina schmitti Boschma 1933, 1950) known only from the type speci- ment found on Anomalothir furcillatus. Sacculina bicuspidata Boschma Fig. 1 Sacculina bicuspidata Boschma, 1931, pp. 342- 344, fig. 7, 1 (external appearance), fig. 31 (longitudinal sections), fig. 32 (external cuticle) ; 1937, pp. 212-213, fig. 8 (male organs and col- leteric glands). Type specimen on WMicrophrys bicornutus (Latreille). Tobago, British West Indies. Material examined.—Eastern shore, St. Thomas, Virgin Islands, St. Thomas Harbor, station 23, April 4, 1937; two specimens on two Microphrys bicornutus (Latreille). Smithsonian- Hartford Expedition. U.S.N.M. 92179. Gulf of Mexico, Oregon station 279, 29° 11’ N.., 86° 52.5’ W., 305 fathoms; February 24, 1950; one specimen on Trachycarcinus spinulifer Rathbun. U. 8. Fish and Wildlife Service coll. U.S.N.M. 92355. The larger of the two specimens from St. Thomas measures 5 mm in length, 5.5 mm in breadth, and 2 mm in thickness; the smaller one, 3 by 3 by 1.5 mm. In both cases the mantle open- ing is elevated but not conspicuously so. The pos- terior angles of the larger specimen are drawn out into lappets. The external cuticle bears delicate rugae resembling a fingerprint pattern. Both specimens have eggs in the mantle cavity and are therefore mature. Sections were made of the smaller specimen. The thick-walled, cylindrical testes, located out- side the visceral mass, are separate tubes of approximately equal size that merge gradually into short vasa deferentia. The vasa twist slightly near their terminations. A muscular sheath sur- rounds each testis. The colleteric glands are one or two rows in thickness with about 20 tubes visible in the most divided portion. The inner- most tubes, where the gland is thickest, form large sinuslike spaces. The specimen from Oregon station 279 meas- ures 5.5 mm in length, 6 mm in breadth, and 2 mm in thickness, dimensions which correspond almost exactly with those given for the type specimen. It is also similar to the type in having a straight posterior border and the mantle open- ing at the summit of a rather prominent tube. The testes occur in the stalk region in a muscular portion outside the visceral mass. They Fie. t.—Sacculina bicuspidata Boschma. Longi- tudinal section of parasite found on Microphrys bicornutus (Latreille). m. op., mantle opening; col. gl., colleteric gland; |. test.. left testis. 76 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON are approximately of the same size and compara- tively large and thick-walled. At first they are solid; a lumen appears only in the proximal half from which the vasa deferentia originate. They run a straight course close together, then later they touch but never become fused. The vasa deferentia appear gradually, run straight at first in a ventral direction, then di- verge to the right and left and become slightly twisted as they terminate on either side of the posterior tip of the visceral mass. The colleteric glands, located in the anterior half of the visceral mass, consist, in the main, of one row of tubes with a few large sinuses toward the interior. The maximum number of tubes seen in any one section is 20 to 22. The eggs in the visceral mass are extremely small and no embryos are present in the mantle cavity. This, in conjunction with the fact that the testes are in part solid, indicates an immature animal. DUALS PRERAZ TES RG TNS 1) y aw @ go) JU LQMWYALIS ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 45, No. 3 Sacculina americana, n. sp. Fig. 2 Cotypes.—Gulf of Mexico, Oregon station 319, 29° 20’ N., 87° 25’ W., April 28, 1951; four speci- mens on one T'rachycarcinus spinulifer Rathbun. U.S. Fish and Wildlife Service coll. U.S. N. M. 96988. Diagnosis—Sac broadest in anterior half, tapering to stalk posteriorly. Male genital organs outside the visceral mass. Testes globular, thin- walled, completely separated, one larger than the other. Vasa deferentia narrow, emerging abruptly from the testes. Colleteric glands shallow with a comparatively small number of tubes. External cuticle etched with short irregular branching grooves. Internal cuticle with retinacula consist- ing of one or two spindles, particularly abundant in the vicinity of the mantle opening. Description.—This species of Sacculina has a rather unusual shape. All four specimens are Fic. 2.—Sacculina americana, n. sp.: A, Longitudinal section; B, External appearance of the smallest specimen, X 3. C, External appearance of the largest specimen X 2. D, Longitudinal sections of the colleteric glands. E, Surface of the external cuticle. F, Retinacula. G, Series of transverse sections of the male genital organs starting from the distal end of the right testis (a) and ending with the proximal end of the left testis (7) and the vasa deferentia (g, h, 7). Marca 1955 broadest in the anterior half and taper gradually to the stalk. The prominent mantle opening, surrounded by a thick pad, is in the center of the anterior surface but turned to the left side. The smallest specimen measures 10 mm in length, 9 mm in breadth and 4 mm in thickness; the largest 15 by 13 by 5 mm. One parasite was treated with KOH for a study of the cuticulas and the largest member of the group was selected for sectioning. The external euticle has a thickness of 24 to 32u. Its surface is engraved with minute sinuous grooves that have short side branches. This pattern is broken by more widely spaced deeper grooves. In cross section the external cuticle has a ragged appear- ance and its surface takes a darker stain than the interior. The internal cuticle has sparse retinac- ula except in the vicinity of the mantle opening where they are extremely abundant and crowded together in islandlike groups. Each retinaculum consists of an elevation bearing one or two pointed spindles. The spindle measure 20 to 30y in length. The globular testes, located near the base of the stalk outside the visceral mass are thin-walled and lhe directly alongside each other. The right testis is noticeably larger and longer than the left, but spermatozoa are present in both. The slender vasa deferentia emerge from the upper end of the testes as straight tubes that quickly diverge in an antero-ventral direction and be- come slightly twisted as they terminate. The colleteric glands are shallow, with 20 to 23 tubes in the region of maximum division. They contain a chitin lining. Sacculina reniformis Boschma 1Dsex yy JANG 183, (GO Sacculina reniformis Boschma, 1933, p. 227, fig. 9 (external cuticle); 1937, pp. 300-301, fig. 75 (male organs and colleteric glands); 1950, p. 19, fig. 1, 1 (external appearance), fig. 6, (longitudinal section). Type specimen on Podochela riisei Stimpson, off Cape Sable, Fla. Material examined.—Gulf of Mexico, Oregon station 36; 28° 30’ N., 85° 36’ W., 120 fathoms; June 27, 1950; two specimens on two Collodes leptocheles Rathbun. U. 8. Fish and Wildlife Service coll. U.S. N. M. 91107. The larger specimen measures 4.5 mm _ in length, 7 mm in width and about 4 mm in thick- ness; the smaller one, 4 by 6 by 3.5 mm. Both are slightly larger than the type specimen. The man- REINHARD: RHIZOCEPHALA Oe tle opening, described in the type as lying ‘‘at the extremity of a very short, rather wide tube,” is relatively small and inconspicuous in these ex- amples, but protrudes a little above the surface. The presence of Liriopsid parasites in the mantle cavity of both specimens has apparently caused some distortion in the shape of the sacs. Their contour, although reniform, is somewhat angular. The external cuticle of both specimens is covered with small dentate excrescences about 6 to 8u in height. Except for the presence of a few short hairs on the tip and sides of these processes, they are exactly like those illustrated for the type specimen (Boschma, 19838, fig. 9). The numerous retinacula found on the internal cuticle are single spindles, extremely variable in size and shape and ranging from 14 to 35y in length. No retinacula were seen in the type speci- men, but failure to find them is not always proof that they do not exist. The testes lie outside the visceral mass in the posterior region of the body. They begin on the dorsal side of the animal not far from the edge of the stalk. At first they are completely fused so that there is only one lumen. Then two lumena appear, but the intervening walls remain united. Shortly after, without diverging, they gradually pass into the vasa deferentia that become smaller as they approach their terminations. The vasa deferentia are relatively short tubes, slightly coiled just before they terminate. The colleteric glands occur in the anterior half of the visceral mass and contain only a few tubes. About 10 tubes appear in the most divided por- tion of the gland. The glands project slightly from the surface of the visceral mass. Sacculina boschmai, n. sp. Figs. 3, 4 Type.—Gulf of Mexico, west coast of Florida, Albatross station 2401, 28° 38’ 30” N., 85° 53’ 30” W., 142 fathoms, March 14, 1885; one speci- men on Acanthocarpus alexandri Stimpson. Albatross coll. U.S. N. M. 96989. Diagnosis—Sac broadly oval, with greatest diameter along dorso-ventral axis; mantle open- ing and stalk prominent. Male genital organs outside visceral mass; testes cylindrical, separate; right testis enlarged, left rudimentary. Vasa deferentia slightly coiled at terminations. Col- leteric glands in anterior half of visceral mass with a moderate number of tubes. External cuticle of mantle with short papillae approximately 12 78 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES long, covered with minute hairs and staining more darkly than the rest of the cuticle. Retinac- ula consisting of a basal part and one or two smooth spindles about 15u long. Description —The parasite measures 9 mm in length, 12 mm in width and 5 mm in thickness. The sac, one-third broader than long, is convex at the anterior and posterior margins and strongly arched at the dorsal and ventral margins. The thick stalk arises from a depression on the left side of the animal near the posterior end. The mantle opening, also shifted slightly to the left, is at the center of the anterior surface opposite the stalk. It is encircled by a heavy ridge with prominent folds. In surface view the external cuticle has a rough “shark-skin”’ appearance due to innumerable ex- crescences set close together. These are short, pointed papillae or denticles, covered with minute hairs. The excrescences have a length of 10 to 15y and in sections it may be seen that they take a darker hematoxylin stain than the subsurface cuticle. For the most part, the external cuticle is 50 to 70u in thickness. Retinacula, consisting of a basal hump and 3 VOL. 45, No. 3 one or two smooth spindles, are present on the internal cuticle. They have a length of 14 to 17. The testes occur in the thick mesentery of the stalk region completely outside the visceral mass. The right testis is greatly enlarged while the left testis is rudimentary and attached to the wall of the right testis. Hach testis is surrounded by a muscular sheath. A peculiar feature of the histology of the right testis is the unusually large number of nutritive or supporting cells present. These are very large clear cells, one to three rows deep, around which the spermatocytes and spermatids are clustered. The functional testis has the shape of a wide cylindrical sac, tapering at both ends. The wall appears to be of rather delicate construction and presumably, because it lacks any firm tissue, yields to contractions in such a way that im cross-section this testis has an irregular rather than a smoothly rounded outline. The vasa deferentia emerge gradually from the ventral extremities of both testes. They are rather narrow tubes, straight for most of their course, becoming coiled only at their termina- tions. F Fig. 3.—Sacculina boschmai, n. sp.: A, Longitudinal section. B, Series of transverse sections of the male genital organs starting from the distal end of the right testis (a) and ending with the vasa defer- entia (h). The rudimentary left testis appears in c, d and e. C, Excrescences of the external cuticle. D, Longitudinal sections of the colleteric glands. , Retinacula. F, External appearance seen from the left side. Marcu 1955 PS ; ae REINHARD: RHIZOCEPHALA 79 Fic. 4.—Sacculina boschmai, n. sp. Photomicrograph showing the histological structure of the testes The colleteric glands occur in the anterior half of the visceral mass. Each gland consists of three rows of tubes. These are not gathered into com- partments. The maximum number of tubes seen in a cross-section of one gland is 24. The ovary of this specimen appears to be ex- hausted, but there are numberous eggs in the mantle cavity, particularly on the right side of the visceral mass, where the cavity is con- siderably more voluminous. At the exit from the mantle cavity the body wall increases more than three times in thickness where it forms thick folds around the mantle opening. A prominent sphincter muscle is present here and a series of blood lacunae occur in the space between the sphincter and the external cuticle. Remarks.—This is the specimen recorded by Rathbun (1937, p. 227) in her monograph on oxystomatous crabs, where it is referred to as “Peltogaster.” Sacculina pustulata Boschma Fig. 5, D Sacculina pustulata Boschma, 1925, pp. 11-12, text figs. 2 and 3 (external cuticle), pl. 2, fig. 2 (external appearance), fig. 6 (longitudinal sec- tion), fig. 7 (vas deferens); 1937, pp. 298-299, fig. 73 (male organs and colleteric gland). Type specimen on Hemus cristulipes A. Milne Edwards. Type locality: Spanish Water, Curagao. Material examined.—10 miles southeast of Alligator Point, Franklin County, Fla., 6 fathoms, November 28, 1952; one specimen on Hemus cristulipes A. Milne Edwards. M. L. Wass coll. U.S. N. M. 94050. This is a very small parasite, although fully mature. It has a length of 2 mm, a breadth of 2 mm, and a thickness of 1 mm. In external ap- pearance it agrees with Boschma’s description of the somewhat larger type specimen both with respect to shape and to the fact that the eggs in the mantle cavity are visible through the thin mantle and impress upon it a hexagonal pattern. The testes are completely separated, unequal in size, and located outside the visceral mass. The short vasa deferentia become quite narrow and contorted near their terminations and have a heavy chitin lining. The colleteric glands have few tubes. The host, a small crab measuring only 5.5 mm in carapace length and 4.0 mm in carapace width, shows marked effects of sacculinization. It is a modified male with prominent copulatory pleopods but possessing additional pleopods of the female type and a broad abdomen. 80 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Sacculina rathbunae Boschma Fig. 5, E Sacculina rathbunt Boschma, 1933, pp. 222-223, fig. 4 (external cuticle); 1937, pp. 299-800, fig. 74 (male organs and colleteric gland). Sacculina rathbunae Boschma, 1950, pp. 9-10, fig. 1, d (external appearance). Type specimen on Arachnopsis filipes Stimp- son, west coast of Florida. Material examined.—Los Roques Islands, Venezuela, one specimen on one Stenorynchus seticornis (Herbst). Sociedad de Sciencas Natura- les La Salle coll. U.'S.N.M. 195031. This new host belongs to the same family (Majidae) and subfamily (Inachinae) as the host of the type specimen. ike. A ie SESS URS ff () B Osan fl ae () DW 2 5 Fie. 5.—A-C, Sacculina reniformis Boschma. A, External appearance X 5. B, Excrescences of the external cuticle, surface view. C, Types of retinacula. D, External appearance of Sacculina pustulata Boschma X 12. E, External appearance of Sacculina rathbunae Boschma X 15. The parasite is a small one, measuring only 1.5 mm in length, 2.56 mm in breadth and 1 mm in thickness. The dorsal and ventral margins form nipplelike prominences and the term “‘lozenge- shaped,”’ applied to the type specimen, is also appropriate here. Sections of this animal revealed that it con- forms to the type specimen with respect to the VOL. 45, No. 3 male genital organs. The testes, equal in size, are separate, although in part contiguous and are located in the visceral mass close to the mesen- tery. They are straight and gradually pass into vasa deferentia, comparatively narrow tubes that also run a straight course. The colleteric glands are made up of a small number of tubes, 5 to 10 in most sections, ar- ranged in a single row. One gland, however, in the region of maximum division, has 12 tubes forming a double row. The specimen is a juvenile one, with the mantle cavity appearing as a mere cleft. The sac was still enveloped by the thin chitinous sheath which covers young rhizocephalids previous to the un- veiling of the mantle opening. This loose sheath was removed before sectioning the animal and beneath it were found four ecypris larvae. They were attached to the inner surface of the sheath near the anterior end. A collection of cypris larvae fixed to a young sacculinid under similar circumstances was observed by Boschma (1931, p. 367) in the case of Loxothylacus panopei (Gissler). LITERATURE CITED Boscuma, H. Rhizocephala of Curacao. Dier Kunde 24: 2-14. 1925. Rhizocephala. Papers from Dr. Th. Mortensen’s Pacific Expedition, 1914-16. Vid. Medd. Dansk Naturh. Foren. 89: 297-380. 1931. Bijd. New Species of Sacculinidae in the collec- tion of the United States National Museum. Tijdschr. dierk. Ver. (Leiden) 3: 219-241. 1933. The species of the genus Sacculina. Zool. Mededeel. (Leiden) 19: 187-328. 1937. Notes on Sacculinidae, chiefly in_ the collections of the United States National Museum. Zool. Verhand. (Leiden) no. 7: 3-55. 1950. Rarusun, M. J. Oxystomatous and allied crabs of America. U.S. Nat. Mus. Bull. 166. 1937. RemnHARD, £. G. Two species of Lernaeodiscus (Crustacea: Rhizocephala) from North Carolina and Florida. Proc. Helm. Soc. Washington 17: 126-131. 1950. Marca 1955 NEMATOLOGY —A new nematode, Rotylenchus melancholicus, 7. LORDELLO: NEW NEMATODE 81 sp., found associated with grass roots, and its sexual dimorphism. Luiz Gonzaca E. Lor- DELLO, Escola Superior de Agricultura ‘“‘Luiz de Queiroz,’ Universidade de Sao Paulo, Piracicaba, Brazil. (Communicated by G. Steiner.) A new species of the genus Rotylenchus Filipjev, 1934, was obtained among several hundred other nemas from soil sample sub- mitted for examination and collected at the Escola Superior de Agricultura “Luiz de Queiroz” of the University of Sao Paulo, Piracicaba, Brazil. This species is of par- ticular imterest because of its outspoken sexual dimorphism. Rotylenchus melancholicus, n. sp. Male—Body slightly tapering to anterior extremity and more sharply posteriorly to an elongate and ventrally arcuated tail. Cuticle weakly transversely annulated; lateral fields made up of four incisures extending from the level of the stylet to the tail, being 3.3u wide at the middle of the body. Head cupolate and prac- tically continuous with neck contour, bearing extremely faint annules. Cephalic and cervical papillae and amphids not seen. Stylet weak and without basal knobs; oesophageal glands well defined, their posterior limit lying at 108u from the head. Intestinal cells filled with dark and granulated bodies. Testis one, spicules ventrally arcuated and slightly cephalated; gubernaculum curved, well defined. As far as seen, the bursa is represented only by a faint membrane, which does not comprise all the tail. Therefore, the bursa is vestigial and really in process of disap- pearence. Phasmids very pronounced and located on the middle of the tail or a little in front. Excretory pore located as in the female. Female—Body forming a more or less open spiral, shghtly tapermg at extremities. Cuticle strongly annulated; annules convex. Lateral fields made up of three more or less undulated incisures extending from the region of the stylet to a little below the middle bulb of the esophagus. At that point, the central incisure bifurcates and the fields continue to tail terminus with four equidistant incisures. At terminus, the two external incisures join, as illustrated; location of the union of the two middle incisures not deter- mined. At level of vulva, the lateral fields are 4.3-5.0u wide. Head cupolate, bearing four post labial annules, contmuous with neck contour. Stylet quite strong, very slightly curved, with somewhat compressed knobs. Vestibulum wall thickened, providing well defined guiding tube for stylet and base for attachment of muscles that move the stylet. Tissues surrounding the oesopha- geal canal with a slight constriction a little in front of the fusion with middle bulb. This bulb is elongate and smal], being 9-10u long and 6-Su wide. Outlet of dorsal oesophageal gland very obscure, its exact location not made out. Details of junction of oesophagus with intestine also difficult to see. Dorsal gland well developed, overlapping intestine. Its posterior end lies at about 103 from head end. Intestine opaque; intestinal cells filled with granulated substance. Ovaries two, outstretched, equally developed, each bearing a well defined and spherical re- ceptaculum seminis, usually filled with sper- matozoa. Vagina extending almost half way across body. No eggs seen in uterus; oocytes forming a single line, except at the end portion, where a double line is seen. The reproductive apparatus of female of R. melancholicus has about the same organization as that figured by Goodey (1940) for R. erythrinae (Zimmermann, 1904) Goodey, 1951. Tail ventrally arcuated, comprising from 9 to 10 annules, with a pomted and not annulated ter- minus. Phasmids located at level of anus or in front. Measurements —Male: total length = 422.0— 471.54; width = 13.3-15.0 yu; stylet = 10.0u; tail = 25.0-28.0u; spicules = 18.3-20.0u; gubernaculum = 8.84; a = 31.7; b= ?; c= 16.7-16.8. Female: total length =514.6-533.0 uy; width = 18.3-21.6u; stylet = 23.3-25.0u; tail = 21.64; a= 24.6-28.1; bi= 7.5-7.6; ¢ = 23.8- 24.6; V = 61.6-62.3 percent. Diagnosis—The long and deeply ventrally arcuated tail of the male, with only a rudimentary bursa, separates R. melancholicus n. sp. from all the other known species. The female has simi- larities with that of R. erythrinae (Zimmermann, 1904) Goodey, 1951, and of Helicotylenchus nannus Steiner, 1945. The separation of the female from R. erythrinae can be made by the total length (R. melancholicus isa smaller species, 514-533 uv: 610-920) and by the longer tail (c = 41-64: c= 23.8-24.6); actually, those differences could be considered 82 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES insufficient if the male tails were not so diverse. In addition, R. erythrinae male has a normal stylet while in R. melancholicus this organ is somewhat degenerated. From H. nannus, the female of R. melancholicus differs by the presence of a receptaculum seminis in the two branches of the amphidelphic sexual apparatus, and by its longer tail (¢c = 37-41: ¢ = 23.8-24.6). Type locality —Grounds of the Escola Superior de Agricultura “Luiz de Queiroz,” Piracicaba, State of Sao Paulo, Brazil, living possibly as parasites of the roots of grasses not identified. Taig: pill i I " |) fay) ‘a } if /y 1 Fi al | rH, 15U VOL. 45, NO. 3 Sexual dimorphism.—The general structure appears to be the only common character of the two sexes. Since the individuals were collected together on the same day and they were the only tylenchids present among hundreds of other nemas, the writer considers them as of the same species. The male has a longer tail and is smaller, and more slender than the female. The most interest- ing feature, however, is the degenerated stylet, which in the female is quite strong and possesses very well developed knobs. The visible guiding Fic. 1.—Rotylenchus melancholicus n. sp.: A, esophagus of female; B, head of male; C, tail end of female vi (ph, phasmid); D, tail end of male (rud brs, rudimentary bursa; ph, phasmid); #, male; F, female. Marcu 1955 ease of the female stylet could not be seen in the male, and it is quite possible that it is not pres- ent; the protrudor muscles are also much less developed in the latter. The oesophagus of the male, being very ob- seure, could not be studied in all the desired de- tails. According to the writer’s opinion, the re- duced stylet does not mean that the males do not feed during the adult stage, since in one of the individuals of that sex three normal salivary elands were plainly visible. This supposition that the male does not cease to feed after developing into the adult stage is in opposition to what has been supposed for some other tylenchids (e. g., Neatylenchus abulbosus Stemer, 1931) (Steimer and Buhrer, 1932). R. melancholicus males are undoubtly func- tional, not only for having normal spicules and testis, but also for the presence of abundant spermatozoa filling the female receptaculum seminis. NEWMAN: NEW SALAMANDER FROM VIRGINIA 83 Another interesting feature of sexual dimor- phism may be found in the location of the phas- mids which, in the male, are on the tail but, in the female, at level with the anus or a little in front. LITERATURE CITED Fiurpyev, I. N. The classification of the free-living nematodes and their relation to the parasitic nematodes. Smithsonian Misc. Coll. 89 (6): 1-63. 1934. Goopry, T. OnAnguillulina multicincta (Cobb) and other species of Anguillulina associated with the roots of plants. Journ. Helm. 18 (1): 21-88. 1940. Soil and freshwater nematodes, a mono- graph. London, 1951. STEINER, G. Helicotylenchus, a new genus of plant-parasitic nematodes and its relationships to Rotylenchus Filipjev. Proc. Helm. Soc. Washington 12 (2): 34-88. 1945. STEINER, G., and BuHreEerR, E.M. The male of the nematode species Neotylenchus abulbosus, Steiner, and its sexual dimorphism. Journ. Washington Acad. Sci. 22 (16-17): 482-484. 1932. HERPETOLOGY .—Desmognathus planiceps, a new salamander from Virginia. Water B. Newman, Hyattsville, Md. (Communicated by Doris M. Cochran.) During the course of herpetological investigations along the southern portion of the Blue Ridge in Virginia a number of very interesting specimens and records were obtained. Among the salamanders collected was a series of 19 Desmognathus that pos- sessed such unique characteristics and coloration that I feel that they are justifiably nameworthy and therefore propose that this new salamander be called: Desmognathus planiceps, n. sp. Diagnosis —A large, heavy-bodied Desmog- nathus with the following characteristics: broad, flattened head; spatulate and strongly depressed snout; enlarged and recurved premaxillary teeth in adult males; conspicuous, and normally straight-edged, dorsal band sharply margined with blackish; chest and anterior two-thirds of belly immaculate; chin, throat, and posterior third of belly lightly spotted with brownish-tan. Holotype—An adult male collected by Richard L. Hoffman and Walter B. Newman on May 12, 1951, from a portion of the stream (approximate elevation 2800 feet) dropping down into the gorge below the Dan River Dam near Meadows of Dan, Patrick County, Va. This specimen is at present in the personal collection of the author (WBN 1316), but it will eventually be deposited in the U. 8. National Museum. Paratypes—One topotype, WBN 1318, in addition to the holotype, was collected from the Dan River gorge on May 12, 1951, by Richard L. Hoffman and Walter B Newman. Four topotypes, WBN 1322-4, were collected from this same site by Richard L. Hoffman, Walter B. Newman, and Jaine P. Newman on May 30, 1951. Five paratypes, WBN 1826-9, 1331, were col- lected in a mountain stream (approximate elevation 2,400 feet) along Route 8, 5.5 miles northwest of Woolwine, Patrick County, Va., by Richard L. Hoffman, Walter B. Newman, and Jaine P. Newman on May 30, 1951. Eight ad- ditional paratypes, WBN 1332-9, were collected from the same locality on August 27, 1951, by Richard L. Hoffman and Walter B. Newman. Description of holotype-—Snout spatulate; sides of head from anterior corner of eye to angle of jaw nearly parallel; cheeks noticeably swollen; head strongly depressed, sloping abruptly from the eyes to tip of snout; a short vertical groove from angle of jaw to a sinuous groove extending from the eye to the vertical extension of the gular 84. JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON fold; tip of jaw with pointed mental gland; body broad, heavy, and quite flattened, with a distinct and impressed median dorsal line; tail subquad- rate in section near base, becoming slightly keeled above and rounded below posteriorly; posterior half of tail wanting. Legs stout, toes 4-5, those of the forefeet 1-4-2-3 in order of length from shortest to longest, hind feet 1-5-2-3-4; webbing between toes scarcely evident. Tongue roughly diamond-shaped in outline, shortened behind, free at sides and behind, the surface spongy. Vent slightly raised and papillate. Costal grooves 14, counting one each in the axilla and groin; inter- costal grooves 4. All measurements are in millimeters. Tip of snout to anterior angle of vent, 62; tail ?; greatest width of body, 13; greatest height of body, 9; axilla to groin, 36; greatest width of tail, 7; greatest height of tail, 7; tip of snout to gular ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 45, NO. 3 fold, 17; tip of snout to anterior insertion of fore- limb, 20; greatest width of head, 13; width of head measured at anterior angle of eye, 10; eye, measured from anterior to posterior corners, 2.1; forelimb, measured from insertion of limb to tip of longest toe, 11.5; hindlimb, similarly meas- ured, 16; vomerine teeth absent; parasphenoid teeth in two broad patches that meet anteriorly and diverge posteriorly, being nearly uniform in width throughout their entire length. The dorsum is characterized by a_ broad, straight-edged, reddish-brown dorsal band, sharply bordered with blackish, that originates on the head slightly anterior to the vertical ex- tension of the gular fold and continues onto the tail, where it becomes abruptly reddish and serrated above the posterior angle of the vent. Irregular brownish-black blotches are present within the band tending to congregate along the TFra@. 1.—Lateral, ventral, and dorsal aspect of Desmognathus planiceps, n. sp., type specimen. Photo- graphs courtesy of the Smithsonian Institution. ; Marcy 1955 NEWMAN: NEW _middorsal line. A pair of conspicuous whitish- } yellow spots are present in the outer edge of the band above the insertion of the forelimb. The dorsal surface of the head is reddish-brown up to the eyes, where there is a pronounced line of _ demarcation between this point and the light tan snout. A conspicuous black spot is centered on ~ the posterior portion of the head. The sides are mottled with brownish and whitish-gray which stops rather abruptly at the outer edge of the belly. Along the sides of the tail there is a row of dark-bordered light spots. The throat is 1- - regularly spotted with tan. The chest is im- -maculate; the belly immaculate to a_ point _ anterior to the hindlimbs, where it becomes lightly spotted with tan. Variation —Of the 18 paratypes collected, 12 were marked like the holotype. Of the remaining six specimens, two have a completely spotted yentrum but a typically marked dorsum, whereas three individuals have a grayish-brown mottling that partially or wholly obscures the dorsal band and another has only a few scattered dark spots to indicate this band and lacks much of the heavy mottling along the sides. The latter four speci- mens all have typically marked ventrums. All specimens have 14 costal grooves. Inter- costal grooves vary from 3 to 5 (average 4) with the larger individuals generally exhibiting the larger number. Vomerine teeth are lacking in large adult males. The largest male with vomer- ine teeth measures 42 mm in snout-vent length. When present, the number of teeth in males varies from 4 to 13 (mean 8.0). The only two females collected measure 47 and 50 mm in snout-vent length and have 11 and 18 vomerine teeth, respectively. Although only two females were found, counts and measurements do seem to indicate that vomerine teeth are retained in adult females and also that they possess a greater number of teeth than the young males. Adult males have a distinctly pointed mental gland and this is probably the quickest and easiest method of distinguishing between the two sexes. Size—This is one of the larger Desmognathus with adult males attaining an estimated total length of 128 mm or more. Unfortunately, the three largest adults, all males, have missing or regenerated tails, and so the extreme total length is an estimated figure based on proportional tail length percentages. The largest specimen with a complete tail measures 120 mm in total length. SALAMANDER FROM VIRGINIA 85 This specimen has a snout-vent length of 58 mm, while the largest snout-vent measurement of 18 specimens is 63 mm. The smallest individual found has a snout-vent length of 20 mm and a total length of 41 mm. The snout-vent length of the 10 largest adults varies from 47 to 63 mm (mean 55.8 mm). Remarks.—The spatulate snout, sharply de- fined dorsal band, and tan spotting of the ventrum separates this species readily from the other large Desmognathus, such as D. quad- ramaculatus, and the subspecies of D. fuscus and D. monticola. The aquatic habits, large size, and heavy body distinquishes D. planiceps from the remaining smaller and more terrestrial forms of this genus. D. planiceps could be confused with Leurognathus because of its flattened head, but the inconspicuous inner naris, compressed tail, and absence of a premaxillary fontanelle of the latter quickly separates the two forms. D. planiceps, being similar in structure and habits to the more primative forms of Desmogna- thus, presents an interesting evolutionary prob- lem, but I do not consider it to be within the scope of this paper to try to theorize or evaluate the possible relationships that planiceps has to the existing known species of this genus. This undoubtedly requires a review of the whole group before a reasonable and sensible picture can be presented properly. Habits and habitat—In both localities D. planiceps was taken from cool, heavily shaded, mountain streams and was extremely active when discovered. In most instances D. planiceps and D. quadramaculatus were found to inhabit rocky areas in the shallow, fast-flowing water, while D. monticola and D. fuscus were more frequently found under rocks and debris along the edges. Nothing is known of the breeding habits of this species, but a gravid female collected August 27, measuring 47 mm in snout-vent length, con- tained 19 large, yolk-laden eggs measuring 2 to 4 mm. in diameter. Range—Apparently restricted to mountain streams in the southern portion of the Blue Ridge in Virginia. REFERENCES Bisuop, 8S. C. Handbook of salamanders: xiv + 555 pp., 144 figs., 56 maps. Ithaca, N. Y., 1943. Dunn, E. R. The salamanders of the family Plethodontidae. Smith College Anniv. Publ: i-xii + 441 pp., 86 figs., 3 pls. 1926. 86 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON Porr, C. H. Notes on North Carolina sala- manders, with especial reference to the egg- laying habits of Leurognathus and Desmog- nathus. Amer. Mus. Nov. no. 153: 1-15, 2 figs. 1924. Some plethodontid salamanders from ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 45, NO. 3 | North Carolina and Kentucky, with the descrip- tion of a new race of Leurognathus. Amer. Mus. Novy. no. 306: 1-19, 1 fig. 1928. Souter, E. I. On the status of the family Desmog- nathidae. Univ. Kansas Sci. Bul. 33: pt. 2. (12): 459-480, 2 pls. 1950. PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY 57th ANNUAL MEETING The 57th Annual Meeting and dinner of the Academy was held at the Kennedy-Warren on the evening of January 20, 1955. After dinner President DrEranporF called the meeting to order. The minutes of the 56th Annual Meeting, as published in the JourNAL 44: 157— 163, May 1954, were approved. Tn lieu of the usual reports of officers and com- mittees the President presented a brief summary of the activities of the Academy during the year. The complete reports of the officers and com- mittee chairman follow: REPORT OF THE SECRETARY As of January 1, 1955, the membership of the Academy was 961, a net gain of 28 members during the year. The membership includes 855 active members, of which 675 are resident, 96 retired members, and 10 honorary members. Eleven members resigned, 9 were dropped for nonpayment of dues, and 3 were transferred to the retired list. The deaths of 17 members were reported to the Secretary since the last Annual Meeting: Armin O. Leuscuner, April 22, 1953; Francis WH. Fox, December 29, 1953; FRANK WeENNER, Febru- ary 7, 1954; Cuarutes L. Maruarr, March 3, 1954; Tuomas P. PEnpLETON, May 28, 1954; James S. Simmons, July 31, 1954; Joun C. Huspsarp, Aug- ust 2, 1954; Davin Farrcuttp, August 6, 1954; D. Breese Jonns, September 5, 1954; Samurn W. Boaas, September 14, 1954; Norman C. Fasserr, September 14, 1954; Grorer H. SHULL, September 29, 1954; Raymonp F. Bacon, October 14, 1954; Austin H. Cuarxk, October 28, 1954; Vera K. CuHarites, November 2, 1954; E. B. Bascock, December 8, 1954; and Cornetius J. CONNOLLY. The Board of Managers held nine meetings during the year to transact the regular business of the Academy. A new standing committee, the Committee on Science Education, was authorized and appointed for the purpose of improving the teaching of science in the schools of the metro- politan area (see JOURNAL 44(12): 403. 1954). The District of Columbia Branch of the American Meteorological Society was affiliated with the Academy by action of the Board at the April meeting. Seven regular meetings were held during the year in addition to the Annual Meeting as follows: On February 18, 1954, the speakers were the recipients of the 1953 Academy Awards for Scientific Achievement. BrRNARD HoRECKER spoke on An oxidative pathway for the metabolism of carbohydrates; Ropert Henry on Mechanized production of electronics; and Joun R. PELLAM on Properties of matter at low temperatures. The meeting of March 18, 1954, was held jointly with the Washington Branch of the Society of American Bacteriologists. Dr. HENRY Wetcu, Department of Health, Education, and Welfare, delivered a lecture on Antibiotics in 1954. On April 15, 1954, the meeting of the Academy was held jointly with the Washington Junior Academy of Sciences. Certificates of Merit were presented to selected high school students. Two talks were given by members of the Junior Academy: Study in allergy by Mary JEANNE Kreex, and Spectrographic determination of intermediate products in catalytic reactions by AuAN Freperic Havueut. Dr. Wiriiam F. Fosuac, U. 8. National Museum, Smithsonian Institution, presented an unusually interestirig color film and lecture on The life and death of a volcano. The meeting of May 20, 1954, was held at the Army Map Service. The program included a discussion of the Army Map Service and an opportunity to see the Niovac in operation. On October 21, 1954, members of the Academy were guests of The Johns Hopkins University Applied Physics Laboratory, Howard County, Md. The new building was open for inspection, and a subscription dinner was served prior to the meeting. Dr. Rauepu E. Gipson, director, spoke Marcu 1955 on The objectives of the Applied Physics Labora- tory, SAMUEL N. FonER on Mass spectrometry of fast reactions, and RatpH A. ALPHER on Theories of element origin. On November 18, 1954, Dr. Konrap LORENZ, director, Research Institute for Comparative Ethology, Max Planck Institute, Bulden, West- phalen, Germany, addressed the Academy on Mechanisms and Releasers in Animal Behavior. The meeting of December 16, 1954, was ar- ranged by the Committee on Science Education for a discussion of Problems of science education. The speakers were Dr. D. Kennet Lirrte, dep- uty Commissioner of Education, U. 8. Depart- ment of Health, Education, and Welfare, and Dr. Derey W. Bronk, President, National Academy of Sciences. Leaders in education in the metro- politan area were guests of the Academy at a dinner preceding the meeting. Each guest was introduced and asked to speak briefly. The dinner was also attended by members of the Board of Managers and the Committee on Science Edueation. Jason R. SwWALLEN REPORT OF THE TREASURER The Treasurer submits the following report concerning the finances of the Washington Academy of Sciences for the year ended December 31, 1954: RECEIPTS ID WES; IE a oe $ 22.00 NOSS 2 Ss Sieoee eee 198 .92 OGth sai ot guceen eral 4,416.25 NOES 5:6 Sets Ae cree 92.00 $ 4,729.17 Journal, Subscriptions, 1949...... 6.75 GEO) cas oc 14.25 LOST ee: 29.25 1952 Rae 36.75 1953 eee 73.50 NO Are 772.89 NOBBs ceo 5 762.55 1OBB. sec + 18.56 1,714.50 Reprints, 1953.......... 544.11 TGs ene eee 1,330.84 1,874.95 SUG. “0.5. alie GRR eee TE ene 532.68 Momogtrajoln NOs Woncsaocneseesses cee 31.90 Romina JONG < acuuaedieodd tacoma] 386.25 De CEO eC ete oe tae 1.50 Interest & Dividends, OB S\s cies ouleth eee eciaeene 49.20 OYE 5 ie a east A ort cor 2,038 .50 2,087.70 PROCEEDINGS: THE ACADEMY Junior Academy—Dues Science Fair, Sth 720.00 500.00 ANaMEM CHINN S oo cae occa es oe nosensus Transferred from invested funds. ... Seman Gt IBOMGIS. ss6cccasnuctoncodned Meetings Committee................ Outlaweducheckstee eae eee Credit memos and overpayments. ... MOT Rey eee eek ara Cash-book balance as of Jan. 1, 1954 Total to be accounted for....... DISBURSEMENTS 1953 1954 Secretary’s Oficesaeee $ 728.51 Treasurer’s Omcen oe $ 20.62 201.60 Subscription Manager and Custo- dian of Publications 6.38 Salese aati: 7.89 Monograph INO Sik 0.92 Directory, 34 Ghee 2.05 BHI, bo bceee 27.65 Junior Acad- emy: Meetings... 17.36 222 .00 Directory... 61.25 Junior Acad- emy Direc- CORY onyaecn: 122.50 Science Calen- CARs sake bon 75.00 Science Edu- cation Com- mittee. ..... 63.01 Meetings Committee.. 66.37 457 .04 Journal Printing and Mail- TM. Sob ee 698 .52 5,341 .27 Tlustra- TONS Eee 73.78 672.86 Reprints.... 233 .05 914.48 Office: Editorial INSBWWae oc 40.00 440 .00 Miscel- laneous. 1.47 30.44 Science Fair— Stiae-eus secs 1,409.74 Forty-year In- Gh Z. tiachtes ha 5,987 .08 OL 3.41 88 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON Annual Dinner 358 .00 358 .00 Transferred to Invested Funds...... 4,512.40 4,512.40 Debit memos & refunds 11.70 11.70 Totals.... $1,151.17 $21,653.77 $22,804.94 Cash-book balance, as of Dec. 31, L954 ees: 5,360.28 Total ac- counted for $28, 165.22 RECONCILIATION OF BANK BALANCE Cash-Book Balance, Dee. 31, 1954... $ 5,360.28 Balance as per bank Statementhcmemeauee ce ce $5, 540.52 Receipts not deposited... 53 .32 5,593 .84. Checks outstand- ing, INOS OO Mes tees 70.00 INOLSGiee Aaa SB20 INOMSTEen cree 160.31 233 .56 5,360.28 INVESTMENTS Potomac Electric Power Co. Certificate No. TAO 1977, 40 shares 3.6% pref. @ $43.00...... $ 1,720.00 City of New York 3% (Transit Unifica- tion) Certificate No. Di ZOUS SMe tA bosses $500 .00 CHM03Sh acer eee: 100.00 (OEVAIOR eS since eiarattesas 100.00 OWN Descscaravdesccs 100.00 800.00 United States Government Series G Bonds: No. M 1808741 G......... $1,000.00 M 2226088 G......... 1,000.00 M 2982748 G......... 1,000.00 M 4126041 G......... 1,000.00 IME GANGS Ci. cc ces 6 1,000.00 Wit BBY, Geo Sse bode 1,000.00 6,000.00 Massachusetts Investors Trust S45shanesh@21-09 san ee aaaeiee 23,651.55 Investment Co. of America S60rshanrest @setsto- meee eae 7,172.40 State Street Investment Corporation 108 shares @ $70.00............... 7,560.00 Washington Mutual Investors Fund 380 shares @ $14.62............... 5,555.60 American Security & Trust Co. Savanes Accountant eee aes eee 161.52 Ro taller eee oe fee eee eee cere ee $52,621.07 ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 45, NO. 3 Cash-book balance as of Dec. 31, 5,360.28 57,981.35 50, 523.63 $ 7,457.72 At the close of business December 31, 1954, there were 53 members who were delinquent—a decrease of 6 from the number reported a year ago. Howarp 8S. RaPpPLEYE REPORT OF THE AUDITING COMMITTEE We the undersigned have audited all the books of the Treasurer and found them completely in order as reported by the Treasurer. The securities, kept in a safe-deposit box in the vaults of the Union Trust Co., have been ex- amined and found to be as listed in the Treasurer’s report. All coupons not yet due are still attached to the bonds so listed. JosEepH P. E. Morrison, Chairman GALEN B. ScHUBAUER Eesrert H. WALKER REPORT OF THE ARCHIVIST The records of the Washington Academy of Sciences in the possession of the Archivist have been maintained status quo during the year just past. They have been available for reference by officers and others concerned. Additional ma- terials turned over to the Archivist during the year by the Secretary are in process of being curated. JoHN A. STEVENSON REPORT OF THE BOARD OF EDITORS Volume 44 of the JourNAL contains 408 numbered pages, a decrease of 28 pages from volume 48, reflecting the 8 percent decrease in the JouRNAL budget for 1954, which was approved by the Board of Managers. The 69 scientific papers published in Volume 44 include: Field No. Papers No. Pages Various phases of zoology........... 38 12346 Geology and its branches.......... 8 3614 Botamyntsecisad smcioak oe sree 6 27 Mathematics . a Be eaas 5 18 PHYSICS efi cio Ce rSer aE Se stress 4 55 Biolog yer ere en ciene ee ae: F 3 22 Anthropologymerreence ere cere 2 16 IBiochemisthyeeee eee ree eee eee 2 20 Biography (scientific) ........... : 2 9 Geography and cartography........ 1 13 Marcu 1955 As in previous years the number of articles in the physical sciences submitted for JouRNAL publication was small. About 50 percent of the published papers were written by Academy members. The November issue was a special one dedicated to the American explorers Meriwether Lewis and William Clark, in honor of the 150th anniversary of their voyage of discovery. A series of articles, written by specialists upon invitation, appraised the explorers’ contributions to several sciences. Proceedings of the Academy for 1953 and 1954 and of the affiliated Anthropological Society, one obituary, and an Index to Volume 44 also were published. Members of the Board of Editors actively cooperated with the Chairman of President DEFANDORF’s Special Committee on the Improve- ment of the Journal both by supplying facts regarding current editorial policies and pro- cedures and by suggesting ways in which the publication might be improved. Cost of Volume 44 was as follows: Disbursements: Printing, engraving, mailing ete.................... $6,655.43 Reprints (authors separates) aye 981.57 Editorial office (including postage)................. 512.13 Mortalndispursements/scr2 ys ses mesireen cates o- $85 149513 Charves to authors: 1,613.32 Net cost to Academy. ........ . $6,535.81 The Board of Editors gratefully acknowledges the help of the Board of Managers, of Mr. Paun H. OFHSER, managing editor, and of Mr. FRaNcIs C. Harwoop, of the Waverly Press, Inc. JoHN C. Ewers, Senior Editor RicHarp K. Cook FENNER A. CHACE REPORT OE CUSTODIAN AND SUBSCRIPTION MANAGER OF PUBLICATIONS Once again I am happy to submit in brief form the Annual Report for the year 1954 of the Office of Custodian and Subscription Manager of Publications. Nonmember Subscriptions In the United States and possessions........ 161 iinmefoneremicountries: 55. 52.2.45.-5sssnteaee 89 “TOU oo. 2.2g; Bite RRA ee eee ee a in 250 Although on paper this is a gain of only three over last year’s number of subscriptions, actually the gain was greater, as the Treasurer has struck from the list a number of deadwood subscrip- tions, ones who have not sent in payments for a number of years. PROCEEDINGS: THE ACADEMY 89 Inventory of stock as of December 31, 1954 Reserve sets of the Journal Complete sets, vols. 144............... 0 sets Wolummes tli 44 ee nea gee eeioue ihc eys s 6 sets Wolumess| 644s. eee kc ee . 14 sets Wiolwmies e214 rive qpeenns <teilaecis ea stoasates 5 sets Total sets more or less complete. .... 25 sets Back numbers of the Journal Numbers held in complete sets......... 0 Numbers held in reserve for complete SEUSH ARN ee Ser emer rey Ceara Ben te 10,305 Numbers held for individual sale....... PMO Gall Sete pare eee Mech nc eta eer nee ea Proceedings Complete sets (volumes 1-13)....... ... 45 sets Monograph No. 1 Onicinaleissuesayst cee ee 1,010 Copies sold or distributed in previous COU war emanations se aide oa: 212 Copiestsoldinglo see ee eae 12 Total sold or distributed.......... 224 224 Number of copies on hand............ 786 Index to Journal and Proceedings, 1899-1950 Oxicinalgissiece se sat ee ea ee 1,013 (CopiestsoldpinylO54erneee eee 56 Copies distributed (editor, archivist, subscription manager)............ 3 Total sold or distributed.......... 59 59 Number of copies on hand............ 954 * It was again impossible to make the contem- plated recount of these numbers. This will be done this year in connection with the reorganization of the stock. Sales During the year 1954 one set, comprising volumes 11-42 was sold to the Library of the Bureau of Entomology of the California Depart- ment of Agriculture. In addition, 22 volumes and 71 individual numbers were sold of the Journal, totaling 353 individual numbers. This represents an increase of about 200 numbers sold over those sold last year. A complete set of the Proceedings and 21 indi- vidual numbers were sold during 1954. Three copies of the Directory were also sold. There was a continuing though small demand for copies of Monograph No. 1 during 1954. As a matter of fact 12 copies were sold, as compared with 9 sold during 1953. Nevertheless, thought 90 should be given to increasing the sale of this book, possibly at a reduced price. As is evident from the figures given above, 56 copies of the Index to the Proceedings and the first 40 volumes of the Journal were sold. Of these 5 were sold to members, 42 directly to libraries, and 9 through dealers. During the first quarter of the coming year (1955) the direct-mailing ad- vertising campaign to sell the Index to libraries, authorized by the Board of Managers, will be initiated. Once again members were very cooperative in turning back to this office unwanted back num- bers of the JourNau. For these gifts the Academy is very grateful. The income from sales of numbers and volumes of the JourNAL and PRrocEEDINGs, including the almost complete set mentioned above, was $532.68, from the Directory, $1.50, from copies of Monograph No. 1, $31.90, and from copies of the Index sold, $386.25. The total income from sales was $952.33, an-increase of over $400 over last year’s sales. Expenditures SUpo DUS sae he eae cesta Mois Sheeanenbnesene $ 5.88 Expenses in connection with Journal, ROR eldest nD ook coca Ed ne Meare tees 9.3714 Expenses in connection with Monograph INGORE Hise ope teria. neater urea Weenie 1.64 Expenses in connection with Index..... 6.3616 Postage used in mailing Directories to MEweAIMeMberSiye te seuaeendete. sem ee eee 3.95 SaaS tenor ea teeters tata arene oe det ei 1.50 ARO Callie Can tess ea nen a ea en $28.71 Storage Further progress was made in the rearrange- ment of the stock of numbers of the JouRNAL in the storage room we occupy in the Smithsonian Institution. It is expected that this task will be completed this year, especially since there is the strong possibility that we will have to vacate this room that we have occupied for many years. Haraup A. REHDER REPORT OF THE COMMITTEE ON MEMBERSHIP During the year 1954 the Committee on Membership recommended the nomination of 69 scientists, all of whom were invited to become members by the Board of Managers. To date 38 have become members. This is not a true esti- mate of new.members since it does not include individuals invited and accepting through actions JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 45, No. 3 taken late in the previous year, nor does it include | those recently acted upon by this Committee. The number of nominations handled by the Com- mittee is a little larger than that for the previous year and testifies to the efficacy of various methods introduced by Dr. Walker during his tenure. At the beginning of 1954 there were 164 vacancies in the resident membership. There are now 125 vacancies and a total of 675 resident members. Losses in membership for various reasons have made the total gain in resident membership only 29. Among the 69 nominees physical science fields are represented at the ratio of 54/15 as compared to those of biology. Ninety-eight members were sponsors in this year. Five are members of this Committee. To all these sponsors we are deeply indebted for their contribution to the growth of the Academy. I wish to thank individually, and as a group, the several members of the Committee on Mem- bership for their work for the Academy during the past year. I wish to thank particularly Drs. Frenkiel and Sanderson who were responsible together for 19 nominations. It is to be hoped that in the coming year the new President can appoint members to the Com- mittee on Membership from the various areas in which we presently do not have representation. It is sincerely recommended to all members that they: exercise their privilege of nominating new members without waiting for suggestion from the Membership Committee itself. Heinz SPECHT REPORT OF THE COMMITTEE ON THE EN- COURAGEMENT OF SCIENCE TALENT The year was marked by increased participa- tion on the part of the scientific and engineering, societies of Washington in stimulating interest in science among young people, particularly those in secondary schools. The Subcommittee on School Contacts worked actively with a parallel committee of the D. C. Council in providing a unified channel of communication between the scientific and engineering societies and the schools. Each school within a 25-mile radius of Washington was assigned to one or more members of the joint committee. These persons kept the schools informed as to lectures and other meetings for young people in the area. When requested they provided speakers and assisted teachers and Marcu 1955 students with science projects. After the Science Fair they visited the schools of the winning students to present awards to the students and plaques to the schools. The success of the Subcommittee’s work with the schools was shown by the great increase in the number of students participating in the science fairs of the area and by the very large attendance at lectures for young people. The principal lectures of the year were the Chemical Society Lecture by Dr. STERLING HENDRICKS in February and the two Christmas Lectures of the Philosophical Society by Prof. GEoRGE GAamMow. The main committee worked actively with the young people in the Governing Council of the Junior Academy which was responsible for con- ducting the Washington Science Fair. The Fair was held at American University on April 9-18, 1954, under the joint sponsorship of Science Service, the Academy and its affiliated societies, the D. C. Council of Architectural and Engineer- ing Societies, and the District of Columbia Board of Education. Funds in the amount of $1,800 were provided by contributions from local societies and individuals. A permanent record of _these and other activities was provided ina ‘“‘Red Book” of the Junior Academy covering the school years 1952-1953 and 1953-1954. The committee conducted a science talent search for Washington in connection with the thirteenth Westinghouse Science Talent Search. On recommendation of the committee the Academy granted 12 Certificates of Merit, six in recognition of original experimental work, and six for scholarship in science. These awards were presented at a joint meeting of the Academy and the Junior Academy on April 15, 1954, at which some of the winners spoke and others exhibited their projects. A. T. McPuHerson, Chairman Awards for Scientific Achievement for 1954 were presented to the following: In the Biological Sciences, to Leon JAcoss, National Institutes of Health. Introduced by WitiraM H. SeBRELL, Jr. In the Engineering Sciences, to W. S. PELLINI, Office of Naval Research. Introduced by Ep- WARD O. HULBERT. In the Physical Sciences, to Samurnnt N. Foner, Applied Physics Laboratory, Johns Hopkins University. Introduced by Ratpn E. GIBSON. After the presentation of the Awards, the PROCEEDINGS: THE ACADEMY O] President introduced Dr. Marranw W. Strr- LING, director, Bureau of American Ethnology, Smithsonian Institution, who spoke on Haploring the past in Panama. The address was illustrated with a color film through the courtesy of the National Geographic Society. After the report of the Committee of Tellers, the President declared the following persons elected to office: Raupu EE. Greson, President-Elect HeEINnz Specut, Secretary Howarp 8. Raprpieye, Treaswrer Wittriam W. Rupery and Jason R. Swatuen, Elected Members of Board of Managers to January 1958. The following members of the Academy, nominated by the Affiliated Societies, were elected Vice-Presidents of the Academy: Philosophical Society of Washington—Law- RENCE A. Woop Biological Society of Washington—HrrBErtr G. DrIGnan Chemical Society of Washington—Wiruiam W. WALTON Entomological Society of Washington—F. W. Poos National Geographic Society—ALEXANDER WETMORE Medical Society of the District of Columbia— FREDERICK O. Cor Columbia Historical Society—GILBERT GRos- VENOR Botanical Society of Washington—S. L. Ems- WELLER Washington Section, Society of American For- esters—GurorGE F. GRavatrT Washington Society of Engineers—H&rrBerr Grove Dorsny Helminthological Society of Washington—Joun S. ANDREWS Washington Branch, Society of American Bac- teriologists—Lioyp BuRKEY Washington Post, Society of American Military Engineers—FLoyp W. Houau District of Columbia Section, Society for Ex- perimental Biology and Medicine—W. C. Hess Washington Chapter, American Society for Metals—Tuomas G. Diaars Washington Section, International Association for Dental Research—Rosert M. SrerHan Washington Section, Institute of the Aeronau- tical Sciences—F. N. FRENKIEL District of Columbia Branch, American Mete- orological Society—Francis W. ReicHen- DERFER We) bo After expressing his appreciation for the co- operation of the members of the Academy during his term of office, Dr. DrEranporr introduced the incoming President, Dr. Marcarer PITrMan. She briefly outlined her plans for the coming Academy year and then declared the meeting adjourned. Jason R. SwAuuen, Secretary 473D MEETING OF BOARD OF MANAGERS The 473d meeting of the Board of Managers, held in the Tayloe Room of the Cosmos Club, June 1, 1954, was called to order by the President at 8 p.m. with the following in attendance: F. M. Deranporr, J. R. SWALLEN, J. A. STEVENSON, S. E. Forsusu, W. A. Dayton, G. F. Gravatt, A. H. Scorr, D. E. Parsons, F. W. Hoven, W.C. Hass, F. N. FRENKIEL, and, by invitation, Heinz Speecut, R. K. Cook, and Kerry JoHNSoN. Although the meeting was called primarily to elect new members, there was a rather lengthy discussion on science education. It was indi- cated that the new Committee on Science Edu- cation was planning to arrange meetings with school superintendents and science supervisors to discuss problems. President Drranporr stated that he had not yet appointed the special committee to consider means of improving Academy publications, pending selection of a chairman and his accept- ance. It was moved and carried that advance approval of the committee to be appointed be given. 474TH MEETING OF BOARD OF MANAGERS The 474th meeting of the Board of Managers, held in the Tayloe Room of the Cosmos Club, October 19, 1954, was called to order by the President at 8 p.m. with the following in at- tendance: F. M. Drranporr, MarGcarer Pirr- MAN, J. R. Swauuen, H. 8. Rappinyn, H. A. Reuper, J. C. Ewmrs, R. G. Barres, W. W. Dien, 8. E. Forsnusu, W. H. Giupert, W. A. Dayton, L. M. Hurcuins, G. F. Gravatt, L. A. SPINDLER, R. 8. Dinu, E. G. Hampp, F. N. FRENKIEL, and, by invitation, Hrrnz SPECHT, D. J. Davis, F. B. Stusper, R. K. Cook, and FRANK L. CAMPBELL. The President announced that the next meet- ing of the Board would be held on November 9, because the annual birthday dinner meeting of JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 45, NO. 3 the Cosmos Club would be held on November 16, the regular meeting time. By reference to the report of FRANK L. Camp- BELL, the President announced the appointment of the Special Committee on the Improvement of the Journal: Frank L. Camppety, Chairman, S. F. Buake, Jonn C. Ewrrs, F. N. FRENKIEL, C. Lewis Gazin, Liroyp G. Hensrest, THomas R. Henry, Martin A. Mason, Gorpon W. McBripg, Atvin G. McNisa, Marcarer Pirr- MAN, B. F. Scripnur, J. FRANKLIN YEAGER, AND L. E. Yocum. Dr. Davis stated that the November meeting would be held jointly with the Biological Society of Washington, with Dr. Konrap Z. LoRENzZ as the speaker, and the December meeting would be a general discussion of problems of science edu- cation, with Dr. D. W. Bronx and Dr. SamuEL H. BROWNELL as principal speakers. In the absence of Dr. McPuHerrson, the Presi- dent read part of a report of a meeting of the Committee on the Encouragement of Science Talent. This was primarily a planning meeting, and the results will be reported to the Board at a later date. Dr. Frank L. CampsBeu, chairman of the Special Committee on the Improvement of the Journal, presented a progress report which had been submitted to the Committee on Policy and Planning. The following recommendations were made by the special committee: In order to fix responsibility and gain con- tinuity of effort for the rehabilitation of the Jour- NAL it is recommended that an Editor, having full authority for the execution of policy, be nominated by the Board of Managers and elected by the members of the Academy and that the Edi- tor continue to serve as long as it is agreeable to him and to all concerned, as indicated by annual renomination by the Board and reelection by the members of the Academy. Note that amendment of the Bylaws would be required to effect this recommendation. In order to give the Editor assistance in solici- tation of manuscripts, or the direction of solicita- tion, it is recommended that three Associate Editors be elected annually by the Board of Man- agers, without limitation as to the possibility of reelection. Again, amendment of the Bylaws would be required to effect this recommendation. It is suggested that each of the Associate Editors be given specific responsibilities; e.g., one for ob- taining short original manuscripts, another for obtaining or preparing manuscripts on the prog- ress of science, the third for obtaining or prepar- ing local news copy. Marcu 1955 In order to multiply editorial awareness of the existence of suitable material for the JoURNAL and the number of solicitations that can be made to obtain it, it is reeommended that Correspond- ents, one for each society affiliated with the Acad- emy, be nominated by the affiliated societies and elected by the Board of Managers. Directed by the Editor or an Associate Editor, a Correspondent would solicit manuscripts for the JouRNAL from members of his society and would report the pro- grams, significant proceedings, and other news of his society to the Editor. It is not necessary that a Correspondent be a member of the Acad- emy. In order to extend the news-gathering net of the JouRNAL it is recommended that additional Correspondents be nominated and elected by the Board of Managers to serve the Editor in each of the large scientific research institutions of the Washington metropolitan area. If the institution has a press service or public relations office, the Correspondent would serve to screen news re- leases for the use of the JouRNat. He would also assist in soliciting manuscripts 1n his institution. In order to diminish the reluctance of experi- mental scientists to publish the results of their original work in the Jowrnal it is recommended (1) that the Editor be authorized and instructed to adjust charges for reprints to cover extra costs involved in setting up special kinds of material, (2) that the JouRNAL be exchanged with other scientific journals at the discretion of the Editor. In line with recommendation (1), it was moved and carried that the Editor be authorized and instructed to adjust charges for reprints to cover extra costs involved in setting up special kinds of material. There was considerable discussion of (2), on the exchange of the JouRNAL with other scientific journals, but no definite action was taken. It was suggested that the work of the special committee be continued by the subcommittee on ways and means. The Secretary reported the death of the fol- lowing members, noted since the last meeting of the Board in June: CHarLtes L. Maret, on March 3; THomas P. PENDLETON on May 28; JAMEs 8. Srumons on July 31; Joan C. HuspBarp on August 2; and Samurt W. Boaes on Septem- ber 14. A letter from Dr. W. J. V. OstERHOUT was read requesting that he be placed on the retired list. His request was approved effective as of December 31, 1954. Mr. Rappieye presented the request of Jay P. Kryney to be placed on the retired list. This was approved effective as of December 31, 1954. He reported that he had already received two contributions for the Science Fair. PROCEEDINGS: THE ACADEMY 93 Dr. REHDER reported that all complete sets of the JourNnaL had been sold. He was authorized by the Board to purchase complete sets not to exceed $200 a set. 475TH MEETING OF BOARD OF MANAGERS The 475th meeting of the Board of Managers, held in the Tayloe Room of the Cosmos Club, November 9, 1954, was called to order by the President at 8 p.m. with the following in at- tendance: F. M. Drranporr, Marcarer Pirr- MAN, J. R. SwaLLen, H. 8S. Rappieye, J. A. STEVENSON, J. C. Ewers, R. G. Bates, R. J. SEEGER, 8. E. Forsusu, W. A. Dayton, F. W. Poos, W. C. Huss, J. G. THompson, F. N. FRENKIEL, and, by invitation, Heinz Sprcut, F. B. SrusBeg, and Frank L. CAMPBELL. President Drranporr stated that the Com- mittee on Grants in Aid was preparing recom- mendations, and the chairman, Dr. Earon, would probably present them at the next meeting of the Board. Dr. Specer, chairman of the Committee on Science Education, reported that the committee had held its third meeting. He stated that it was marking time for the present, pending facts and data that are rather difficult to obtain. It was hoped that something more tangible would result from the December meeting of the Academy. In the absence of Dr. Read, acting chairman of the Committee on Encouragement of Science Talent, the President read the following report of the committee: It is becoming increasingly evident that the work of the Committee is a part of a wide and general movement both in Greater Washington and throughout the nation to increase the number of young people in careers in the sciences and their applications. The particular concern and responsibility of this committee is the Washington Junior Academy of Sciences and the science fairs which are now sponsored by this organization. The Junior Academy has made a good begin- ning in the current year. There have been several meetings of the Governing Council of this organ- ization, and one is being held on this date, which accounts for the absence of the acting chairman of your committee. Plans have been made for the year’s program. Two meetings of the Junior Academy have been held. The first, attended by around seventy, was addressed by Dr. Youden of the National Bureau of Standards. The second was the annual ‘‘Pro]- ects Meeting”’ at which some fifteen scientists and 94 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON engineers met with approximately two hundred students and their guests to plan and discuss projects for the science fairs in the spring. Future meetings will include: a session at Wilson Teachers College, devoted to the work of science teachers; the Christmas Lectures supported by the Philosophical Society; a meeting at the Belts- ville Laboratories of the Department of Agricul- ture; probably a trip to the Franklin Institute of Philadelphia; the Awards Program in connection with the Senior Academy; and a meeting at which the winners of various contests and fairs will dis- cuss their projects. The schools of Prince Georges County plan a science fair with a view of separate representation at the National Science Clubs annual science fair. It is also planned to have more small fairs in the individual schools and to send only the better exhibits to the final large fair, which will probably be held in the gymnasium of the McKinley High School. Letters have been sent by the President of the Washineton Academy to all organizations af- filiated with the Washington Academy of Sciences and the District of Columbia Council of Engineer- ing and Architectural Societies, asking that bud- get plans include support for the Annual Science Fairs. The Education Committee of the District Coun- cil is working with Dr. Arnold Scott’s subcom- mittee of the Academy in an extensive program aimed at arousing greater interest among students and their parents in science and mathematics and their applications. At a recent meeting of the Dis- trict Council, Chairman Higginson made a very encouraging report indicating not only increased interest on the part of engineers, but a still greater degree of cooperation with the Academy in this program. While not the immediate responsibility of your committee, there are several other phases of this broad program that should be included in this report. On September 23 there was a conference under the auspices of the Future Scientists of America Foundation to plan the 1955 program of this or- ganization. The Foundation is a part of the Na- tional Science Teachers Association and is closely affliated with the National Education Associa- tion. There was an attendance of around 100, including not only educators and representatives of such organizations as the U. 8. Office of Educa- tion and the Scientific Manpower Commission, but a number of people from professional societies and from large industries. The principal theme of this conference was the improvement of science teaching. The Engineering Manpower Commission main- tains a large and active Guidance Committee which operates on a regional basis. As the com- mittee member from the District of Columbia, your acting chairman attended the annual con- ference of Region III, which includes Pennsyl- vania, Maryland, Delaware, and the District of Columbia. The major interest of this regional committee by common consent is the effort to in- ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 45, No. 3 form and interest secondary school students. While approaches differ with local situations there appears to be real unanimity of purpose. A large number of people in Greater Washing- ton have become interested in having an educa- tional television station here, which is to be free of commercial sponsorship. An organization has been formed with institutional members, a board of trustees, and representatives from all sorts of clubs and societies. Plans of the Board of Trustees include a modest two-year program of education which would use programs on local stations before a final campaign for funds for a new station. Seven cities are operating such stations and a dozen more expect to. It would be well for each society affiliated with the Academy and the District Council to add to the duties of their sepa- rate educational representatives the responsibility for following the plans and progress of the Greater Washington Educational Television Association. Dr. CamMpBeE Lt, chairman of the Special Com- mittee on the Improvement of the JouRNAL, stated that he had met with Messrs. Ewers, Frenkiel, and Scribner to consider changes that might be made and the timing of them. It was indicated that some changes could be made in the JaNuARY issue along lines of information about local scientists and scientific institutions. The Secretary read the following report of the Nominating Committee: The Nominating Committee, consisting of the Vice-Presidents of the Academy, met in the Tay- loe Room of the Cosmos Club on Tuesday, Octo- ber 19, 1954. The meeting was called to order at 10 P.M. by S. E. Forbush, who presided. Others present were: W. H. Gilbert, W. A. Dayton, Lee M. Hutchins, G. F. Gravatt, L. A. Spindler, Richard 8. Dill, E. G. Hampp, and F. N. Frenkiel. The nominees selected for the offices to be filled by balloting by members in December were as follows: For President-Elect—Ratru E. Gipson For Secretary—Heinz Specht For Treasurer—Howard 8. Rappleye 7 For the Board of Managers to serve January 1955 to January 1958 (two to be elected): W. W. Diehl, Frank C. Kracek, W. W. Rubey, Jason R. Swallen. The deaths of the following members of the Academy were reported: David Fairchild on August 6, D. Breese Jones on September 5, George H. Shull on September 29, Norman C. Fassett on September 14, Raymond F. Bacon on October 14, Austin H. Clark on October 28, and Vera K. Charles on November 2. Mr. Rappleye reported that eight contributions amounting to $250.00 had been received for the Science Fair. Marcu 1955 | Dr. Frenkiel announced that the Christmas ‘Lectures of the Philosophical Society would be given on December 22 and 23, and the speaker would be Dr. George Gamovw. 476TH MEETING OF BOARD OF MANAGERS The 476th meeting of the Board of Managers, held in the Tayloe Room of the Cosmos Club, December 21, 1954, was called to order by the President at S p.m. with the following in at- tendance: F. M. Dreranporr, MarcGarer Pirr- MAN, J. R. SwaLLen, H. 8. Rappinyn, J. A. STEVENSON, W. W. Dreut, M. A. Mason, R. J. Seecer, A. T. McPuHeErson, 8. E. Forsusu, W. Ae Dayton, F. W. Poos, A. Wetmore, A. H. Score D. &. Parsons, F. W. Hover, W. C. Hess, E. G. Hamer, F. N. FReNKIEv and, by ivitation, R. C. Duncan, H. N. Earon, F. W. Sirssee, R. K. Coox, FRANK L. CAMPBELL, H. M. Trent, B. J. Otson, F. C. Kracex, Kerra JoHNSON, and Watson Davis. President DEFANDORF announced the appoint- ment of Dr. Harotp E. Frntey to the Commit- tee on Encouragement of Science Talent, to serve to January 1956 to complete the unexpired term of Austin Ciark. Dr. M. A. Mason and Dr. Roger Bates were appointed to represent the Academy on the Committee on Engineering Recognition of the District of Columbia Council of the Engineering and Architectural Society. In the absence of Dr. DorLAND Davis, chair- man of the Committee on Meetings, Dr. Wet- more reported that the speaker at the annual dinner meeting, to be held at the Kennedy- Warren, would be Dr. Matthew W. Stirling, director of the Bureau of American Ethnology, who would talk about his explorations in Panama. Arrangements have been made with the National Geographic Society to show one of their films taken by Dr. Stirling to illustrate the lecture. There was much discussion on the content of the rest of the program for the dinner meeting. It was unanimously approved that reports would be read by title only with the exception of the Treasurer’s report and the report of the Auditing Committee, and the President would briefly review the activities of the Academy during the year. The Awards for Scientific Achievement would be presented, but the recipients would not be expected to speak either at the annual meeting or subsequently at a later meeting. Rosert C. Duncan, chairman of the Com- PROCEEDINGS: THE ACADEMY 95 mittee on Awards for Scientific Achievement, asked the Chairmen of his subcommittees to present nominations for the awards. For the award in the Biological Sciences, Dr. Byron J. Otson presented the nomination of LEoN JAcoBs in recognition of his distinguished contributions to the field of parasitology. In the Engineering Sciences, Dr. Horack M. Trent presented the nomination of W. 8. PrLurnt in recognition of his notable contributions in the field of metals processing. In the Physical Sciences, Dr. F. C. Kracrxk presented the nomi- nation of SamuEL N. Foner, in recognition of his studies of constituents of flame reactions, and specifically for his direct experimental discovery and proof of the existence of the HO» radical in certain types of flames. These nominations were approved by the Board. Reporting for the Subcommittee for the Teach- ing of Science, Dr. M. A. Mason stated: The committee invited nominations from the heads of all educational institutions and school systems in the Metropolitan area, and received detailed information on seven nominees. The committee concludes on the basis of data available to 1t that no recommendation should be made for an award this year. The committee wishes to call attention to the service to young science students provided by Miss Margaret Patterson of Science Service in her guidance of Science Clubs of America and other services. It has been suggested to the committee that some recognition of Miss Patterson’s contri- butions might be appropriate for the Academy. The committee is aware that Miss Patterson is not eligible for any existing award of the Academy. The committee believes several persons in addi- tion to Miss Patterson may have contributed sub- stantially to encouragement of science talent, and therefore recommends that the Governing Council of the Junior Academy of Sciences be asked to in- form the Board of Managers on the desirability and a mechanism of recognizing such contribu- tions. Dr. Eaton, chairman of the Committee on Grants-in-Aid for Research, reported that no applications had been received for a grant, al- though various educational institutions had been informed that they were available. It was recom- mended that the allotment for the current year from the A.A.A.S. be added to that to be received next year. Dr. F. B. SirspEer, chairman of the Committee 96 JOURNAL OF THE on Policy and Planning, presented the following report: We have given careful consideration to the interim report dated October 12, 1954, of the Spe- cial Committee on the Improvement of the Jour- nal of the Washington Academy of Sciences, of which Dr. Frank L. Campbell was chairman, and discussed it at length at a meeting held December 14. In general we agree with its recommendations and look forward to receiving its further sugges- tions concerning ways and means. We feel that the Journal should be aimed at being interesting, informative and useful to its readers rather than, as at present, of primary usefulness to its authors by providing a medium for prompt publication of their original scientific work. The Journal should be a medium for inter- preting ‘Science in Washington’ to the nation and to the world. As indicated in the discussions of the Special Committee, articles fall into one or another of three main types: (1) short or long articles of gen- eral interest which may be either discussions of problems common to different branches of science, for example manpower, governmental programs, basic trends, or survey articles presenting current developments in rather broad fields of science for the information of workers in other fields; (2) short papers announcing original discoveries by scientific workers in Washington; and (3) local items of importance but relatively transient in- terest connected with scientific life in Washington. Our committee feels that the relative importance of these types of articles is that in which they are listed above rather than that implied by the recommendation on page 2 of the October 12 re- port of the Special Committee. It is obviously desirable that the short articles of category (2) announcing original scientific work should, if possible, be distributed over a much wider range of scientific disciplines than is usually the case at present. However, merely spreading the range of this type of paper would not really solve the main problem. It would mean that the chances that any individual member of the Academy would find something of interest in a given issue of his Journal would be definitely in- creased but his interest would still be stimulated by only a very small fraction of the whole maga- zine. Our committee is in hearty agreement with the Special Committee that it would be wise to fix responsibility and gain continuity of effort in the operation of the Journal by assigning its conduct primarily to a single editor who would have full authority for the execution of policy, and who would normally be expected to continue to serve for a number of years. We also agree that such an officer should be supported by a group of perhaps three associate editors. The selection of these individuals will require careful consideration and negotiation which could best be done by a rela- tively small group. Our committee therefore recommends that the editor be nominated by the WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 45, No. 3 Executive Committee of the Academy and elected by the Board of Managers and that the associate editors be similarly nominated by the Executive Committee in consultation with the editor and also elected by the Board of Managers. The elec- tion by the Board of Managers would permit the prompt filling of vacancies and avoid the delay and expense required by an election from the Academy membership as a whole. We feel that this advantage more than offsets the slight additional stature which might accrue to the editors if they were elected by the membership as a whole. Our committee is inclined to question the ef- fectiveness of the suggested corps of correspond- ents in the affiliated societies, although we do concur that such a liaison with the major scien- tific institutions of the city might be very helpful. Presumably the development of such relation- ships can be left to the discretion of the new board of editors. Our committee discussed briefly the possible desirability of paying the editor an honorarium. This in part might offset possible rather unofficial expenses (lunches with prospective authors, etc.) which he might find it desirable to incur and also might perhaps stimulate in him a more concrete sense of responsibility than if his services were entirely a ‘labor of love.’ We feel, however, that this matter should be left to the discretion of the Executive Committee of the Academy. Our committee does not feel that a possible gain in circulation resulting from an exchange with other scientific journals would offset the probable loss of a number of paid subscriptions and the bother and confusion of handling the journals received in exchange. The establishment of the new form of the Board of Editors will require amendments to the By-laws and amendments suitable to effect this are at- tached hereto for consideration by the Board of Managers. The proposed amendments to the Bylaws were then presented. They were approved by the Board and the Secretary instructed to submit them to the members of the Academy for a ballot vote. The proposed amendments are as follows: ART. III, Sec. 1—First sentence, after “Treas- urer’’? insert ‘‘an Editor.’’ Second sentence, delete ‘“‘the Senior Editor.’’ ART. III, Sec. 5—Revise by substituting: “The Board of Editors shall consist of the Editor and three Associate Editors. The Editor shall be elected annually by the Board of Man- agers on nomination of the Executive Commit- tee of the Academy. The Associate Editors shall be elected annually by the Board of Managers on nomination by the Executive Committee of the Academy acting in consultation with the Editor. Vacancies occurring during the year shall be filled in the same manner.” Marcu 1955 NEW ART. IV, See. 3—Change “‘Board of Editors’’ to “Biditor.” ART. IV, See. 5—Revise by substituting: “The Editor shall have charge of the Journal of the Academy and shall sign all contracts on behalf of the Journal.”’ ART. V, Sec. 1—Change ‘“‘Board of Editors’? to “Editor.” Dr. \IicPHERSON reported that the members of the Junior Academy were honor guests at the Christmas lectures of the Philosophical Society. Also that the Junior Academy was sponsoring a visit to the Franklin Institute. Dr. SEEGER, chairman of the Committee on Science Education reported that letters would be sent to all Academies requesting data as to what other Academies are doing about the problem of science education. MEMBERS 97 The Secretary reported the deaths of E. B. Bascock on December 8, 1954, and CorNELIUS J. CONNOLLY. The Treasurer reported that $415 had been received so far for the Science Fair. The problem of financing the attendance at the National Science Fair by winners of the local Science Fair was presented by Krrru JOHNSON. This was brought about by the fact that the Washington Daily News, which has sponsored participation in the National Science Fair, had withdrawn its support. Although several ideas were suggested and freely discussed, no solution seemed to be immediately available. JASON R. SWALLEN, Secretary NEW MEMBERS OF THE ACADEMY There follows a list of persons elected to membership in the Academy, by vote of the Board of Managers, since November 17, 1953, who have since qualified as members in accord- ance with the bylaws (see also this JouRNAL 44: 128-132. 1954). RESIDENT Elected November 17, 1958 Wittram H. ANDERSON, assistant chief, Division of Insect Detection and Identification, Bureau of Entomology and Plant Quarantine, U. S. Department of Agriculture, in recognition of his contributions to our knowledge of the systematics of the insect order Coleoptera as indi- cated by studies of the immature stages. Herman Bocarty, research associate, Harris Research Laboratories, in recognition of his ex- tensive investigations in cellulose and keratin chemistry involving their chemistry and proper- ties. CHARLES O. Hanptey, Jr., assistant curator, Division of Mammals, U. 8. National Museum, in recognition of his contributions to the field of systematic mammalogy, particularly in the American Arctic, Virginia, Guatemala, and Southwest Africa. Elected December 14, 1953 STrEwarT R. Cooper, professor of analytical chemistry, Howard University, in recognition of his work in analytical chemistry, and particularly his researches in the field of polarography. Henry Hopp, biometrician, Foreign <Agri- cultural Service, U.S. Department of Agriculture, in recognition of his contributions in the fields of forestry, soils, and agricultural experimentation, with notable achievements in the application of biometry to the development of agricultural experimentation and extension in underdeveloped countries. Vicror J. TULANE, associate professor of chemistry, Howard University, in recognition of his work as a teacher and research man in the field of biochemistry, and particularly for his work dealing with automatic increase of solvent polarity in chromatographical analysis. Elected January 11, 1954 ERNESTINE B. THURMAN, entomologist, Di- vision of International Health, U. S. Public Health Service, in recognition of her contribution to the taxonomy and biology of bloodsucking insects, particularly the mosquitoes of North America. Srpney H. Lresson, head, Electromagnetics Branch, Naval Research Laboratory, in recog- nition of his contributions in the fields of gaseous discharges, organic fluorescence, and solid state physics. Donatp B. McMutten, chief, Department of Medical Zoology, Army Medical Service Gradu- 98 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES ate School, Walter Reed Army Medical Center, in recognition of his contributions in the field of medical zoology, particularly on the epidemiology and control of schistosomiasis. Henry 8. FuLumr, assistant chief, Department of Entomology, Army Medical Service Graduate School, Walter Reed Army Medical Center, in recognition of his research in the field of medical entomology, including the use of arthropods as laboratory hosts of experimental infection, and on the epidemiology of arthropod-borne diseases. Cart O. Grasst, botanist, Division of Sugar Plant Investigations, U. 8. Department of Agri- culture, in recognition of his important taxonomic studies on sugarcane and its wild allies, and important contributions to sugarcane, genetics, including the breeding of disease resistant varieties. Elected February 16, 1954 Donovan 8S. CorreLe, botanist, Plant Intro- duction Section, U.S. Department of Agriculture, in recognition of his contributions to taxonomic and economic botany, especially his work on ferns and orchids. GEORGE Gamow, professor of theoretical physics, George Washington University, in recognition of his numerous contributions to astrophysics, cosmology, and nuclear physics. WattErR H. Hopes, assistant head, Plant Introduction Section, U. S. Department of Agri- culture, in recognition of his contributions to taxonomic and economic botany, especially his work on the flora of Dominica. Harry Potacuek, chief, Applied Mathematics Laboratory, David Taylor Model Basin, in recognition of his contribution to mathematics and, in particular, to the application of high- speed computing techniques in theoretical fluid dynamics. Harry WExter, chief, Scientific Services Di- vision, U. S. Weather Bureau, in recongition of his contribution to meteorology and, in par- ticular, to synoptic and dynamic meteorology and to solar and atmospheric radiation. Elected April 20, 1954 Joun A. Bennett, chief, Mechanical Metal- lurgy Section, National Bureau of Standards, in recognition of his contributions to physical metallurgy, particularly for his studies of the causes and mechanism of fatigue failures in metals. VOL. 45, NO. 3 Expert DeCoursey, director, Armed Forces Institute of Pathology, in recognition of his contributions to the pathology of atom-bomb injuries. Francis E. Enuiorr, oceanographer, U. 8. Navy Hydrographic Office, in recognition of his contributions to the geography of the oceans and to the physical characteristics of the inshore environment. Harotp E. Frnitny, head, Department of Zoology, Howard University, in recognition of his services as teacher and investigator in zoology, and in particular his work on sexual patterns in ciliates. E. R. Kennepy, assistant professor, Depart- ment of Biology, Catholic University of America, in recognition of his contributions to bacteriology and immunology and in particular his researches on quantitative aspects of the gram reaction. Morris C. Lerkrnp, chief, Historical Research Division, Medical Museum, Armed Forces Insti- tute of Pathology, in recognition of his con- tributions to the history of science, particularly in the fields of bacteriology and medicine. Russet W. Mgss, physicist, National Bureau of Standards, in recognition of his contribution to physical metallurgy, particularly for his re- searches on elastic properties of metal, flow and fracture of metals, and ultrasonic properties of metals. Ketso B. Morris, associate professor, De- partment of Chemistry, Howard University, in recognition of his services as a teacher of chem- istry on a university level, and particularly his work on the oxidation of hydroxylamine. Davip McK. Riocu, technical director, Neuro- psychiatry Division, Army Medical Service Graduate School, Walter Reed Army Medical Center, in recognition of his contributions to neurology and psychiatry. Merritt P. SariEs, associate professor, De- partment of Biology, Catholic University of America, in recognition of his work in experi- mental parasitology, and especially his con- tributions to our knowledge of the mechanisms of jmmunity to parasitic nematodes. Elected May 18, 1954 Vicror R. Boswett, head, Section of Vege- table Crops and Diseases, U. 8. Department of Agriculture, in recognition of his contributions to horticultural science and in particular his re- searches on the production, physiology, and breeding of vegetable crop plants. Marcu 1955 Evtas Bursrerx, head, Physics Section, Crystal Branch, Naval Research Laboratory, in recognition of his contribution to solid state physies and in particular his work on optical investigations of semiconductors and on color center formation in crystals. J. L. Ertcxsen, head, Theoretical Mechanics Section, Naval Research Laboratory, in recogni- tion of his outstanding researches in continuum mechanics, especially his discoveries in nonlinear elasticity and in the theory of invariance funda- mental to modern continuum mechanics. HERBERT FRIEDMAN, head, Electron Optics Branch, Optics Division, Naval Research Labora- tory, in recognition of his outstanding research in the fields of X-rays and Geiger counters which has culminated in his discovery that X-rays are present in theradiation from the sun with intensity sufficient to account for E-layer ionization. B. L. Horecker, chief, Section on Enzymes and Metabolism, National Institute of Arthritis and Metabolic Diseases, National Institutes of Health, in recognition of outstanding original work in enzymatic mechanisms. Lawrence M. KusHner, physical chemist, National Bureau of Standards, in recognition of his work on colloidal systems, in particular the size and shape of micelles by means of viscometric and light-scattering studies. JoHn R. Maanuss, head, Fruit and Nut Crop Investigations, U. 8. Department of Agriculture, in recognition of his contributions to horticultural science and in particular his researches on the physiology